JP7742170B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines that are configured to change display modes have been known .

JP 2013-31695 A

In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a problem in that once the period during which the display mode is changed ends, the player's motivation to play decreases and the player becomes bored with the game .

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, operation means operable by a player, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, determination means for making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, identification information display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, benefit awarding means capable of awarding a benefit advantageous to the player, and determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is configured so that when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means and a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, the identification information display means can display specific identification information, and when the specific identification information is displayed, the benefit can be awarded , and when a specific period of time has passed and a specific opportunity is established, a specific presentation mode can be displayed on the display means, and when the benefit is awarded, the notification means is configured to execute a notification effect that notifies the player that the special benefit will be awarded when a specific operation is performed by the operating means, the notification effect is executed at a timing after the specific performance mode is displayed, numerical information is displayed during the period in which the specific performance mode is displayed , first numerical information is displayed as the numerical information, the first numerical information is configured to reach second numerical information as the game progresses , and the game is configured to allow the player to understand that the specific performance mode will end when the numerical information reaches the second numerical information , the notification effect is executed at a timing before the specific identification information is displayed, third numerical information obtained by adding a predetermined value to the value of the second numerical information is displayed in a situation in which the special benefit will be awarded , and the display period of the specific performance mode is configured to be shorter when a specific operation is performed by the operating means than when the specific operation is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is provided a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, an operation means operable by a player, an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, an identification information display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player, and a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means and a specific determination result is determined by the determination means , the identification information display means is configured to display specific identification information, the benefit is granted when the specific identification information is displayed , and when a specific period of time has passed and a specific opportunity is established, a specific presentation mode is displayed on the display means, and when the benefit is granted and has an alarm means capable of executing an alarm effect to notify that the awarding of the bonus will be executed, and is configured so that the alarm effect can be executed at a timing after the specific performance mode is displayed, and is configured so that numerical information can be displayed during the period in which the specific performance mode is displayed , and is configured so that first numerical information can be displayed as the numerical information, and the first numerical information can reach second numerical information as the game progresses, and is configured so that the player can understand that the specific performance mode will end when the numerical information reaches the second numerical information, and the alarm effect is executed at a timing before the specific identification information is displayed, and is configured so that third numerical information obtained by adding a predetermined value to the value of the second numerical information can be displayed in a situation in which the awarding of the bonus is executed , and is configured so that the display period of the specific performance mode can be shorter when a specific operation is performed by the operating means than when the specific operation is not performed.

This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation unit in a state where the base displacement member and the relative displacement member are disposed at the retracted position. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a protruding operation unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of a connecting rod. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a transmission means in a front view. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing a transmission means in a front view. FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of a base-side displacement member and a relative displacement member. FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of a base-side displacement member and a relative displacement member. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. 17A is a side view of the protrusion operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protrusion operation unit at portion XVIIb in FIG. 17A. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the combined action unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the combined action unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined action unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined action unit. 22(a) is a front view of the driven member and the driven member, and FIG. 22(b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22(a). 1A is a front view of the driven member, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the driven member. FIG. 23( a ) is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV. 1A is a front view of the driven member, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 25( a ). 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. 1A is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the first guide groove, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing their relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a rotational motion unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational motion unit. FIG. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view of a rotational motion unit. 37(a) is a rear view of the main body, and FIG. 37(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body showing an enlarged portion XXXVII of FIG. 37(a). FIG. 2 is a front view of the rotational motion unit. 38(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotational motion unit taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38(a), and FIG. 38(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotational motion unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 38(b). 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of a normal hold effect. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the eight-piece effect. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing display modes in a variation pattern of a composite display mode. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing display modes in a variation pattern of a composite display mode. 10 is a timing chart showing the period setting from when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode during the time performance period. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode during the time performance period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode during the time performance extension period. 10A is a schematic diagram showing the display mode at the end of the time presentation period. FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an overview of various counters. 1A is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM in the main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a special win random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a special win type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a normal win random number table. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice and lamp control device, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice and lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a time setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice and lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a button effect selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the synchronized performance management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the extended performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the button effect execution process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a background image setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a notice command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a rendering command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10A is a flowchart showing a background image change command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram comparing the pixel sizes of the main liquid crystal display and the sub-liquid crystal display. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a comparison of the display sizes of the main LCD and sub-LCD of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device for a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the internal structure of a distribution unit according to a fourth embodiment. A time chart for explaining the presentation control regarding the reserved pattern presentation in the fourth embodiment. 10A is a diagram schematically illustrating area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual display screen in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the normal hold effect in the fourth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the eight-piece effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the eight-piece effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the additional winning effect in the fourth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the special continuation effect in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the flow of composite display effects in the fourth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the composite display effect in the fourth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the composite display effect in the fourth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the composite display effect in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display mode of the composite display effect in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart for explaining the flow of time presentation in the fourth embodiment. 13A to 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the time presentation in the fourth embodiment. 13A to 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the time presentation in the fourth embodiment. 13A to 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating the display mode of the time presentation in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fourth embodiment. 10A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 10A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a schematic representation of the performance time selection table in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a timetable of the performance times selected by the performance time selection table in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a variation execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a time setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice and lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an identification number input process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the 8-item hold presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a button presentation process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing button effect selection process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the eight-item performance setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the synchronous performance management process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance time setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the extended performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing pending command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rendering command process 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the internal structure of a distribution unit according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart illustrating the flow of special symbol variation effects performed using the main screen and sub-screen in the fifth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. 10A to 10B are schematic diagrams showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 3 executed by an MPU in the voice and lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a preliminary pseudo-variation setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing drawing processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figures 1 to 39, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Figure 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 2), which has numerous nails and winning slots 63, 64, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. To support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1). The front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed serving as the opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which juts out forward and is roughly box-shaped with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are ejected onto this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is sloped downward to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, to change the stage of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or to change the content of the super reach presentation.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting devices such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their illumination by lighting up or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during play. The periphery of the window 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps, such as jackpot lamps. When a jackpot is hit or a reach is reached, the built-in LEDs light up or flash, causing each illumination unit 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is just one step away from a jackpot. Additionally, the upper left corner of the front frame 14, as viewed from the front (see Figure 1), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, to create a more dazzling effect, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the component configuration common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center that is roughly box-shaped with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for enabling the ball launching unit 112a to operate, a launch stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 through changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is thus shot into the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, along with numerous ball-guiding nails (not shown) and a windmill, as well as rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, and a variable display unit 80, with its periphery attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing and are fixed to the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1). Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate and shaped like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area on the front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is the area on the front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (the area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a certain amount of force hits the return rubber 69, reducing its momentum and bouncing back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with multiple LEDs and a 7-segment display, which serve as light-emitting means, are located at the lower left side of the play area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Figure 2). The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information in response to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and primarily display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning slot 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball has entered the second winning slot 640, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether the mode is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, and also use a 7-segment display to display the number of rounds during a jackpot or an error. The multiple LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated using a small number of LEDs by combining different light colors.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 or the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The jackpot types that can be determined here include a 15R probability jackpot, a 4R probability jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not by displaying the stopped symbols after the variation has ended, but also display a symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R probability jackpot" is a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, and a "4R probability jackpot" is a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 4 rounds. Furthermore, a "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, and enters a time-saving state for a specified number of variations (e.g., 100 variations).

The term "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after a jackpot, i.e., during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability change), or in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of a hit for the second symbol described below increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, i.e., a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than during a probability change. The time-saving state (during time saving) within the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of a hit for the second symbol increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it is in a gaming state that is neither in a special mode nor in a time-saving mode (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving mode, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is open is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win into the second winning slot 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving mode, it is easier for the ball to win into the second winning slot 640, and the number of jackpot draws can be increased.

In addition, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, rather than changing the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric device 640a opens per hit may be increased compared to normal mode. Also, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, but at least one of the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 and the number of times the electric device 640a opens per hit may be changed. Also, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 or the number of times the electric device 640a opens per hit may not be changed, but only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal mode.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning slots 63, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area. The variable display device unit 80 is equipped with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable third pattern in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in the first winning slot 64 and second winning slot 640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable second pattern in response to a ball passing through the through gate 67.

The variable display device unit 80 also has a center frame 86 disposed around the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through an opening in the center of this center frame 86. When the protruding operation unit 400 or composite operation unit 500 (described below) is operated, at least a portion of their relative displacement member 450 and driven member 560 protrudes into the opening in the center frame 86 and becomes visible through the opening. For example, when the protruding operation unit 400 is placed in the rotation position by a first operation (see FIG. 14(a)), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening in the center frame 86. When the protruding operation unit 400 is placed in the protruding position by a second operation (see FIG. 15(b)), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening in the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch LCD display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. While the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), the third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment displays decorative images in accordance with the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured using, for example, reels.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the winning lottery is a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol has been displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and display is set to be shorter during a special rate or time-limited play than during normal play. As a result, the second symbol changes and displays for a shorter period of time during special rate and time-limited play, allowing for more winning draws than normal play. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving players more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second winning slot 640 to be open. Therefore, during special rate and time-limited play, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640.

Note that if conditions are created that make it easier for a ball to enter the second winning slot 640 during a special rate or time-saving mode by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens per win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special rate or time-saving mode than during normal mode, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the gaming state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens per win may be kept constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the gaming board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the gaming board and flow down the right side of the gaming board to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a drawing for a second symbol is held. After the drawing, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the drawing results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display, and if the drawing results in a loss, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.

Balls can be held for a maximum of four passes through the through gate 67, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, the maximum number of held balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the second symbol fluctuation display may be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the second symbol display device, as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a portion of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol reserve lamp may be lit by a portion of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for a ball passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Furthermore, the number of installed through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). Furthermore, the installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, on the left of the variable display device unit 80. Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning slot 64, into which a ball can enter, is located below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning slot 64, a first winning slot switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When this first winning slot switch turns on, a jackpot drawing is conducted by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and a display corresponding to the drawing result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning opening 640 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When this second winning opening switch turns on, a jackpot drawing is conducted by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and a display corresponding to the drawing result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Furthermore, each of the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640 is also a winning slot from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 may be different; for example, three prize balls may be paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64, and five prize balls may be paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 640.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win through the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed in a variable display in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67, and a "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win through the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the probability variation and time-limited play, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a enters the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time-limited play, the time that the electric device 640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the probability variation and time-limited play, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 640 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R probability jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the same electric device as the second winning slot 640, and balls are always able to enter.

As a result, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot 640 is often closed, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning slot 64, which has no electric device, by firing the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called "left shot"), thereby increasing the chances of winning the jackpot by winning at the first winning slot 64.

On the other hand, during the probability bonus or time-saving mode, passing the ball through the through gate 67 tends to open the electric device 640a attached to the second winning slot 640, making it easier to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball towards the second winning slot 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot 640, resulting in a 15R probability bonus jackpot.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to change the way they shoot the ball, making the game more enjoyable.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed above and to the right of the first winning opening 64, with a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a located in its approximate center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery resulting from a winning entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is illuminated to display the jackpot stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. The game state then transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an added gaming value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate to open and close forward, using the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which balls can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to a jackpot lights up in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. While the specific winning opening 65a is open, if a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, creating a game state that forms a special game state. Furthermore, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one; one or more (e.g., three) may be provided. Furthermore, the location is not limited to the upper right of the first winning opening 64, but may also be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. Stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the game area that do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is located below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 is fitted with numerous nails to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and is also equipped with various components (game parts) such as windmills.

As shown in Figure 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with an MPU (a single-chip microcomputer) that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and other necessary components.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using the specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The main control unit 110 uses the MPU 201 to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second symbol display device.

In addition, to instruct sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via the data transmission/reception circuit, but these commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area that stores the contents of MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses for control programs executed by MPU 201, and a work area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. Furthermore, RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from power supply unit 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during startup processing (not shown) when power is turned on. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing method.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and solenoids 209, which include a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as its axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, which include a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, as well as a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115.The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 211, as well as a work area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lights on and off from the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, such as variable effects (variable display) and preview effects, performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. The other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

The sound and lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern commands, stop type commands, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode using commands (display variation pattern commands, display stop type commands, etc.). The sound and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame buttons 22, and when the player operates the frame buttons 22, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the presentation content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a back image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the back image refers to the image displayed behind the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the commands sent from the sound and lamp control device 113.

The voice and lamp control device 113 also receives commands (display commands) from the display control device 114 that indicate the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display commands received from the display control device 114, the voice and lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern variable presentation and other aspects of the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the audio lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display content of the third pattern display device 81. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby coordinating the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 equipped with a RAM erase switch 122 (see Figure 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as needed to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control unit 110 to clear backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see Figure 3) is pressed. When the main control unit 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control unit 111.

Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figures 5 and 6 are front views of the unit storage member 300, with Figure 5 showing the operation units 400-800 in their retracted positions, and Figure 6 showing the protruding operation unit 400 and composite operation unit 500 in their extended positions.

As shown in Figures 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (the front side of the paper in Figure 5) and is made up of a bottom wall panel that is rectangular when viewed from the front and outer wall panels that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall. A rectangular opening 301 when viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom panel of the unit storage member 300, thereby forming the unit storage member 300 into a rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The opening 301 is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) (i.e., large enough to accommodate the third pattern display device 81).

The unit storage member 300 houses a protruding operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a rotation operation unit 600, a retracting operation unit 700, and an extension operation unit 800 in its internal space, thereby constituting the operation unit 200 as a single unit.

The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and operates (displaces) these displacement members 440, 450 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. 6. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stacked in the front-to-back direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5), thereby reducing the space required for the retracted position. Meanwhile, in the extended position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced relative to the base displacement member 440, increasing the overall size and ensuring visibility and enhancing the presentation effect. The operation of this protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17.

The composite motion unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see Figures 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and moves (displaces) these members 550, 560 between the retracted position shown in Figure 5 and the extended position shown in Figure 6. In this case, the composite motion unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only rotational motion around a predetermined position, while causing the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 to perform a combination of linear and rotational motion, thereby varying the trajectory of the driven member 560 and enhancing the dramatic effect. The operation of this composite motion unit 500 will be described later with reference to Figures 18 to 32.

The rotational motion unit 600 comprises a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 arranged concentrically. By rotating these two rotating bodies 650, 660, the player can easily associate the rotation of both bodies, thereby achieving the dramatic effect of rotating each of the multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660). The operation of this rotational motion unit 600 will be described later with reference to Figures 33 to 39.

The retraction operation unit 700 is equipped with a retraction member 710 that is slidably displaceable, and the extension operation unit 800 is equipped with an extension member 810 that is rotatably formed. The retraction member 710 and extension member 810 are operated (displaced) by sliding or rotating between the retracted position shown in Figure 5 and an extension position (not shown) in which they extend in front of the opening 301 (third pattern display device 81, see Figure 2).

Next, the protrusion operation unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 7 to 17. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation unit 400 with the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 positioned in the retracted position. Figure 8(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion operation unit 400, and Figure 8(b) is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

Note that Figures 7 and 8 show a state in which a retractable operation unit 700, which shares the case body 410 with the protruding operation unit 400, is installed next to the protruding operation unit 400. A pair of protruding operation units 400 are arranged below the opening 301, one on each side of the retractable operation unit 700 (see Figures 5 and 6). Since these pairs of protruding operation units 400 are formed symmetrically and have substantially the same structure, only one of them (the one located on the right side when viewed from the front) will be described, and a description of the other (the one located on the left side when viewed from the front) will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 7 and 8, the protrusion operation unit 400 is mainly composed of a case body 410 that forms the skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 that is arranged on the front side of the case body 410, multiple gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, and crank gear 433) that transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420, a base displacement member 440 that is rotatably supported on the case body 410, a relative displacement member 450 that is arranged on the base displacement member 440 so that it can slide, and a connecting rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and is rotatably supported on the case body 410.

The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a storage recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to multiple gears (gears 431, 432, 433) is recessed into the front surface (anterior surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side in Figure 8(a)), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side in Figure 8(a)). Each support shaft 412, 413 is made of brass, and is disposed in a position parallel to the rotation axis of each gear 431-433.

In this embodiment, when the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are positioned in the retracted position, as described below, the displacement members 440, 450, the connecting rod 460, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (see Figure 13). By providing a storage recess 411 in the front of the case body 410 and storing the gears 431, 432, and 433 in the storage recess 411, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be made smaller in the front-to-rear direction.

A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is meshed with the pinion gear 431, and the intermediate gear 432 is meshed with a crank gear 433. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is driven to rotate and the pinion gear 431 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, causing the crank gear 433 to rotate.

The intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433 are journaled on the case body 410. Each gear 431-433 is formed as a spur gear with teeth carved into the outer periphery parallel to the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has radial decorations on its front (axial end face), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end face) is larger than the tip circle of the teeth carved into the outer periphery, allowing the teeth to be hidden from the player when viewed from the front.

A crank pin 433a protrudes from the front (axial end surface) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is connected to the connecting rod 460 and is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 (see Figures 9 and 10). As a result, when the crank gear 433 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

The base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performance members that are displaced from a retracted position to an extended position to create a performance (see Figures 5 and 6). The base displacement member 440 (axial support hole 442) is rotatably supported on the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base displacement member 440.

Here, a decorative portion 454 is formed on the front side of the relative displacement member 450. The decorative portion 454 is a portion for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is formed as a whole in a tapered shape when viewed from the front, with its width narrowing from the base end side (the side toward the center of rotation when the base displacement member 440 is rotated; lower side in Figures 7 and 8) to the tip side (the side toward the tip of rotation when the base displacement member 440 is rotated; upper side in Figures 7 and 8), and a first portion 454a, a second portion 454b, and a third portion 454c are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction on the front side of the decorative portion 454.

The first portion 454a, second portion 454b, and third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed to a size that corresponds to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. In other words, the second portion 454b, which is located more centrally than the first portion 454a, which is located at the tip, and the third portion 454c, which is located more proximal than the intermediate second portion 454b, are each formed to have a large outer hexagonal shape.

In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are positioned at different positions in the front-to-rear direction (positions perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b, which is positioned more centrally than the first portion 454a, which is positioned at the tip, and the third portion 454c, which is positioned more proximal than the second portion 454b, which is positioned at the middle, are each positioned on the front (forward) side (near the plane of the paper in Figure 5).

As a result, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (i.e., the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is tilted downward in a stepped manner (three steps in this embodiment) in the direction approaching the case body 410 from the base end side (towards the rotation center of the base displacement member 440, the lower side in Figures 7 and 8) to the tip end side (towards the rotation tip end of the base displacement member 440, the upper side in Figures 7 and 8).

As described below, this allows both displacement members 440, 450 to pass behind the decorative member 480 (see Figures 16 and 17) while preventing contact with the decorative member 480 when rotating the base displacement member 440 (see Figures 13 and 14), improving the dramatic effect. When the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see Figure 15), the decorative part 454 can be positioned in front (forward), enhancing impact.

The detailed configuration of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see Figures 11 and 12).

The connecting rod 460 is a long, plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and is formed with a support hole 461 drilled as a circular hole at one longitudinal end, a connecting hole 462 drilled as an elongated hole extending along the longitudinal direction at the other longitudinal end opposite the support hole 461, and a rod groove 463 recessed on the back side as a recessed groove extending along the longitudinal direction between the support hole 461 and the connecting hole 462.

The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 with the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 inserted through the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 inserted through the rod groove 463. The connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 rotates around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10). With the rotation of the connecting rod 460, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 rotate (first operation) and slide (second operation) (see FIG. 12), moving (displacing) between the retracted position and the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, base displacement member 440, and relative displacement member 450 are each disposed on the front (one surface) side of the case body 410. Therefore, the dimensions of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-to-rear direction can be reduced compared to, for example, a case in which the base displacement member 440 and relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front (one surface) side and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back (other surface) side of the case body 410.

Furthermore, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged in the retracted position with the drive motor 420 positioned on their longitudinal extension (see Figure 13(a)), so the drive motor 420, base displacement member 440, and relative displacement member 450 can be arranged in a straight line. This effectively reduces the space required for the retracted position on the front side of the case body 410.

In addition, in this embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is composed of a connecting rod 460 that, together with multiple gears (gears 431-433) and the crank gear 433, forms a crank mechanism. As described below, the transmission means (gears 431-433 and connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411, 412 are positioned so that the connection between the connecting rod 460 (connection hole 462 and rod groove 463) and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located within the area between the rod support shaft 412 and the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410.

As a result, when the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed in the retracted position, the transmission means can be disposed in an area that overlaps the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in a front view. In other words, the dead space formed on the back side of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed in the retracted position can be effectively utilized as space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420 and the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 described above, a synergistic reduction in the external size of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-to-rear direction and in a front view can be achieved.

Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figures 9 and 10 are schematic front views showing the transmission means as viewed from the front, with Figure 9(a) showing the state in which the crank gear 433 is positioned at the first rotation position, Figure 9(b) showing the state in which the crank gear 433 is positioned at the intermediate rotation position, and Figure 10 showing the state in which the crank gear 433 is positioned at the second rotation position.

In Figures 9 and 10, to simplify the drawings and make them easier to understand, the shapes of the gears 431-433 and the connecting rod 460 are shown schematically. Also, in Figures 9 and 10, the positions of the center line of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is positioned at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are shown as positions P1, Pm, and P2, respectively, using dashed double-dashed lines.

In addition, in the explanation of Figures 9 and 10, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 13 to 15. Figure 9(a) corresponds to the state shown in Figures 13(a) and 13(b), Figure 9(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figures 14(a) and 14(b), and Figure 10 corresponds to the state shown in Figures 15(a) and 15(b).

As shown in Figure 9(a), when the crank gear 433 is positioned in the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is positioned in position P1, the base displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is positioned in the reference position (see Figures 12(a) and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is positioned in the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 can be restricted from rotating counterclockwise (as shown in FIG. 9( a)) (i.e., rotating in a direction that retracts the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the extended position to the retracted position) by abutting the crank pin 433a against the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs, for example, due to an electrical factor, when the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are being moved from the extended position to the retracted position, a mechanical mechanism (a stopper mechanism that restricts the crank pin 433a with the rod groove 463) can prevent the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from being displaced beyond the retracted position, thereby preventing the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 from colliding with other components.

When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9(a), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 slides in the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 toward the lower end (the end opposite the rod support shaft 412), causing the connecting rod 460 to rotate clockwise around the rod support shaft 412. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9(b), the connecting rod 460 is positioned at position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is positioned at the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the reference position (see FIGS. 12(b) and 14).

When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 9(b), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 slides in the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 toward the lower end (the end opposite the rod support shaft 412) and then toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side), causing the connecting rod 460 to rotate clockwise around the rod support shaft 412. As a result, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotation position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at position P2. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is positioned in the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is positioned in the extended position (see FIGS. 12(c) and 15).

Even when the crank gear 433 is positioned in the second rotation position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, just as when the crank gear 433 is positioned in the first rotation position shown in Figure 9 (a).

Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is positioned in the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 can be restricted from rotating clockwise (see FIG. 10) (i.e., rotating in a direction that extends the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the extended position) by abutting the crank pin 433a against the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs, for example, due to an electrical factor, when the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are being moved from the retracted position to the extended position, a mechanical mechanism (a stopper mechanism that restricts the crank pin 433a with the rod groove 463) can prevent the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from being displaced beyond the extended position, thereby preventing the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 from colliding with other components.

Next, the configuration and operation of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described with reference to Figures 11 and 12. Figure 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

As shown in Figure 11, the base displacement member 440 is mainly formed by a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of an elongated plate, a support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body portion 441, and a first slide hole 443 and a second slide hole 444 drilled as elongated holes extending along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 441 (the vertical direction in Figure 11).

The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted. With this insertion, the base displacement member 440 is rotatably supported on the case body 410 with the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation. In other words, as described below, the base displacement member 440 is rotatably supported between a retracted position (see Figures 12(a) and 13) and a rotated position (see Figures 12(b), 12(c), 14, and 15).

In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed below the longitudinal center of the main body 441 and offset to one side (toward the protruding position) from the widthwise center of the main body 441. This reduces the rotation angle required for the base displacement member 440 to protrude a predetermined amount (predetermined area) from the outer edge of the case body 410, thereby shortening the time required to rotate the base displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotated position, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect achieved by the displacement of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

The relative displacement member 450 is primarily comprised of a main body 451 formed in the shape of a long plate, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body, a pair of slide pins 453 arranged at a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the main body 451 (the vertical direction in Figure 11), and a decorative part 454 disposed on the front surface of the main body 451.

The connection pin 452 and slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and second slide hole 444 of the base displacement member 440, respectively. This insertion allows the relative displacement member 450 to be slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member 440. In other words, as described below, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base displacement member 440 so as to be slidably displaceable between a reference position (see Figures 12(a), 12(b), 13, and 14) and an extended position (see Figures 12(c) and 15).

In this case, the tip of the connecting pin 452 protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base displacement member 440 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and this insertion connects the relative displacement member 450 to the crank gear 433 (see Figure 8) via the connecting rod 460.

As a result, as described below, by rotating the crank gear 433, the connecting rod 460 is rotated around the rod support shaft 412 (see Figure 9), which causes the base-side relative displacement member 450 to rotate around the base-side support shaft 413 (first operation) and also causes the relative displacement member 450 to slide relative to the base-side displacement member 440 (second operation) (see Figure 12).

Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are arranged at different positions (spaced apart) along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (the vertical direction in Figure 11). Therefore, the points at which the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base displacement member 440 can be dispersed along the longitudinal direction, thereby suppressing relative displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 in the front-to-rear direction (the direction toward and away from the case body 410), and stabilizing slide displacement.

In addition, the connection pin 452 is positioned closer to the longitudinal tip of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in Figure 11) than the slide pin 453. This allows the point at which the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 to be closer to the longitudinal tip of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the point at which the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the pivot hole 442 of the base displacement member 440 toward the longitudinal tip (upper side in Figure 11). As a result, it is possible to more easily prevent the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 from swinging in the front-to-rear direction (the direction toward or away from the case body 410).

In other words, only the longitudinal base side (axial support hole 442) of the base displacement member 440 is pivotally supported by the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base displacement member 440. As a result, the longitudinal tip ends of both displacement members 440, 450 are free ends, and the tip ends are prone to swinging back and forth during the first operation. This swinging can cause the tip ends to come into contact with the decorative member 480. For this reason, a structure in which the longitudinal tip end is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is effective.

A collar C is rotatably fitted onto the connection pin 452 and slide pin 453. By interposing the collar C between the outer circumferential surfaces of the connection pin 452 and slide pin 453 and the inner circumferential surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and second slide hole 444, the pins 452 and 453 can slide smoothly along the slide holes 443 and 444. Furthermore, by interposing the collar C (more specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) between the main body 441 of the base displacement member 440 and the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460, the opposing distance between the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460 can be maintained constant.

The connecting pin 452 has a circular plate S fastened to its distal end face by a screw, preventing it from coming off the connecting rod 460. The slide pin 453 has a long, flat slide guide 470 fastened to its distal end face by a screw, preventing it from coming off the base displacement member 440.

Figure 12 is a rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. Note that Figure 12(a) corresponds to the state shown in Figures 9(a) and 13 (i.e., a state in which the crank gear 433 is in the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is in position P1), and Figure 12(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figures 9(b) and 14 (i.e., a state in which the crank gear 433 is in the intermediate rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is in position Pm). Also, Figure 12(c) corresponds to the state shown in Figures 10 and 15 (i.e., a state in which the crank gear 433 is in the second rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is in position P2).

As shown in Figure 12(a), when the connecting rod 460 is located at position P1 (see Figures 9(a) and 13), the rotational position of the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413 is the retracted position, which is the position closest to the rod support shaft 412, and the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 is the reference position, which is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base displacement member 440 is minimal. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460.

From the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9(a)) rotates, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 12(a)) around the rod support shaft 412. This causes the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 to slide through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 toward the lower end (the end opposite the rod support shaft 412), and the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 rotate clockwise (see FIG. 12(a)) together with the relative displacement member 450 around the base support shaft 413 (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm (see FIG. 9(b) and FIG. 14) as shown in FIG. 12(b), the base displacement member 440 is positioned at the rotation position farthest from the rod support shaft 412.

In this case, the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, rotation of the connecting rod 460 left (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12( a) around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation causes the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 to slide along the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 toward the lower end. However, because this sliding direction is approximately along the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, no force component is generated in the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440. Therefore, while maintaining the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 (restricting sliding displacement from the reference position), it is possible to generate only rotation of the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation.

This allows the relative displacement member 450 to rotate around the base support shaft 413 while minimizing the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440, thereby reducing the distance between the rotating tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see Figure 7) or decorative member 480 (see Figures 16 and 17). As a result, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be made smaller, and design freedom can be increased when defining the shape of the decorative member 480.

From the state shown in Figure 12(b), when the crank gear 433 (see Figure 9(b)) rotates, causing the connecting rod 460 to rotate left (counterclockwise) in Figure 12(b) around the rod support shaft 412 as its center of rotation, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 slides through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) and then toward the lower end (the end opposite the rod support shaft 412), causing the relative displacement member 450 to slide and displace in the direction of extension along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443, 444) relative to the base displacement member 440 (second operation). As a result, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 (see Figures 10 and 15), as shown in Figure 12(c), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 is set to the protruding position, which is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base displacement member 440 is maximum.

In this case, the rotational position of the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position farthest from the rod support shaft 412. That is, counterclockwise rotation of the connecting rod 460 around the rod support shaft 412 (FIG. 12(b)) causes the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 to slide along the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. However, because this sliding direction is approximately perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, only a force component in the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 is generated, and no force component in the direction of rotating the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413 is generated. Therefore, it is possible to restrict rotation of the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413, while only sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 can be generated.

As a result, while the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440 is maintained at a minimum (while the relative displacement member 450 is maintained in the reference position), the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotated position (first operation), and after this first operation is completed, a sliding movement (second operation) is performed in which the relative displacement member 450 is extended longitudinally relative to the base displacement member 440 while the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (while the base displacement member 440 is maintained in the rotated position). In other words, since the rotation movement and the sliding movement can be separated and performed in two separate steps, the player can clearly recognize the different types of movements compared to when these rotation movement and sliding movement are performed simultaneously, and the dramatic effect achieved by displacing each of the displacement members 440, 450 can be enhanced.

The operation of the protrusion operation unit 400 configured as described above will be explained with reference to Figures 13 to 15.

Figures 13 to 15 are front views of the protrusion operation unit 400. As mentioned above, Figures 13(a) and 13(b) correspond to the states shown in Figures 9(a) and 12(a), Figures 14(a) and 14(b) correspond to the states shown in Figures 9(b) and 12(b), and Figures 15(a) and 15(b) correspond to the states shown in Figures 10 and 12(c). Also, Figures 13(b), 14(b), and 15(b) show the state in which the base displacement member 440 and relative displacement member 450 have been removed.

As shown in Figures 13 to 15, with the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the base displacement member 440 is configured to be rotatable between the retracted position shown in Figure 13(a) and the rotated positions shown in Figures 14(a) and 15(a), and the relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base displacement member 440 is configured to be slidably displaceable between the reference position shown in Figures 13(a) and 14(a) and the extended position shown in Figure 15(a). This makes it possible to perform a first operation of rotating the base displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotated position, and a second operation of displacing the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 between the reference position and the extended position.

As a result, as shown in Figures 13(a) and 14(a), the base displacement member 440, which is in the retracted position, can be moved to the rotated position by a first operation, and the relative displacement member 450, which is in the reference position, can be slid (extended) to the protruding position by a second operation, causing the relative displacement member 450 to protrude outward from the base displacement member 440, as shown in Figure 15(a). Therefore, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be made larger overall, allowing the player to fully view both displacement members 440, 450 and fully utilize their presentation effects.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 14(a), by placing the base displacement member 440 in a rotated position by a first operation, the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the entire first portion 454a of the decorative portion 454) can be viewed by the player through the opening in the center frame 86, and by placing the relative displacement member 450 in a protruding position by a second operation, as shown in Figure 15(a), the relative displacement member 450 can be viewed almost entirely (in this embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking decorative portion 454) through the opening in the center frame 86.

That is, the relative displacement member 450, which is retracted to a retracted position and invisible through the opening of the center frame 86, first appears from the side of the opening of the center frame 86 through a rotational movement (first movement), allowing the player to see only a portion of the relative displacement member 450. Then, through a linear movement (second movement), it extends toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86, allowing the player to see almost the entire relative displacement member 450. This allows the player to experience an increased visibility of the relative displacement member 450 through a different movement mode (linear movement) than its initial movement mode (rotational movement). This allows the player to experience the unexpectedness of the change in movement mode, the sense of speed created by the expanded visibility due to the linear movement, and the sense of unity of the combined movement achieved by the successive combination of these movements. As a result, a dramatic effect that cannot be achieved when the relative displacement member 450 appears and disappears from the opening of the center frame 86 solely through linear movement (moving back and forth between the retracted position and the extended position).

On the other hand, when the base displacement member in the rotated position is placed in the retracted position shown in FIG. 13(a) by the first operation, the relative displacement member 450 in the extended position is slid (shortened) to the reference position by the second operation, as shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 15(b), thereby preventing the relative displacement member 450 from protruding outward from the base displacement member 440. Therefore, both displacement members 440, 450 can be made smaller overall, and the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440, 450 in the retracted position can be reduced. As a result, space can be secured for arranging other components and devices.

In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the base displacement member 440, and the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced relative to the base displacement member 450 between the reference position and the extended position as shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 15(a). Therefore, compared to a mode in which the second operation rotates the relative displacement member 440 relative to the base displacement member 450, the space required to displace the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, thereby ensuring space for arranging other components and devices. Furthermore, the displacement mode (sliding displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the displacement mode (rotation) of the base displacement member 450 by the first operation, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect of performing the first and second operations consecutively.

In particular, the direction of sliding displacement in this second action is along the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440, 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged relative to the base displacement member 440 in a position where their longitudinal directions are aligned, and they are slidably displaced in a direction along their longitudinal directions, allowing both displacement members 440, 450 to be efficiently extended and retracted as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the base displacement member 440 is positioned in the rotated position, the sliding displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450 increases the overall size, allowing both displacement members 440, 450 to be fully visible to the player, thereby fully demonstrating their dramatic effect. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 13(a), when the base-side displacement member 440 is in the retracted position, the relative displacement member 450 slides (shortens) to reduce the overall size, thereby reducing the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440, 450 and ensuring space for arranging other components and devices.

Furthermore, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 consists of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460, as shown in Figures 13(a), 14(b), and 15(b). The connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, which together with the crank gear 433 constitutes a crank mechanism, is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 within the area between the rod support shaft 412, which is the center of rotation of the connecting rod 460, and the base support shaft 413, which is the center of rotation of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first and second operations can be performed sequentially by the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. In other words, two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed using only one drive motor 420, reducing component costs and, accordingly, product costs.

In this case, a possible transmission mechanism would be a gear provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460, with the teeth of the crank gear 433 meshing with that gear to rotate the connecting rod 460. However, in such a structure, the crank gear 433 and connecting rod 460 are arranged side by side in a plane, with no overlap in front view, requiring a large amount of space for their installation. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. As shown in Figures 13(a), 14(b), and 15(b), the crank gear 433 and connecting link 460 can be arranged so that they always have an overlap in front view. This overlap reduces the space required for the installation of the crank gear 433 and connecting link 460.

Next, with reference to Figures 16 and 17, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the base displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described.

Figure 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. Figure 17(a) is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in Figure 16, and Figure 17(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 at portion XVIIb in Figure 17(a). Note that Figures 16 and 17 show a state in which a decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, to simplify the drawings and make them easier to understand, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining its relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

As shown in Figures 16 and 17, a decorative member 480 is disposed above the protruding operation unit 400 (upper side of Figure 16) (see Figures 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the player can see other members located behind the decorative member 480 through (transmitting) light.

In this embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed so that a portion thereof protrudes downward (lower side in Figure 17(b)), and as shown in Figure 17(b), it is formed with an overlap of dimension L between the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. As a result, when the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotated position (first operation) (see Figures 13 and 14), the rotation trajectories of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be made to overlap a portion of the decorative member 480 in front view.

In other words, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced while passing behind the decorative member 480. This allows the decorative member 480 and both displacement members 440, 450 to intersect, and the decorative member 480 can be seen through the decorative member 480 during this intersection, making both displacement members 440, 450 visible. As a result, the dramatic effect achieved by displacing both displacement members 440, 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in this embodiment, the tip of the base displacement member 440, which is separated from the decorative member 480, protrudes more than the tip of the relative displacement member 450, which is closer to the decorative member 480. This makes it less likely for the base displacement member 440 to come into contact with the decorative member 480, and as a result, the overlap dimension L can be increased. This enhances the dramatic effect achieved by the intersection.

In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 forming the front side (right side of FIG. 17(b)) of the relative displacement member 450 is inclined in a stepped manner from the base end side (toward the rotation center of the base displacement member 440, bottom side of FIG. 17(b)) to the tip side (toward the rotation tip side of the base displacement member 440, top side of FIG. 17(b)) toward the case body 410 (left side of FIG. 17(b)). Furthermore, the tip side of the base displacement member 440, which is located on the back side of the relative displacement member 450 (left side of FIG. 17(b)), protrudes further than the tip side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 as a whole can be configured so that the tip side is positioned more recessed toward the case body 410 (back side, left side of FIG. 17(b)).

As a result, when the base displacement member 440 rotates (first operation) from the retracted position to the rotated position (see Figures 13 and 14), its rotation trajectory overlaps with the decorative member 480 when viewed from the front, improving the presentation effect while preventing contact between the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 480.

In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 is supported by the base-side support shaft 413 on only one longitudinal side, with the tip end being the free end (see Figures 12(a) and 12(b)). This means that the tip end is likely to swing back and forth (towards or away from the case body 410, perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 5) during the first operation, potentially coming into contact with the decorative member 480. For this reason, the configuration of this embodiment (a shape that slopes towards the case body 410 as it approaches the tip end) is particularly effective.

On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 is shaped so that the entire decorative portion 454 is not close to the case body 410, but rather, as described above, is positioned closer to the front (forward) side (right side of Figure 17(b)) as it approaches the base end (closer to the rotation center of the base displacement member 440, lower side of Figure 17(b)) than the tip end (closer to the rotation tip end of the base displacement member 440, upper side of Figure 17(b)). In other words, the decorative portion 454 is inclined upward in a stepped manner in the direction away from the case body 410 (right side of Figure 17(b)) as it moves from the tip end to the base end.

As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slid from the reference position to the extended position (second operation) (see Figures 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 can be positioned closer to the front (forward) side (i.e., closer to the player), increasing the impact. In particular, in this embodiment, the outer dimensions of the parts positioned closer to the front (forward) side (the second part 454b is larger than the first part 454a, and the third part 454c is larger than the second part 454b) are made larger, which further enhances the impact.

Next, the composite action unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 18 to 30. Figures 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the composite action unit 500. Note that Figure 18 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is positioned in the retracted position (see Figure 5), and Figure 19 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is positioned in the extended position (see Figure 5).

Here, a pair of composite operation units 500 are arranged above the opening 301, one on each side of the rotation operation unit 600 (see Figures 5 and 6). Since these pair of composite operation units 500 are formed symmetrically and have substantially the same structure, only one of them (the one located on the right side when viewed from the front) will be described, and the other (the one located on the left side when viewed from the front) will not be described.

As shown in Figures 18 and 19, the composite operating unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 using the driving force of the drive motor 530, and also displaces the driven member 560 in response to the displacement of the driven member 550, thereby displacing the driven member 560 between the retracted position shown in Figure 18 and the extended position shown in Figure 19. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing its relative position with respect to the driven member 550 through rotation and sliding displacement, as described below (see Figures 27 to 29).

As a result, even when the driven member 550 rotates at a constant speed in a fixed orbit around a predetermined position (shafts 553, 554) as the center of rotation, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a different orbit from the driven member 550, thereby changing the manner in which the driven member 560 is displaced. In other words, the composite motion unit 500 can change the manner in which the driven member 560 is displaced while maintaining a constant output from the drive motor 530. The detailed configuration of this composite motion unit 500 is described below.

Figures 20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the composite action unit 500. Also, Figure 22(a) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and Figure 22(b) is a side view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in Figure 22(a).

Note that Figure 20 corresponds to the disassembled state of the composite operation unit 500 shown in Figure 18, and Figure 21 corresponds to the disassembled state of the composite operation unit 500 shown in Figure 19. Also, Figures 22(a) and 22(b) correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the states shown in Figures 18 and 20.

As shown in Figures 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 is mainly composed of a front case body 510 and a rear case body 520 that form its framework, a drive motor 530 arranged on the rear side of the rear case body 520, a crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, a driven member 550 that is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 transmitted via the crank member 540, and a driven member 560 that is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be able to move relative to it.

The front case body 510 and rear case body 520 are formed from a resin material in the shape of flat plates, arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance between them, and configured as housing members that are fastened to each other with screws (not shown), forming an internal space between their opposing surfaces. The internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and rear case body 520 accommodates the driven member 550 (intervening plate portion 552), the driven member 560 (intervening plate portion 561), and the crank member 540, all of which can be displaced.

The front case body 510 has a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed with a size that allows the crank pin 541 to move back and forth. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) via this insertion hole 512.

The first guide groove 513 is an opening in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 through which the first pin 561a is inserted, and is formed in a shape that is a partial circular ring shape (i.e., a groove that curves in an arc; see Figures 27(a) to 29(a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As described below, by sliding (guiding) the first pin 561a along the extension direction of the first guide groove 513, the attitude of the interposed plate portion 561 (driven member 560) (particularly, its relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be determined (see Figures 27(a) to 29(a)).

The rear case body 520 has a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is arranged concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. In other words, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 can rotatably support the driven member 550 by having the shaft support holes 511, 521 respectively support the shaft portions 553, 554 of the driven member 550. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 via this insertion hole 522.

The second guide groove 513 is an opening in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 through which the connecting shaft 561b is inserted, and is formed in a shape that is a partial circular ring (i.e., a groove that curves like an arc; see Figures 27(b) to 29(b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b. As described below, by sliding (guiding) the connecting shaft 561b along the extension direction of the second guide groove 523, the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (driven member 560) (particularly, the sliding position relative to the driven member 550) can be determined (see Figures 27(b) to 29(b)).

As described above, a crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and a crank pin 541 is disposed on the crank member 540 at a position eccentric to the rotation axis (drive shaft 531) when driven and rotated by the drive motor 530. The crank pin 541 is inserted into a drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, thereby rotating the driven member 550 (see Figures 30 to 32).

As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and displaces the driven member 560 in response to that rotation. Its shafts 553, 554 are supported in the shaft support holes 511, 521, so that it is rotatably held in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. The detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will now be described with reference to Figures 23 and 24.

Figure 23(a) is a front view of the driven member 550, and Figure 23(b) is a rear view of the driven member 550. Figure 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in Figure 23(a).

As shown in Figures 23 and 24, the driven member 550 is mainly composed of a long, plate-shaped front plate portion 551, a long, plate-shaped intervening plate portion 552 that intersects the front plate portion 551 at approximately right angles in a front view, a cylindrical shaft portion 553 that connects the front plate portion 551 and the intervening plate portion 552, and a cylindrical shaft portion 554 that protrudes from the back surface of the intervening plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553.

The front plate 551 is a component disposed on the front of the front case body 510 (see Figures 20 and 21), and has a drive groove 551a that is oval in front view drilled into one end (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft 553 is connected). The drive groove 551a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see Figures 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can slide along the drive groove 551a, thereby rotating the driven member 550 around the shafts 553 and 554 (see Figures 30 to 32).

The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see Figures 20 and 21). One end of the interposed plate portion 552 (the side opposite the side to which the front body portion 551 is connected) has a connecting groove 552a that is oval in front view. The connecting groove 552a is an opening through which the connecting shaft 561b (see Figures 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connecting groove 552a is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b. Therefore, the connecting groove 552a can rotatably and slidably hold the connecting shaft 561b. In other words, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner (see Figures 27 to 29).

The connection groove 552a has an area that overlaps with the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shafts 553 and 554, and is configured so that the connection shaft 561b can be positioned within that area (see Figures 27(a) to 27(c)). This allows the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 to be determined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523, as described below.

The driven member 550 has an interposed plate 552 and shafts 553 and 554 that are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate 551 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from the other parts 552 to 554. The driven member 550 is assembled by abutting the axial end face of the shaft 553 (the end face opposite the interposed plate 552) against the back surface of the base end side of the front plate 551 (the side opposite to the side where the drive groove 551a is drilled), and then fastening the two together with screws.

In this case, four pins 553a protrude from the axial end face of the shaft portion 553, while holes 551b for receiving each of the four pins 553a are drilled at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551, and the unit is assembled with each pin 553a received in its corresponding hole 551b. This reduces the number of screws and parts costs, while ensuring that the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 cannot rotate relative to each other.

Returning to Figures 20 and 23, the explanation will be made from Figure 20 again. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate 552 of the driven member 550, thereby connecting the driven member 560 to the driving member 550 so that the driven member 560 can be displaced (rotated and slidably displaced) relative to the driving member 550. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven in response to the displacement of the driving member 550. By inserting the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate 561 into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate 552 of the driven member 550 as well as the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, the driven member 560 is held in a rotatable and slidable state relative to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. The detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will now be described with reference to Figures 25 and 26.

Figure 25(a) is a front view of the driven member 560, and Figure 25(b) is a rear view of the driven member 560. Figure 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in Figure 25(a).

As shown in Figures 25 and 26, the driven member 560 is mainly composed of a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions with decorative shapes formed on the front surface, and a back plate portion 563 that is connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 and is connected to the back side of the interposed plate portion 561.

The interposed plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see Figures 20 and 21). A first pin 561a protrudes from its front surface and is inserted into the first guide groove 513 (see Figures 20 and 21) of the front case body 510. A connecting shaft 561b protrudes from its rear surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see Figures 20 and 21).

Therefore, when the driven member 550 rotates around the shafts 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a slides (guides) along the first guide groove 513, causing the interposed plate 561 (i.e., the driven member 560) to rotate relative to the driven member 550 and rear case body 520 around its connecting shaft 561b (see Figures 27(a) to 29(a)). At the same time, the connecting shaft 561b slides (guides) along the second guide groove 523, causing the interposed plate 561 (i.e., the driven member 560) to slide relative to the driven member 550 in the direction along the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (see Figures 27(b) to 29(b)).

Here, the same effect as described above can be achieved by inserting the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intervening plate portion 552) and inserting a pin separately provided on the intervening plate portion 561 into the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted through both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intervening plate portion 552). This connecting shaft 561b is guided by the second guide groove 523 to regulate the displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the rear case body 520 (i.e., to allow the driven member 560 to slide relative to the driven member 550), and is inserted into the connecting groove 561b to connect the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so that it can be displaced relative to the driven member 550 (rotating and sliding). This reduces the number of parts and reduces product costs, and simplifies the structure, improving the reliability and durability of the movable member.

The rear plate 563 is a circular member when viewed from the front and is disposed on the rear surface of the rear case body 520 (see Figures 20 and 21), with a contact portion 563a protruding from its front surface (the side facing the page in Figure 25(a)). The contact portion 563a is the portion that abuts against the rear surface of the rear case body 520, and is formed in a circular ring shape when viewed from the front, concentric with the connecting shaft 561b. In other words, only the peripheral portion of the rear plate 563 (the protruding tip surface of the contact portion 562a) abuts against the rear surface of the rear case body 520.

In this way, by providing the abutment portion 563 on the rear plate portion 563 that is concentric with the connecting shaft 561b, even when the driven member 560 rotates relative to the rear case body 520 around the connecting shaft 561b as the connecting shaft 561b slides (guided) along the second guide groove 523 due to the rotational action of the first pin 561a and the first guide groove 523 (see Figures 27 to 29), the abutment state against the rear surface of the rear case body 520 can be kept constant, and changes in the support reaction force can be suppressed. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable manner.

The driven member 560 has a decorative portion 562 and a back plate portion 563 that are integrally formed from a resin material, while the intervening plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 562, 563. The driven member 560 is assembled by abutting the axial end face of the connecting shaft 561b of the intervening plate portion 561 against the front of the back plate portion 563 and fastening the two together with screws. Note that the structure in which multiple pins 561c protruding from the axial end face of the connecting shaft 561b are received in multiple holes 563b in the back plate portion 563, connecting the two so that they cannot rotate relative to each other, is the same as that of the driven member 550 described above, and therefore will not be described here.

Returning to Figures 20 and 22, the composite action unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate 561 of the driven member 550 and the front plate 551 are fastened together. This allows the driven member 550 to be rotatably assembled to the front case body 510. When assembling, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate 561 of the driven member 560 is first inserted into the connecting groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate 552).

Next, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 via the insertion hole 522 in the rear case body 520, and the crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550 (front plate portion 551) via the insertion hole 512 in the front case body 510. At the same time, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (intervening plate portion 561) is inserted into the second guide groove 523 in the rear case body 520, fastening and fixing the intervening plate portion 561 and the rear plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 together. This allows the driven member 560 to be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520 and connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner, and also enables the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 to be transmitted to the driven member 550 via the crank member 540.

The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are then fastened together with screws (not shown). This allows the composite operation unit 500 to be unitized as a single device, in a state in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 can displace the driven member 550, and the displacement of the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. In this way, the composite operation unit 500 can be assembled by sequentially assembling each component to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. This not only reduces assembly costs, but also simplifies assembly to the unit storage member 300 (game machine main body, see Figures 5 and 6), thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 27 to 32. Figures 27(a), 28(a), and 29(a) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing their relationship with the first guide groove 513, and Figures 27(b), 28(b), and 29(b) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing their relationship with the second guide groove 523.

Similarly, Figures 30(a), 31(a), and 32(a) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing their relationship with the first guide groove 513, and Figures 30(b), 30(b), and 30(b) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing their relationship with the second guide groove 523.

Note that Figures 27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is positioned in the retracted position (the state shown in Figures 18 and 20), and Figures 29 and 32 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is positioned in the extended position (the state shown in Figures 19 and 20). Furthermore, the state shown in Figures 28 and 31 corresponds to the state in which the driven member 560 is positioned between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in Figures 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is in the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located to the right of the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 as viewed from the front (right side in Figure 30(a)). As a result, the driven member 550 is positioned such that the tip end of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the drive groove 551a is formed) is tilted to the right as viewed from the front (right side in Figure 30(b)), and the tip end of the intervening plate portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is raised upward (upper side in Figure 30(b)). In other words, the driven member 550 is positioned at a rotational position that marks the end of its clockwise (right-handed) rotation as viewed from the front, with the shaft portions 553, 554 (see Figures 20 and 21) as the center of rotation.

On the other hand, as described above, when the driven member 550 is in a position where it lifts the tip end of the interposed plate portion 552 upward, the driven member 560 is in a position where the connecting shaft 561b is pushed up toward the upper end of the second guide groove 523 (upper side in Figure 27(b)). That is, the driven member 560 is positioned at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in Figure 30(b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in Figure 30(b)). Furthermore, when the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is positioned at the upper end side of the first guide groove 513 (upper left side in Figure 27(a)), the driven member 560 is in a horizontal position where the tip end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (the portion where the first pin 561a is located) faces leftward when viewed from the front (left side in Figure 27(a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is positioned at a rotational position that marks the end of its counterclockwise (left-handed) rotation when viewed from the front, with the connecting shaft 561b as the center of rotation.

When the driven member 560 is positioned in the retracted position as shown in Figures 27 and 30, and the crank member 540 is rotated counterclockwise (left) as viewed from the front by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 while the drive shaft 531 is rotating, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, causing the driven member 550 to rotate counterclockwise (left) as viewed from the front around the shaft portions 553, 554 (see Figures 20 and 21) as the rotation center, and the driven member 560 is positioned approximately halfway between the retracted position and the extended position as shown in Figures 28 and 31.

As shown in Figures 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is positioned approximately halfway between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 is positioned so that the front plate portion 551 is approximately upright and the intervening plate portion 552 is approximately horizontal. In other words, the driven member 550 is positioned at a rotational position that is approximately halfway within the rotatable range around the shaft portions 553, 554 (see Figures 20 and 21).

On the other hand, when the driven member 550 is positioned such that the interposed plate portion 552 is approximately horizontal, the connected shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 552 is pushed down by the connected groove 552a, and is positioned at the center position of the second guide groove 523. That is, the driven member 560 is positioned at a position that is approximately the center of its range of displacement in the up-down direction (up-down direction in Figure 31(b)), and is positioned at the rightmost position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 30(b)). Furthermore, when the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is positioned at a position that is approximately the center of the first guide groove 513, the driven member 560 is positioned such that the tip side of the interposed plate portion 561 (the portion where the first pin 561a is located) is tilted toward the upper left when viewed from the front (upper left side in Figure 28(a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is positioned at a rotational position that is approximately in the middle of the rotational range around the connecting shaft 561b.

From the state shown in Figures 28 and 31, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 causes the crank member 540 to further rotate counterclockwise (left) as viewed from the front while the drive shaft 531 is rotating, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, causing the driven member 550 to rotate counterclockwise (left) as viewed from the front around the shaft portions 553, 554 (see Figures 20 and 21) as the rotation center, and the driven member 560 is positioned in the extended position as shown in Figures 29 and 32.

As shown in Figures 29 and 32, when the driven member 560 is in the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the left side of the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 as viewed from the front (left side in Figure 32(a)). As a result, the driven member 550 is positioned such that the tip side of the front plate portion 551 (where the drive groove 551a is formed) is tilted to the left side as viewed from the front (left side in Figure 32(b)), and the tip side of the intervening plate portion 552 (where the connection groove 552a is formed) is dropped downward (lower side in Figure 32(b)). In other words, the driven member 550 is positioned at a rotational position that marks the end of its counterclockwise (left-handed) rotation as viewed from the front, with the shaft portions 553, 554 (see Figures 20 and 21) as the center of rotation.

On the other hand, as described above, when the driven member 550 is positioned such that the tip end of the interposed plate portion 552 is dropped downward, the driven member 560 is positioned such that the connecting shaft 561b is pressed toward the lower end of the second guide groove 523 (lower side in Figure 29(b)). That is, the driven member 560 is positioned in the lowest position in the up-down direction (up-down direction in Figure 32(b)) and the leftmost position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 32(b)). Furthermore, when the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is positioned at the lower end side of the first guide groove 513 (lower right side in Figure 29(a)), the driven member 560 is positioned in an upright position with the tip end of the interposed plate portion 561 (the portion where the first pin 561a is located) facing upward (upper side in Figure 29(a)) when viewed from the front. In other words, the driven member 560 is positioned at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the clockwise (right-handed) direction as viewed from the front, with the connecting shaft 561b as the rotation center.

As described above, with the composite motion unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 can be caused to move relative to the driven member 550 in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. In other words, even if the displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shafts 533 and 554 and is displaced in a constant trajectory, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a trajectory (displacement pattern) different from that of the driven member 550. Furthermore, since this change in displacement pattern is caused by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a trajectory (displacement pattern) different from that of the driven member 550. As a result, the displacement pattern of the driven member 560 can be changed while maintaining a constant output from the drive motor 530.

In this embodiment, the means for displacing the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 (displacement regulation means) is formed by the first guide groove 513 and second guide groove 523 of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, and the first pin 561a and connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560. That is, the first pin 561a and connecting shaft 561b are guided along the respective guide grooves 513 and 523, thereby regulating the displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the respective case bodies 510 and 520. This allows the relative displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 to be regulated in accordance with the contours (shapes) of the respective guide grooves 513 and 523. As a result, the displacement regulation means can be formed using mechanical elements, namely, the guide grooves and the shaft-shaped body guided by them, simplifying its structure and reducing product costs. Furthermore, the use of simple mechanical elements improves the reliability and durability of the moving part.

Furthermore, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the manner of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be set as desired, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom when setting the manner of displacement of the driven member 560. As a result, it is easier to ensure a variety of possible displacement patterns that can be imparted to the driven member 560.

In particular, in this embodiment, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable, and is provided with a first guide structure comprised of the first guide groove 513 and first pin 561a that primarily regulates rotation, and a second guide structure comprised of the second guide groove 523 and connecting shaft 561b that primarily regulates sliding displacement. This not only increases the variety of changes that can be made to the type of displacement, but also allows the first and second guide structures to appropriately guide each of the multiple types of displacement (rotation and sliding displacement) of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, improving the reliability of the movable member.

The above-described first guide structure can also be configured, for example, by forming the first guide groove 513 in the intervening plate portion 561 or the rear plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a in the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the intervening plate portion 561. This makes it easier to ensure space for forming the first guide groove 513.

In other words, because the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 need to hold the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 while ensuring space for their displacement, they are forced to be formed with a relatively large external shape, which tends to result in dead space being created on their plate surfaces. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove portion 513 on the front case body 510, the dead space can be effectively utilized to ensure sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the contour (shape) and extension length of the first guide groove 513, thereby increasing the variety of changes that can be made to the displacement mode. The second guide structure is similar to the first guide structure, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The first and second guide structures can also be configured such that both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the rear case body 520. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the rear case body 520, so the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 can be formed without considering the relative formation positions of each other.

In other words, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the rear case body 520, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 must be formed so that they do not intersect, which limits the freedom of design in terms of their contours (shapes) and extension lengths. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the contours (shapes) and extension lengths of both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 can be set arbitrarily without considering their relative positions, thereby increasing the freedom of design and correspondingly increasing the variety of changes that can be made to the displacement pattern.

Next, the rotational motion unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 33 to 39. Figure 33 is a front perspective view of the rotational motion unit 600.

As shown in Figure 33, the rotation operation unit 600 has a first rotating body 650 that is circular in front view and is arranged around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and a second rotating body 660 that is also circular in front view and is arranged concentrically behind the first rotating body 650. In this embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 rotate at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

However, with conventional machines in which multiple rotating bodies are positioned at distances from one another, it is difficult for players to associate the rotation of these multiple rotating bodies. In other words, with conventional machines, each rotating body rotates independently, without interacting with the other rotating bodies. As a result, the dramatic effect of rotating multiple rotating bodies cannot be fully realized.

In contrast, with the rotational operation unit 600 of this embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotating bodies rotate in different rotational modes (with different rotational speeds and directions), which makes it easier for players to recognize these rotations as being related to each other, and can achieve the dramatic effect of rotating multiple rotating bodies. The detailed configuration of this rotational operation unit 600 is described below.

Figure 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational motion unit 600, and Figure 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational motion unit 600. Figure 36 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotational motion unit 600. Note that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted from Figures 35 and 36. The cross section shown in Figure 36 corresponds to a cross section of the rotational motion unit 600 taken along a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

As shown in Figures 34 to 36, the rotational motion unit 600 is mainly composed of a front case body 610 and a rear case body 620 that form its framework, a drive motor 630 arranged on the rear side of the rear case body 620, multiple gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) that serve as a transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 that are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 transmitted via these multiple gears, a spherical liquid crystal device 670 arranged on the inner periphery of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and a light-emitting device 680 arranged in front of the front case body 610.

The front case body 610 and rear case body 620 are formed from a resin material in the shape of flat plates, arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance, and fastened together with screws (not shown) to form an internal space between their opposing surfaces, forming a housing member. The internal spaces (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and rear case body 620 house the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650, respectively.

Circular openings 611, 621, viewed from the front, are formed in the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively, and these openings 611, 621 are arranged concentrically when assembled. A cylindrical portion 612 protrudes toward the front (forward) on the front side of the front case body 610, at a position concentric with the openings 611, 621. The opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610 have the same inner diameter, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 is rotatably supported on the inner periphery of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Furthermore, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 612.

In this way, by rotatably supporting the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) and the second rotating body 660 by the inner and outer peripheral surfaces of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. Therefore, as described below, the positional relationship between the gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a, 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the second storage gear 642 and front gear 646 disposed in the front case body 610 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a, 661a of the rotating bodies 650, 660 and the second housing gear 642 and front gear 646 can be stabilized, which reduces uneven wear of the gears and reduces drive resistance.

The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft. When the drive motor 630 is mounted on the back of the rear case body 620, the pinion gear 631 meshes with a first storage gear 641, one of the multiple gears that make up the transmission means. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (multiple gears) via the pinion gear 431, and as a result, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can each rotate, as described below.

As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a group of gears that transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and are each formed as a spur gear with teeth cut into the outer surface parallel to the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the rear side of the front case body 610 and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the first storage gear 641 at the front and the fifth storage gear 645 at the rear.

The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610, rotatable in synchronization with the fifth storage gear 645. In other words, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are fixed to one end and the other end, respectively, of a rotating shaft that passes through the front case body 610, and these two gears 645, 646 and the rotating shaft rotate together.

With this gear group configured, when the drive motor 630 is driven to rotate, the rotational drive force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, causing the first housing gear 641 to rotate. The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of the gear train, and as the fifth housing gear 645 rotates, the front gear 646 rotates.

As described below, the second storage gear 642 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653), and the front gear 646 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can each rotate as the drive motor 630 rotates. In other words, the rotation of one drive motor 630 can rotate two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) simultaneously.

In this case, in this embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643, 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotational speed between the front gear 646, which rotates synchronously with the fifth housing gear 645, and the second housing gear 642 be made different, but the rotational direction between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can also be made different. As a result, as will be described later, the rotational speed and rotational direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be made different.

In addition, in this embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is disposed on the rear side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is disposed on the front side of the front case body 610. The second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660 on the front and rear sides of the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, compared to a structure in which, for example, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are both disposed on the front side of the front case body 610 and these gears 642, 646 are meshed with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, not only can the transmission structure that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 be simplified, but the structures of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 themselves can also be simplified.

Furthermore, by arranging the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650, with which the second storage gear 642 of the gear train meshes, on the back side of the front case body 610, the gear train and storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from a player looking at the rotational motion unit 600 from the front. In other words, a shielding structure for shielding the gear train and storage flange portion 653 from view can be simply formed using the back case body 610, without the need to provide a separate component.

The first rotating body 650 is a performance component that rotates around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 to produce a performance (see Figure 33), and is mainly composed of a main body 651, a front performance section 652 that is integrally formed on one axial side of the main body 651, and a storage flange section 653 that is fastened and fixed to the other axial side (axial end face) of the main body 651 with a screw.

The main body 651 is a cylindrical portion formed from a resin material and is inserted through the opening 611 and the inner periphery of the tubular portion 612 in the front case body 610. In other words, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held in the front case body 610 (opening 611 and tubular portion 612) with the main body 651 as the rotation axis. The detailed configuration of the main body 651 will now be described with reference to Figure 37.

Figure 37(a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and Figure 37(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651, enlarging portion XXXVII of Figure 37(a). Note that in Figure 37(b), for ease of understanding, the diameters of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b are shown enlarged and schematic, and a virtual circle IS, inscribed with the apexes of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b, is shown using a two-dot chain line.

As shown in Figures 37(a) and 37(b), the main body 651 is formed with a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651b, and an offset portion 651c is formed at a position corresponding to the second protrusion 651b.

The first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b are formed to protrude from the outer and inner surfaces of the main body 651, respectively, and extend along the axial direction of the main body 651 (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 37(a)) and over the entire length of the main body 651 (see Figure 35).They are formed at multiple locations (a total of eight locations in this embodiment) that are equally spaced circumferentially, with the first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 651b arranged alternately in the circumferential direction.

In other words, the first protrusion 651a is formed by a cylindrical body with a circular cross section and a diameter larger than the thickness of the main body 561, which is embedded within the main body 651 with its axial direction aligned with that of the main body 651, and the portion of this embedded cylindrical body (a part of the cylindrical body) protruding from the outer and inner surfaces of the main body 651. The second protrusion 651b is similar to the first protrusion 651a, except that the diameter of the cylindrical body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

In this way, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b protruding from the outer and inner surfaces of the main body 651 extend axially along the entire length of the main body 651, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main body 651.

The second protrusion 651b extends further axially from the axial end face of the main body 651 (the side facing the page in Figure 37(b)). Therefore, as described below, when the storage flange 653 is fastened to the main body 651 with screws, the axially extending portion of the second protrusion 651b fits into a recess formed in the front face of the storage flange 653, firmly joining the main body 651 and the storage flange 653 so that they cannot rotate relative to each other (see Figure 36).

The offset portion 651c is a portion of the main body 651 near the portion where the second protrusion 651b is formed, offset inward while maintaining the plate thickness, and is formed over a range (circumferential direction) approximately three times the diameter of the second protrusion 651b. In other words, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc concentric with the main body 651 when viewed in the axial direction of the main body 651 as shown in Figure 37(b). By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body 651 in this way, it is possible to offset the axis of the second protrusion 651b toward the axis, as described below, and also to increase the rigidity of the main body 651 as a whole.

The multiple (four in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set to protrude the same distance from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the multiple (four in this embodiment) second protrusions 652b are set to protrude the same distance from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 and are also set to protrude the same distance from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 due to the offset of the offset portion 651c. The multiple (eight in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b are set to protrude the same distance from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37(b), an imaginary circle IS inscribed by the apexes of the first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b can be set concentrically on the outer periphery of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter of the imaginary circle IS is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

Therefore, when the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact area can be limited to the apexes of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b, thereby suppressing contact resistance and allowing the main body 651 to rotate smoothly on the inner periphery of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612.

In particular, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b are curved in an arc shape when viewed in the axial direction (more specifically, the cross section of the main body 651 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is an arc shape that convex outward), which not only reduces the contact area but also allows the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a, 651b to smoothly contact the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner surface of the cylindrical portion 612. This allows the main body 651 to rotate more smoothly on the inner side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612, even if there is rattle due to dimensional tolerances.

As described above, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b protrude not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, when the main body 651 is molded using a resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 can be made uniform (symmetrical) on both the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface, ensuring moldability.

In particular, in this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the main body portion 651 shown in Figure 37(b), the protruding dimension of the first protruding portion 651a protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 is the same as the protruding dimension of the portion protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Similarly, the protruding dimension of the second protruding portion 651a protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c is the same as the protruding dimension of the portion protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c. This makes the shapes of the outer peripheral surface and inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 more uniform (symmetrical), further ensuring its formability.

The second protrusion 651b also has a circular cross-section hole drilled along its entire length in the axial direction (see Figure 36). This allows the thickness of the second protrusion 651b, which has a larger diameter than the first protrusion 651a, to be uniform with the other parts (main body 651, offset portion 651c, first protrusion 651a, etc.), thereby ensuring the moldability of the main body 651.

In this case, an internal thread is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the hole drilled in the second protrusion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange 653 can be threaded into it (see Figure 36). In this way, the second protrusion 651b, which is formed with a relatively large diameter, serves as the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, thereby ensuring the strength of the screw fastening portion. In particular, since the second protrusion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c and the rigidity of the main body 651 is enhanced, having the second protrusion 651b serve as the connecting portion between the main body 651 and the storage flange 653 allows the two to be firmly connected and improves durability.

Returning to Figures 34 and 36, the front performance section 652 is the part that is visible to the player as the performance part, and is formed by projecting radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body section 651 in a flange-like shape. The front surface (front face, exterior surface) of the front performance section 652 is plated, giving the front performance section 652 an appearance that mimics a shiny metal. Note that the front performance section 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but plating it prevents the light-emitting device 680 (light-emitting element 681) from being visible to the player through the front performance section 652.

When viewed from the front, the front performance section 652 has a sawtooth shape with irregular peaks (second section) and valleys (first section) repeated along the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, 16 peaks (valleys) are arranged at irregular intervals (unequal pitch) along the circumferential direction. As described below, when the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front performance section 652 pass in sequence in front of the light-emitting element 681 of the light-emitting device 680, allowing the player to intermittently and selectively view the light-emitting element 681 (see Figure 39).

The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. It is formed in a circular ring shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed via an opening 611 to the axial end surface of the main body portion 651, which is inserted into the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In more detail, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by threading the screw inserted into the storage flange portion 653 into the second protrusion portion 651b of the main body portion 651, as described above.

The storage flange portion 653 has a thickness dimension that is equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and an outer diameter dimension that is larger than the inner diameter dimension of the openings 611, 621 in the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. Therefore, the axial position of the first rotating body 650 can be determined by abutting the front or rear surface of the storage flange portion 653 against the rear surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the rear case body 620.

A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and this first outer peripheral gear 653a is meshed with the second storage gear 642 of the above-mentioned gear train arranged on the back surface of the front case body 610. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, causing the first rotating body 650 to rotate.

In this way, the first rotating body 650 has a first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the second storage gear 642 of the gear train arranged along the periphery of the opening 511 of the front case body 610 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, thereby simplifying the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650. In particular, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the projection surface portion 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (described below) is arranged on its inner periphery, it is difficult to secure space on the inner periphery. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the above-mentioned transmission structure on the outer periphery of the first rotating body 650.

Furthermore, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so the installation position of the first rotating body 650 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (first outer peripheral gear 653a) engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second housing gear 642 arranged in the front case body 610 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. As a result, the meshing state between the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second housing gear 642 can be stabilized, thereby suppressing uneven wear of the gears and reducing drive resistance.

The second rotating body 660 is a performance component that rotates on the back side of the first rotating body 650 to create a performance (see Figure 33), and is mainly composed of a main body portion 661 formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a front performance portion 662 formed integrally with the axial end face of the main body portion 661.

The main body 661 has an inner diameter that is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610, and is rotatably held in the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612) by fitting it onto the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 612 (i.e., by inserting the cylindrical portion 612 into the inner periphery of the main body 661).

A second outer peripheral gear 661a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and this second outer peripheral gear 661a meshes with the aforementioned front gear 646, which is disposed on the front of the front case body 610. Therefore, when the aforementioned gear train and front gear 646 are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and second outer peripheral gear 661a, causing the second rotating body 660 to rotate.

In this way, the second rotating body 660 has a second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on its outer peripheral surface, and the front gear 646 arranged on the front of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a, thereby simplifying the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotating body 660. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted onto the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, it is difficult to secure space on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the above-mentioned transmission structure on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

Furthermore, as described above, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so the position of the second rotating body 660 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed on the front case body 610 can be determined with the front case body 610 as the reference. As a result, the meshing state between the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, thereby suppressing uneven wear of the gears and reducing drive resistance.

The axial dimension of the main body 661 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the front of the front case body 610 and the back of the front performance part 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be determined by abutting the end face on one axial side or the end face on the other axial side of the main body 661 against the back of the front performance part 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front of the front case body 610.

The main body 661 has a front convex rib 661b and a rear convex rib 661c respectively protruding from one axial end face and the other axial end face. The front convex rib 661b is formed in a circular ring shape when viewed from the front, while the rear convex rib 661c is formed in a shape in which the circular ring shape when viewed from the front is divided at multiple points. This reduces the frictional resistance between the main body 661 and the front case 610 and the second rotating body 650 (front performance part 652) when rotating the first rotating body 660, thereby suppressing the load on the drive motor 630.

The front performance section 662 is located on the rear side of the front performance section 652 on the first rotating body 650, and is a section that is visible to the player together with the performance section 652 as a performance section. It is formed by projecting radially outward in a flange-like shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body section 661. The front performance section 662 comprises an outer peripheral section 662a formed in a sawtooth shape with irregular peaks and valleys repeated circumferentially, and an inner peripheral section 662b which is a circular section in front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral section 662a.

The front surface (front face, exterior surface) of the front performance section 662 is plated, similar to the front performance section 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, while the first rotating body 650 described above plated the entire surface (entire area) of the front performance section 652, the second rotating body 650 plated only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front performance section 662, leaving the inner peripheral portion 662b unplated.

As described below, when the front side (forward) of the light-emitting element 681 of the light-emitting device 680 passes through the peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) of the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 in sequence, allowing the player to view the light-emitting element 681 intermittently and selectively, the light-emitting element 681 can be viewed by the player through the inner peripheral portion 662b (i.e., the unplated portion) of the front performance portion 662 (see Figure 39).

The spherical LCD device 670 mainly comprises a projection surface 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light-transmitting material, and a case body 672 that houses a projection device that projects an image onto the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface 671. The player can view the image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection surface 671. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the rear case body 620, and the projection surface 671 is disposed on the inner periphery of the first rotating body 650 with approximately half of its spherical shell protruding forward from the front of the front performance part 652 of the first rotating body 650 (see Figure 33).

The light-emitting device 680 mainly comprises a case body 681 that is annular in front view and fits over the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board housed in the case body 681, and multiple (12 in this embodiment) light-emitting elements 682 arranged (mounted) on the front (front face) side of the circuit board. In the assembled state, the light-emitting device 680 is arranged on the back side of the front performance portions 652, 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

Twelve openings, each larger in outer shape than the light-emitting elements 682, are formed at equal circumferential intervals on the front surface (anterior surface) of the case body 681, and each light-emitting element 682 is mounted on the circuit board corresponding to the opening position of each of these openings. In other words, when viewed from the front, the light-emitting device 680 has the light-emitting elements 682 exposed through the openings in the case body 681, and light emitted from the light-emitting elements 682 can be irradiated through the openings in the case body 681 toward the front side (the front performance sections 652, 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660).

As described above, the front effect portions 652, 662 of the first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660 are arranged on the front (front face) side of the light-emitting device 680, and by rotating the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650, the player can intermittently and selectively view the light emitted by the light-emitting element 682. Here, the structure that allows the player to intermittently and selectively view the light emitted by the light-emitting element 682 will be described with reference to Figures 38 and 39.

Figure 38 is a front view of the rotational motion unit 600, and Figures 38(a) and 38(b) show the first rotor 650 positioned at different rotational positions. Figure 39(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotational motion unit 600 taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in Figure 38(a), and Figure 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotational motion unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in Figure 38(b).

Note that in Figure 38, only the first rotating body 650 and the light-emitting device 680 of the rotational operation unit 600 are shown in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front performance part 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light-emitting element 682 of the light-emitting device 680, and in Figure 39, a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 has been added to the first rotating body 650 and light-emitting device 680 shown in Figure 38 is schematically illustrated in order to clarify the radial positional relationship between the front performance parts 652, 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light-emitting element 682 of the light-emitting device 680.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front performance section 652 of the first rotating body 650 is formed in a sawtooth shape with irregular peaks (second section) and valleys (first section) repeated circumferentially, and the position of the light-emitting element 682 in the light-emitting device 680 is set at a radial position (vertical position in Figure 39(a)) that is radially outward from the bottom of the valley in the front performance section 652 (upper side in Figure 39(a)) and radially inward from the peak of the peak in the front performance section 652 (lower side in Figure 39(a)).

In this case, as described above, the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front performance portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front (front surface) and is formed to be light-transmitting, and the formation range of this inner peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in Figure 39) is set to a range that includes the bottom of the valley in the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light-emitting element 682 of the light-emitting device 680. In other words, when viewed from the front, the player can see the light-emitting element 682 of the light-emitting device 680 from the valley portion of the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 through (i.e., through) the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front performance portion 662 of the second rotating body 660.

Furthermore, as described above, the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front performance portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front (front surface) to give it an appearance resembling a shiny metal, and this outer peripheral portion 662a is disposed opposite the back side of the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. In other words, when viewed from the front, the player can see the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front performance portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 from the valley portion of the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650.

In this way, with the rotational operation unit 600, peaks and valleys are formed alternately in the circumferential direction on the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 in an area that overlaps with the light-emitting element 682 of the light-emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. As the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front performance portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light-emitting element 682, allowing the player to intermittently see the light emitted by the light-emitting element 682 through the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front performance portion 682 of the second rotating body 660. This allows for an effective effect in which multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) rotate around the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

In addition, the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front presentation portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give it an appearance resembling shiny metal, and the front presentation portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is disposed on the front (front) side of the outer peripheral portion 662a. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 rotate in opposite directions, the player can visually see, via the valley portion of the front presentation portion 652 of the first rotating body 650, how the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front presentation portion 652 of the second rotating body 660 rotates in the opposite direction to the front presentation portion 652 of the first rotating body 650.

In other words, the rotation operation unit 600 allows a player looking directly at the first rotating body 650 to intermittently see the light-emitting elements 682 of the light-emitting device 680 at the bottom of the peak-valley shape of the front performance portion 652, and to see the front performance portion 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 rotating in the opposite direction to the front performance portion 652 (peak-valley shape) of the first rotating body 650 at the peak-valley shape of the front performance portion 652. This makes it easier for the player to associate the rotation of the first rotating body 650 with the rotation of the second rotating body 660, and as a result, it is possible to effectively create an effect in which multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) each rotate.

Furthermore, as described above, with the rotational performance unit 600, valleys are formed in 16 locations around the circumference of the front performance section 652 of the first rotating body 650, while the light-emitting elements 682 of the light-emitting device 680 are arranged in 12 locations around the circumference, allowing the player to selectively view only specific light-emitting elements 682 from among the light-emitting elements 682 arranged in those 12 locations.

In other words, by making the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front performance section 652 and the circumferential spacing of the light-emitting elements 682 different, for example, in the state shown in Figure 38(a), the light-emitting elements 682 arranged in four locations (top, bottom, left, and right) are visible, while when the first rotating body 650 (front performance section 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in Figure 38(a), a different light-emitting element 682 is selected, as shown in Figure 38(b), and the light-emitting elements 682 arranged in four locations (top right, bottom right, bottom left, and top left) are visible.

This not only allows the light-emitting elements 682 of the light-emitting device 680 to be viewed intermittently, but also allows the position of the visible light-emitting elements 682 to be changed circumferentially, making it possible to more effectively create an effect in which each of the multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) rotates.

Returning to Figures 34 to 36, the overall structure of the rotational motion unit 600 will be described. As described above, the front case body 610 has an opening 611 and a cylindrical portion 612, and the first rotating body 650 has a storage flange portion 653 formed separately from the main body portion 651 and front performance portion 652. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is attached to the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651. After that, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state by the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620.

In other words, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported on the front case body 610 by inserting its main body 651 through the opening 611 and cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can abut against the rear surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the rear case body 620, respectively, thereby restricting front (forward) and rear (rearward) displacement of the first rotating body 650 relative to both case bodies 610, 620.

At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and is rotatably supported by the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotating body 660 (front convex rib 661b and rear convex rib 662c) abuts against the rear surface of the front performance portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the front surface of the case body 681 of the light-emitting device 680, respectively, thereby restricting front (forward) and rear (rearward) displacement of the second rotating body 660 relative to both case bodies 610, 620.

In this way, the rotational motion unit 600 is able to rotatably hold multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660), while the rotating body (first rotating body 650) itself also serves as the part that restricts the displacement of the second rotating body 660, thereby simplifying the structure. Furthermore, the holding structure that can rotatably hold multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) can be formed simply by fastening the storage flange portion 653 to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650, thereby simplifying the assembly process. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, with the rotational motion unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and an opening 621 is formed in the rear case body 620. Therefore, after multiple rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) are rotatably held in the front case body 610 and rear case body 620, assembly of the rotational motion unit 600 can be completed simply by attaching and fastening the spherical liquid crystal device 670 from the rear side of the rear case body 620 (see FIG. 33). In other words, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted in a separate process to the assembly of each case body 5610, 620 and each rotating body 650, 660. This also simplifies the assembly process and contributes to reducing product costs.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above form, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the protrusion operation unit 400 was described as being arranged so that the relative displacement member 450 could slide relative to the base displacement member 440. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the relative displacement member 450 may be arranged so that it can rotate relative to the base displacement member 440. That is, as in the above embodiment, the first operation may be to rotate the base displacement member 440 between a retracted position (see FIG. 13) and a rotated position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation may be to rotate the relative displacement member 450 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and a protruding position (see FIG. 15) relative to the base displacement member 440.

Even with this configuration, the base displacement member 450, which is in the retracted position, is moved to the rotated position by the first action, and the relative displacement member 450, which is in the reference position, is moved to the extended position by the second action, allowing the player to fully view both displacement members 440, 450 in their entirety and fully demonstrating their dramatic effect. On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450, which is in the extended position, is rotated to the reference position by the second action, and the base displacement member 440, which is in the rotated position, is moved to the retracted position by the first action, making both displacement members 440, 450 smaller overall, thereby reducing the space required to accommodate the displacement members.

In the above embodiment, the protrusion operation unit 400 is described as having the tip of the base displacement member 450 protrude further toward the decorative member 480 (upper side in Figure 17(b)) than the tip of the relative displacement member 450 when the base displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted position (see Figure 17(b)). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a configuration may also be adopted in which the tip of the relative displacement member 450 protrudes further toward the decorative member 480 (upper side in Figure 17(b)) than the tip of the base displacement member 450.

This configuration also allows the rotational trajectories of the two displacement members 440, 450 to intersect with the decorative member 480, and at this intersection, the two displacement members 440, 450 can be seen through the decorative member 480, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect of displacing the two displacement members 440, 450. Furthermore, with this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see Figure 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located on the front (forward) side can be further increased, further enhancing the impact.

In the above embodiment of the composite motion unit 500, the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 is formed in an elongated hole shape, thereby connecting the driven member 560 (connecting shaft 561b) to the driven member 550 (connecting groove 552a) in a rotatable and slidable manner. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The connecting groove 552a may be formed in a circular shape, thereby preventing the driven member 560 (connecting shaft 561b) from sliding relative to the driven member 550 (connecting groove 552a) (i.e., allowing only rotation). This configuration also allows the relative angle of the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 to be changed when the driven member 560 is displaced relative to the driven member 550 in response to displacement of the driven member 550. This changes the trajectory of the driven member 560, enhancing the dramatic effect.

In this case, the displacement regulating means formed by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a may also be formed by a gear arranged concentrically with the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560, and a curved rack gear meshed with the gear and formed along an arc centered on the drive shaft 551a of the driven member 550, which is arranged on the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520. In this way, when the driven member 560 is displaced relatively in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the gear rolls on the rack gear, thereby changing the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550.

In the above embodiment, the composite motion unit 500 is described as having the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 formed in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, and the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b that are inserted into these guide grooves 513, 523, respectively, formed in the driven member 560. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are provided in the driven member 560, and portions that are inserted into these guide grooves 513, 523 (components corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b) are provided in the front case body 510 and/or the rear case body 520. This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear and rotational motion in response to displacement of the driven member 550, thereby changing the trajectory of the driven member 560 and enhancing the dramatic effect.

In the above embodiment of the composite action unit 500, the first guide groove 513 is described as being drilled (an opening) in the front case body 510, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The first guide groove 513 may be formed, for example, as a recessed groove with a U-shaped cross section. In other words, the first guide groove 513 may be shaped in any way that allows it to guide the first pin 561a along its extension direction.

In the above embodiment, the composite motion unit 500 is described as having the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 extending in a curved manner, while the connecting groove 551a extends in a straight line. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 extend in a straight line, while the connecting groove 551a extends in a curved manner. In particular, while the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are described as having a constant arc shape with a certain radius of curvature, this is not limited to this. It is of course possible to adopt a shape that combines arc shapes with multiple radii of curvature (for example, an S-shape). This allows the trajectory of the driven member 560 to be changed in a more complex manner, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to have an arcuate shape, it is preferable to make the radius of the arcuate shape larger than a reference value (to reduce the curvature) when the driven member 550 is positioned at or near the starting or ending point of rotation in the direction of rotation around the shafts 553, 554. That is, it is preferable to make the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in a first range at and near the starting point or in a second range at and near the ending point or the third range between the first and second ranges larger than a reference value, or larger than the radius of a third range located between the first and second ranges. This reduces the load during the initial stage when the drive motor 530 starts driving the driven member 550 from a stopped state, allowing for a smooth start of driving.

Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is not visible due to the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value greater than the reference value, and from the time when a portion of the driven member 560 begins to be exposed (made visible) outside the area of the front case body 510 until the entire driven member 560 is exposed (made visible) outside the area of the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. In this way, in the former case, the movement of the driven member 560 is not visible to the player, so the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the presentation effect; in the latter case, the movement of the driven member 560 can be made faster in the area where part of the driven member 560 is hidden by the front case body 510, so it is possible to create presentations in which the driven member 560 suddenly appears from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 quickly disappears behind the front case body 510.

Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is in a horizontal position (a position in which the center of gravity of the decorative part 562 is located within a range defined by a pair of imaginary lines inclined 45 degrees above and below the horizontal line passing through the connecting axis 561b when viewed from the direction of the connecting axis 561b (see Figure 30)), the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value larger than the reference value, and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal position, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in areas where it is relatively necessary for the driving force of the drive motor 530 to support the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity), the radius can be increased to reduce the effects of frictional resistance in each guide groove 513, 514 and inertial forces due to changes in the posture of the driven member 560, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 530. On the other hand, in areas where it is relatively little necessary for the driving force of the drive motor 530 to support the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity), the radius can be reduced to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

In the above embodiment of the rotational motion unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is described as having the main body 651 and the front performance section 652 integrated together and the storage flange section 653 separate from it. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the main body 651 and the storage flange section 653 are integrated together and the front performance section 652 is separate from it, thereby forming the first rotating body 650. As with the above embodiment, this configuration also simplifies the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding multiple rotating bodies, thereby reducing product costs.

In the above embodiment of the rotational motion unit 600, the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front performance portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is described as having a flat front surface. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and part or all of the front surface may be replaced with another shape instead of a flat surface. Examples of other shapes include a surface with multiple irregularities, a surface formed with a wavy cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface that combines these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only can the light emitted from the light-emitting element 682 and passing through the inner peripheral portion 662b be diffused and refracted, but the direction of the diffused reflection and refraction can also be made to move as the second rotating body 660 rotates, thereby enhancing the performance effect (see Figure 39).

In the above embodiment of the rotational motion unit 600, the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a portion of the front gear 646 when viewed from the front (see Figure 36). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 when viewed from the front. This allows the front gear 646 to be shielded by the front effect portion 662, eliminating the need to provide a separate component to make the front gear 646 invisible to the player. Furthermore, if the front gear 646 can be invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be made a larger diameter gear, thereby increasing the flexibility in setting the gear ratio. This allows for a greater change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 relative to the first rotating body 650.

In the above embodiment, the rotational motion unit 600 did not explain the stopping positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, but it may be configured as follows. That is, the mountain shape on at least one or both of the front performance portions 652, 662 of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be formed to a size that can block the front gear 646 when viewed from the front, and the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at a phase position where the mountain-shaped portion is positioned directly in front of the front gear 646. This makes it possible to make the front gear 646 invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 has stopped.

The present invention may be implemented in pachinko machines and the like of different types from those described in the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player after a jackpot symbol is displayed, provided that the ball lands in a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, and in which the special game state is entered provided that the ball lands in that special area. Furthermore, the present invention may also be implemented as various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arepachi, mahjong ball machines, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

Slot machines are well-known devices in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a winning symbol line, and then a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and the symbols are stopped and finalized by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine equipped with a display device that displays a variable sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then finalizes the display of the identification information; the variable display of the identification information begins upon operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever); the variable display of the identification information stops and finalizes upon operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed; and, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is specific, the slot machine generates a special game that awards the player a predetermined game value." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Another example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one that has a display device that displays a fluctuating sequence of multiple symbols and then confirms the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a predetermined number of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example, due to operation of a control lever. The symbol change is stopped, for example, due to operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is triggered, awarding the player a predetermined gaming value, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine were used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall would be able to treat only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines, which are caused by the separate handling of medals and balls, which represent gaming value.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to Figures 40 to 97. In this second embodiment, the control processing (processing related to the control of the game, such as display effects) executed in the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<Mechanical Configuration in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of a pachinko machine 10 in a second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view, Figure 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to open and close towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 2), which has numerous nails and winning slots 63, 64, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 49) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. To support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1). The front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed serving as the opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is roughly box-shaped with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is sloped downward to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17.

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, to change the background mode of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 2) described below, or to change the content of the preview effects. The frame button 22 may also be configured to be used, for example, as a switch for driving a driving device or the like provided on the gaming machine.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting devices such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their illumination by lighting up or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during play. The periphery of the window 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps, such as jackpot lamps. When a jackpot is hit or a reach is reached, the built-in LEDs light up or flash, causing each illumination unit 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is just one step away from a jackpot. Additionally, the upper left corner of the front frame 14, as viewed from the front (see Figure 1), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, to create a more dazzling effect, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the component configuration common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in its center, which is roughly box-shaped and open at the top, for storing balls that do not fit in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50 is an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a that allows the ball launching unit 112a to operate, a push-button-type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and is thereby shot into the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. The ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling numerous ball-guiding nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, an electric device 640a, a variable winning device 65, and a variable display unit 80 on a wooden base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front. The peripheral edges of the game board 13 are attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing and are fixed to the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. The center of the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c in the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, primarily with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area on the front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is a roughly circular area on the front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70 (an area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 49) to the top of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69, reducing its momentum and bouncing back toward the center. In addition, a resin arc member 70, formed with an arc on the inner surface connecting the rails, is hammered into the base plate 60 between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held for special symbol 1 (first symbol) when a ball enters first winning slot 64, a lottery is held for special symbol 2 (first symbol) when a ball enters second winning slot 640, and a lottery is held for regular symbol (second symbol) when a ball passes through through gate 67. In the lottery for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as the special symbol) held for a ball entering first winning slot 64 or second winning slot 640, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot for the special symbol has been won, and if a jackpot for the special symbol has been won, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol jackpot occurs, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game mode, and the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have entered), and this opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning port 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B." After the special game mode ends, the player is awarded a gaming value (game value) corresponding to the type of jackpot as added value after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, when a lottery is held for special pattern 1 (first pattern) or special pattern 2 (first pattern), the first pattern display device 37 begins displaying the changing special pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 8 to 30 seconds) has elapsed, the special pattern indicating the lottery result is displayed statically. If a ball lands in the first winning slot 64 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying the changing special pattern, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, if a ball lands in the second winning slot 640 while the special pattern is changing, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. The number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed in a distinctive manner by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, respectively. As will be explained in more detail below, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to make it easier for players to distinguish the number of reserved balls, the variable display mode of the special pattern, the judgment results, etc. than the first pattern display device 37, and players are typically configured to play by looking at the display mode of the third pattern display device 81.

When the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has finished, if there are balls remaining in reserve for the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, a lottery is held for the next special symbol, and the variable display corresponding to that lottery is initiated. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second winning slot 640 takes priority over the number of reserved balls in the first winning slot 64, and the lottery for special symbol 2 is held, and the variable display corresponding to that lottery is initiated. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved balls in the first winning slot 64 is executed when there are no balls reserved in the second winning slot 640. While the variable display of special symbol 2 is being executed, the variable display of special symbol 1 will not be executed. In other words, there is no period during which special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 change simultaneously.

In this embodiment, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are configured not to change at the same time, but this is not a limitation and they may be configured to change at the same time. By configuring it in this way, more game lotteries can be performed in a short period of time and the results can be displayed, allowing for more time-efficient gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 has an electric device 640a equipped with a blade member that can rotate between an open state where the game ball can be guided into the ball entrance and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter the ball entrance. This electric device 640a is activated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time based on the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) described below. Furthermore, under normal circumstances, it is held upright to prevent game balls from entering from both sides of the ball entrance, and the first winning opening 64 is positioned to prevent game balls from entering between the blade members. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is normally configured to allow balls to enter only when the electric device 640a is activated in the open state. Therefore, the machine is normally configured to make it easier for game balls to enter the first winning opening 64, and players play by firing game balls in an attempt to get the game balls to enter the first winning opening 64.

The special winning opening 65a, which opens and closes when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game mode, is located directly below the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the special game mode, players will hit balls in an attempt to make them enter the special winning opening 65a, and many balls will also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 will reach its maximum (four times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game mode.

On the other hand, in the normal pattern lottery held when a ball passes through the through gate 67, a win or loss determination is made as to whether or not the normal pattern is a winning combination. There are two types of normal pattern wins: a normal win and a long-term win, which has a longer opening time and a longer opening count than a normal win. When a normal or long-term win occurs with a normal pattern, the electric device attached to the second winning slot 640 opens a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. In other words, when a normal pattern wins, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640, and as a result, it becomes easier for the special pattern to be drawn.

In addition, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held, the second symbol display device 83 begins displaying a variable normal symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed statically. If a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being held on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times it passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol reserved lamp 84. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has ended, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the through gate 67, the next normal symbol will be drawn, and the variable display corresponding to that selection will begin.

As mentioned above, there are two types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B." In both "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B," the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot). After that, in the case of "Jackpot A," as an added value after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a high probability state for special symbols (special symbol probability change state) from the end of the jackpot until the start of the next special symbol jackpot game. On the other hand, in the case of "Jackpot B," the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed. Note that even in the high probability state, the probability of winning a normal symbol is similarly increased.

Here, "high probability state for special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), or in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state (16R jackpot). In contrast, when not in a "high probability state for special symbols," it is called a "low probability state for special symbols," which indicates a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than in a special symbol probability change state, i.e., the probability of winning a special symbol jackpot is normal (normal state for special symbols or low probability game state). Furthermore, "time-saving state for normal symbols" (during time-saving state for normal symbols or time-saving game state) refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. In contrast, when not in the "normal symbol time-saving state," it is called the "normal normal symbol state" (normal game state), which indicates that the probability of winning with a normal symbol is normal, i.e., a state in which the probability of winning is lower than during the time-saving state. Hereinafter, the period after the end of a jackpot with a special symbol when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state with a high probability of winning with a special symbol will be referred to as the special symbol probability period.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot A," the period from the end of "Jackpot A" to the start of the next jackpot is set as the special jackpot period, but it is not limited to this. The special jackpot period may also be set as the period during which a predetermined number of special symbol draws are conducted (for example, 20 or 100 times). It may also be configured so that both "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" are set as special jackpot periods for a predetermined number of times. Naturally, the special jackpot period may also be set as a predetermined period of time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

When this pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state for special symbols." After that, if a special symbol wins, it transitions to the "high probability state for special symbols" and also to the "time-saving state for regular symbols."

Furthermore, if a new special symbol jackpot occurs while the "high probability state for special symbols" is ongoing and the jackpot type is "Jackpot A," the "high probability state for special symbols" will continue from the end of the new special symbol jackpot until the start of the next jackpot game.

A first symbol display device 37 is located at the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 2), and is equipped with multiple light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a, which serve as light-emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays information in response to the various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. The multiple LEDs 37a indicate whether the lottery for special pattern 1 or special pattern 2, which is held in conjunction with a ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (initial winning), is currently being held, depending on their lighting state, thereby indicating whether the lottery will end with special pattern 1 (first pattern) or special pattern 2 (first pattern), depending on the result of the lottery for that special pattern, as the pattern to stop after the change has ended; and indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 but have not yet been changed (reserved balls), depending on their lighting state.

If a ball lands in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying a varying special pattern 1 (first pattern) or special pattern 2 (first pattern), the number of balls that land therein is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, balls that land in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640 are each reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved times is not limited to four and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. Each LED 37a is configured to emit a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these colors, it is possible to display various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a high probability state for special symbols or a time-saving state for normal symbols) using a small number of LEDs. Furthermore, LED 37a not only indicates whether the result of the lottery for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, which will be the symbol that stops after the variation has ended, is a jackpot, but also displays a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) if a jackpot has occurred.

In addition, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are assigned to display special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, one for displaying the symbol and the other for displaying the number of reserved balls. This configuration makes it easier for players to distinguish between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

The game area is also provided with multiple general winning openings 63, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a winning ball enters. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is equipped with a third symbol display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 made up of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on this variable display device unit 80, surrounding the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 displays decorative images in accordance with the display of the first pattern display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (starting winning), this triggers the first pattern display device 37 to display a changing special pattern (first pattern) corresponding to the starting slot into which the ball entered. Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 displays a changing third pattern corresponding to the changing special pattern display in synchronization with the changing special pattern display.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, to display, for example, three symbol rows: left, center, and right. Each symbol row is made up of multiple symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, allowing the third symbol to be variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the game status is displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays decorative images corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

Here, we will explain the display content of the third pattern display device 81 with reference to Figure 40. Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, with Figure 40(a) being a diagram that schematically shows the area division settings and active line settings of the display screen, and Figure 40(b) being a diagram that illustrates an example of the actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9." Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 49), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols line up is displayed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up is displayed.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Jackpot A," a variable display will be displayed in which the odd-numbered main symbols "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" line up and stop. Also, if it is "Jackpot B," a variable display will be displayed in which the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" line up.

As shown in Figure 40 (a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two, top and bottom, with the upper two-thirds being the main display area Dm which displays the changing third pattern, and the remaining lower one-third being the sub-display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1-Dm3: left, center, and right. Three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of these three display areas Dm1-Dm3. The third symbols described above are displayed in a specified order in each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3, and the display changes periodically, scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3. The approximate center of this main display area Dm is set as the pay line L1, and during each game, the third symbols are displayed stopped on the pay line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. If the third symbols line up on the pay line L1 as a jackpot symbol combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed, indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is horizontally elongated and located below the primary display area Dm, and is further divided horizontally into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3. Of these, sub-area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first winning slot 64 but have not yet been changed (reserved balls); sub-area Ds2 is an area that displays a preview effect image; and sub-area Ds3 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the second winning slot 640 but have not yet been changed (reserved balls).

On the actual display screen, as shown in Figure 40 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third design are displayed stopped in the main display area Dm. Note that when the display is variable, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols located before and after it are also visible, so a total of up to nine main symbols may be displayed. In the secondary display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for each reserved ball, and reserved symbols are displayed corresponding to up to four reserved balls for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. In other words, a maximum of eight reserved symbols can be displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the same reserved pattern (design) is used for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display different patterns (for example, a "●" pattern for special pattern 1 and a "□" pattern for special pattern 2).

This allows the reserved balls in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640, i.e., the reserved balls for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, to be displayed in an easily identifiable manner. Furthermore, because the display mode of the reserved ball that enters the second winning slot 640 is different depending on the type of normal pattern win, the player can easily distinguish that the reserved ball is a result of a long-term win.

In this embodiment, in addition to the main and reserved patterns described above, the main display area Dm and sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 also appropriately display text displays, preview displays of characters, etc., and a display of the total number of changes. Furthermore, if no reserved pattern is displayed, this indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, i.e., there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, balls entering the first winning slot 64 are configured to be reserved up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more (e.g., eight). Also, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in small area Ds1 or small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically in part of the third pattern display device 81, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of lit reserved lamps.

Next, with reference to Figures 41 to 44, the display mode of the reserved symbols performed by the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. In this second embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, is changed and displayed to notify the result of the game's success/failure judgment and the type of variation pattern to be selected. In this embodiment, a normal reserved symbol as shown in Figure 41 and an 8-symbol symbol as shown in Figure 42 are respectively set. For the normal reserved symbol, as shown in Figures 41(a) and (b), when the number of reserved symbols is less than 8, one of the reserved symbols is changed and displayed as a symbol displayed as "push" (Figure 41(a)). After the symbol displayed as "push" is changed and displayed, when the player presses the frame button 22, that symbol is changed and displayed as a "△" symbol (see Figure 41(b)).

In this embodiment, if a reserved pattern that will result in a Super Reach being selected is stored among the reserved patterns, or if a reserved pattern that will result in a win is stored, and a lottery is drawn to determine that a normal reserved pattern will be executed, the reserved pattern will be displayed as a "push" pattern, as shown in Figure 41(a). Note that this "push" pattern is an informing reserved pattern that notifies the player to press (operate) the frame button 22. Unless the frame button 22 is pressed, the informing reserved pattern will be displayed in the display mode that it is displayed until the reserved pattern begins to change.

In this embodiment, the notification hold symbol is displayed until the change begins, but it may be configured to be displayed as the notification hold symbol only for a certain period of time. Also, the normal hold effect is configured to be executed by lottery when a hold symbol that results in a super reach is stored or when a hold symbol that results in a jackpot is stored, but it is not limited to this and may be configured to be executed by lottery in other cases (for example, normal reach, complete miss, etc.). A variety of symbols may be set to be displayed that change from the notification hold symbol, and the type of symbol, color, etc. may be used to notify the win/loss judgment result, reach type, etc. Also, by configuring the normal hold effect to be more likely to be drawn when the win/loss judgment result is a jackpot, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot when the normal hold effect is displayed.

Next, the 8-item effect will be explained with reference to Figure 42. In this embodiment, when the maximum number of reserved symbols reaches 8, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an 8-item effect (see Figures 42(a)-(b)) using all 8 reserved symbols. If it is determined that an 8-item effect will be executed, all reserved symbols are displayed as a "push" notification reserved symbol, as shown in Figure 42(a). Then, on the right side, a notification mode (not a notification mode with a reserved symbol) displaying the words "Please press it!!" is displayed to prompt the player to press the frame button 22.

When the player presses the frame button 22 while these eight effects are being executed, the notification pending symbols are displayed one by one, changing into letters, as shown in Figure 42 (b). Here, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, one notification pending symbol is displayed, changing one by one. The notification pending symbols are configured to change in order, starting with the notification pending symbol displayed on the left.

Whether or not the 8-piece effect will be performed is determined by lottery if, among the 8 reserved symbols stored, there is a reserved memory that will result in a super reach or a reserved memory that will result in a jackpot.

In the 8-reserved effect, eight reserved symbols are used to notify the player in text. Specifically, when the text "Jackpot!!!!" is displayed, it notifies the player that one of the eight reserved memories has a jackpot result (a jackpot has been confirmed). On the other hand, when the text "Jackpot!!!?" is displayed, it notifies the player that there is a possibility that one of the eight reserved memories has a jackpot result (it is not yet confirmed that one of the eight reserved memories has a jackpot result).

With this configuration, when the player presses the frame button 22 once after the eight-item notification reserve symbol is displayed, the leftmost notification reserve symbol changes to "Big." When this character is displayed, the player first expects the character "Jackpot" to appear, and then presses the frame button 22. If "Tat" appears, the player then presses the frame button 22, expecting the character "Ri." In this way, the seven notification reserve symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the character "Jackpot!!!" appears, the player's anticipation of a jackpot builds, as the last remaining notification reserve symbol (the rightmost reserved symbol) may change to "!" The player can then determine the notification result by operating the frame button 22. In this way, with the eight-item notification reserve symbol, players can enjoy playing the game while anticipating the next character to be displayed each time they press the frame button 22.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the reserved balls are consumed and begin to change, the remaining reserved notification symbols that have been changed in the eight-piece presentation are maintained and displayed, allowing the player to predict what characters (notification modes) have been set from the characters on the remaining reserved notification symbols.

In this embodiment, storing eight reserved balls is configured to execute an effect that is advantageous to the player, allowing the player to play in a way that stores more reserved balls. Specifically, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (high expectation of a jackpot), such as a Super Reach, is selected, the player will usually stop firing game balls and continue playing, but since this is a period when reserved balls tend to accumulate, the player can continue playing without stopping firing game balls, so that an eight-ball effect is executed even if the player loses.

Also, the system may be configured so that, for a certain period of time after the eight-ball effect is executed, the eight-ball effect is executed when eight reserved balls are stored. By configuring it in this way, players can continue to play by firing game balls in an attempt to generate more reserved balls.

In addition, the notification mode (the characters displayed) determined when the eight-ball effect is executed may be configured to change depending on the determination result when a new reserved ball appears. This configuration allows players to enjoy the fun of deciding when to change the notification reserved pattern.

Next, with reference to Figures 43 and 44, the composite display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in this second embodiment will be described. In a composite display effect, when a reach display mode is reached, a main pattern that is a miss is temporarily displayed as the center pattern, and then the sub-pattern (blank pattern "△") is transformed into a "push" pattern and displayed, and then the "push" pattern moves to the center of the third pattern display device 81 and is combined with the larger "push" pattern and displayed. When the player then presses the frame button 22, the combination of main patterns indicating the win/loss determination result is displayed again. Specifically, if the win/loss determination result is a win, a combination indicating a jackpot, such as "777," is displayed. On the other hand, if it is a miss, a pattern indicating a miss, such as "717," is displayed.

Figure 43 (a) shows a state in which a composite display mode variation pattern is displayed, resulting in a reach display mode with a "7" symbol, and the middle symbol is displaying a variation. In patterns other than the composite display mode variation pattern, when a reach occurs, the middle symbol is displayed in a variation (dynamic display) beyond the reach symbol. In other words, the reach symbol passes through the reach effective line once and is displayed as a scroll. However, in the composite display mode variation pattern, the reach symbol is set to temporarily stop just before the reach effective line without passing through it. In other words, the reach period is set to be shorter than in the normal reach display mode.

As shown in Figure 43(b), after the "5" symbol preceding the reach symbol stops on the reach valid line, three seconds later the secondary symbol (blank symbol "△") located between the main symbols in the left and right symbol rows changes to a small "push" symbol notification symbol and is displayed. Among the variation patterns of the composite display mode, the pseudo composite display mode variation pattern is configured so that once the symbol has changed to this notification symbol, it does not change back to the composite display mode. In this case, pressing the frame button 22 will execute an effect that attempts to change the stopped center symbol "5" again.

On the other hand, in the variation pattern that is changed to the composite display mode, as shown in Figure 44(a), the "push" symbol is displayed moving toward the "5" symbol in the middle symbol row displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in Figure 44(b), the "5" symbol is covered and a larger "push" symbol is displayed. The variation pattern of the composite display mode in which this large "push" symbol is displayed is configured to be extremely likely to be selected when the win/loss determination result is a jackpot, so the player can have high hopes of winning the jackpot when this composite display mode is displayed.

Next, with reference to Figures 45 to 48, the time presentation in this embodiment will be described. The time presentation is a presentation mode in which the background image is changed to a preset dedicated image for a predetermined time (five minutes in this embodiment) at regular intervals (fixed periods) after the power is applied to the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the time presentation is provided with a timekeeping means 292 consisting of an RTC (real-time clock) and an internal power source (a battery in this embodiment) dedicated to the time presentation means 292, so that time can continue to be measured even when power is not being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Here, when manufacturing pachinko machines 10, the same time (for example, the current time) can be set in the time presentation means. By configuring these pachinko machines 10 to be supplied with power simultaneously, the same input time information can be obtained among the pachinko machines 10. With this configuration, time presentations can be executed synchronously among multiple pachinko machines 10.

Figure 45 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time presentation period. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is obtained from the clocking means 292 by the time setting process (Figure 69, S1214) within the startup process (see Figure 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113, which will be described later. Based on the obtained time information, the time presentation period (presentation mode B) is set when 55 minutes have elapsed. Note that the normal gaming machine period (presentation mode A) is set for the period until this time presentation period is set. The time presentation period is normally set to 5 minutes, and the normal gaming period is set when these 5 minutes have elapsed.

Here, once the 5 minutes of the time presentation period have elapsed, it is determined whether the pending memory or changing special pattern stored at that time has been set to result in a jackpot as a result of the win/loss judgment, and if a jackpot has been set, the time presentation extension period (presentation mode C) is set to the time until the change ends.

Figure 46 (a) shows an example of the display mode of the time effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when there are 180 seconds remaining in the time effect period. During the time effect period, the background image changes to a display mode in which a special school of fish is displayed.

46(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when there are three seconds remaining in the time effect period. In the example of FIG. 46(b), the actual third symbol is reduced in size and displayed variably in the lower right corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode similar to the third symbol is displayed as stopped, indicating a miss. In this case, the display mode slightly wobbles to indicate that the display mode is not completely stopped. As such, while it is rare for the end of the time effect period and the timing of the third symbol stopping are to coincide, by switching to the display mode and making it appear as if the third symbol has stopped, it is possible to make it appear as if the third symbol is stopped at the same time as other pachinko machines 10. Note that the display mode is also displayed when the stop timing of the third symbol coincides with the time effect period. By configuring in this way, the display mode at the end of the time effect period is consistent, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

When the effect symbols are displayed statically with three seconds remaining, as shown in Figure 47(a), a premonition display mode is displayed in which the effect symbols are displayed slightly trembling for the remaining three seconds. Then, after the words "Super School of Fish Time" indicating that the time effect period is over, a notification mode of "End?" is displayed, indicating whether or not the period will be extended. After that, when the time effect extension period is set, the words "Super School of Fish Time Extended!!" are displayed to notify that the time effect period has been extended, as shown in Figure 47(b), and the background image of the school of fish is displayed again. In this case, the effect symbols begin to change at the same time as the extension begins, notifying the player as if a new special pattern has started to change. Furthermore, since the extension period is the period until the changing display that results in a jackpot ends, the remaining time (115 seconds in the example of Figure 47(b)) is displayed as the remaining time for that period.

In this embodiment, the time presentation period is extended when a reserved memory that will result in a jackpot has been set or when fluctuation has already begun (fluctuating), and therefore the extension of the time presentation serves to notify player 4a of a jackpot. Here, the same presentation for the time presentation period is executed in sync on the same pachinko machines 10, and a presentation indicating whether or not an extension period will be set is displayed at the same timing (see Figure 47 (a)). This allows other players to determine that a jackpot will occur on a pachinko machine 10 that has an extension period set, thereby stimulating the gambling spirit of other players.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 48, if an extended effect is not set, the words "Super School of Fish Time Ends!!" are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, if the third symbol is changing, the effect symbol will change for the same amount of time as the third symbol's remaining change time, and then will be displayed still. From the next change, the reduced display of the third symbol will be canceled, and the third symbol will be displayed in its normal size. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the time effect period has ended. On the other hand, if the timing of the stopped display of the third symbol coincides with the end of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third symbol will be canceled and displayed from the start of the next change.

However, if the fluctuation has already ended by the end of the time effect period and no pending memory has been stored, the premonition effect will not be executed.

In this embodiment, the condition for setting an extension is a jackpot, but it is not limited to this. It can also be set when a reserved memory is set that selects a variation pattern that results in a super reach, or when a lottery is held and a win is obtained.

Returning to Figure 2, the explanation continues. The second symbol display device 83 displays a changing state by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is conducted as the ball passes through the through gate 67, is in progress, and after the change has ended, it displays a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the normal symbol, by lighting it up.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display that alternates between a "circle" and an "x" symbol as the second symbol each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops on a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle"), the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time, thereby making it easier for balls to enter the second winning slot 640. A maximum of four balls can be held through the through gate 67, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol hold lamps 84 are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the changing display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a portion of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol reserve lamp 84 may be lit by a portion of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, as with the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640, the maximum number of reserved balls that can pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserve lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display unit 80 are arranged the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640, through which balls can enter. When a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, the first winning slot switch and the second winning slot switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first winning slot switch and the second winning slot switch are turned on, the main control device 110 draws for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 displays a display corresponding to the drawing result. The first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640 are also prize slots from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters each slot.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls awarded when a ball enters the first prize slot 64 and the second prize slot 640 is the same, but this is not limited to this and different numbers of prize balls may be awarded. For example, a ball entering the first prize slot 64 may be awarded three prize balls, and a ball entering the second prize slot 640 may be awarded four prize balls, with the number of prize balls for the second prize slot 640 being set higher than the number of prize balls for the first prize slot 64.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls set for the second prize slot 640 is fewer than that of the first prize slot 64, it becomes possible to design the system so that more game balls enter the second prize slot 640 during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, allowing for a larger number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 to be maintained, resulting in more efficient gameplay. This means that the game time during the time-saving period and the special bonus period can be shortened, resulting in increased sales for the gaming facility.

A variable prize-winning device 65 is disposed below the second prize-winning opening 640, with a horizontally elongated rectangular specific prize-winning opening (large open opening) 65a located approximately in the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery conducted by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is illuminated to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. The game state then transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot), in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific prize-winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have been won).

This specific winning opening 65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after that closure, it is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an added gaming value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate to open and close forward, using the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which balls can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

However, the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a jackpot in the first pattern display device 37 lights up, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. While the specific winning opening 65a is open, if a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, creating a game state that serves as a special game state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 are provided in the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and stamps, etc. attached to attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, or 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is fitted with numerous nails to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and is also equipped with various components (gimmicks) such as windmills.

As shown in Figure 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with an MPU (a single-chip microcomputer) that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and other necessary components.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 49). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island equipment, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 49). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation unit. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In addition, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 via the data transmission/reception circuit to instruct the sub-controllers to operate, but these commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control unit 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing lots for special symbols, drawing lots for normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to draw lots for special symbols, draw lots for normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first win random number counter C1 used to draw special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first win type counter C2 used to select the jackpot type for special symbols; the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first win random number counter C1; and the variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern. Furthermore, the second win random number counter C4 is used to draw normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second win random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching their maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2-millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). Some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 67), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 203. RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, which consists of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1-4) for storing reserved balls of special symbol 1, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, which consists of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1-4) for storing reserved balls of special symbol 2. A special symbol reserved ball execution area common to special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is also provided. Each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2, in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning slot 64. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second winning slot 640.

The RAM 203 also has a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, which consists of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the value of the second winning random number counter C4 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to Figure 50. The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 299) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 299 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values from 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 299. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 57).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing) and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640. The random number value that results in a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. A special symbol jackpot is determined to have occurred when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table. This special symbol jackpot random number table is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (a period when the probability of a special symbol is low) and one for when the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (a period when the probability of a special symbol is high). Each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a jackpot. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot changes when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high. Note that a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for when the probability of a special symbol is high and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for when the probability of a special symbol is low are provided in ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 in the event of a jackpot with a special pattern. It is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first win type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in RAM 203 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of a special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this embodiment, two jackpot types are set: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B," and either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" is determined by the first win type counter C2. The display mode indicating the jackpot type is then displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as the jackpot symbol.

The first win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 299. In this first win random number counter C1, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are three random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these random number values, "7,107,282", are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are a total of 300 random number values, and the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 3, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/100.

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 30 random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these values, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299," are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are a total of 300 random number values, and the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 30, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the random number value for a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value for a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there were a value that was always used as the random number value for a jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, that random number value could be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot fraudulently. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by changing the random number value for a jackpot depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state for a special symbol or a low-probability state for a special symbol), the random number value for a special symbol jackpot can be made more difficult to predict, thereby preventing fraud.

In addition, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. This first win type counter C2 is set in a jackpot type selection table (not shown), and when the random number value is "0 to 59," the jackpot type is "jackpot A." Furthermore, when the value is "60 to 99," the jackpot type is "jackpot B."

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that two types of wins (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first win type counter C2. The random number value used to determine the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first win type counter C2 is set in the special symbol jackpot type table (see Figure 52 (b)), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode, such as short-term miss, long-term miss, normal reach, or super reach. Determining the display mode specifically means determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see Figure 67), described below, is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within the main processing. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown), which stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern exclusive to special symbol 1 is set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state). As will be explained in more detail later in the explanation of the variation pattern selection in the sound lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 determines the general content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and variation time based on the win/loss determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and sets a variation pattern command indicating the determined content.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 52 (c), when the probability of a normal pattern is low, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is any value between 5 and 20, it is determined to be a normal win for a normal pattern. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal pattern is high, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is any value between 5 and 204, it is determined to be a normal win for a normal pattern.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of winning changes between when the normal symbol has a low probability and when the normal symbol has a high probability. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric device 640a is activated can be reduced, reducing the frequency with which the ball enters the second winning slot 640. Therefore, the focus is on getting the ball to enter the first winning slot 64, increasing the player's consumption of game balls and increasing the gaming facility's profits. On the other hand, during the time-saving and probability-variable periods, when the probability is high, the electric device 640a can be activated with a probability of 1/1.2, increasing the chances of the ball entering the second winning slot 640. This reduces the player's consumption of game balls and creates a game state that is advantageous to the player. This allows the player to play with the aim of achieving high probability, allowing them to play for longer.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state for a normal symbol, if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable normal symbol for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second win random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28," a win is determined. After the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, a "circle" symbol is displayed as the stationary symbol (second symbol). If the value of the second win random number counter C4 is "5 to 20," a normal win is determined, and the second winning slot 640 is opened "once for 0.2 seconds." Note that in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state for a normal symbol, the second winning slot 640 is opened "once for 0.2 seconds" upon a winning normal symbol. However, the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened "twice for 0.5 seconds."

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that result in a normal symbol jackpot, ranging from 5 to 204. These random number values are stored in the high probability normal jackpot random number table 202c (see Figure 53 (a)). Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are a total of 240 random number values, and the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 200, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state of a normal symbol, if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable normal symbol for three seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204," a win is determined. After the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, a "circle" symbol is displayed as the stationary symbol (second symbol), and the second winning slot 640 is opened "twice for two seconds." Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the variable display time is significantly shorter (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) than when the probability of a normal symbol is low. Furthermore, the opening period of the second winning slot 640 is significantly longer (from 0.2 seconds once to 2 seconds twice), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of winning a normal symbol, if a normal symbol wins, the second winning port 640 will open for "2 seconds x 2 times", but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Figure 58), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 67).

In this way, RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters, etc.

Returning to Figure 49, we will continue the explanation. In addition to the various counters shown in Figure 50, RAM 203 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201, and a working area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc.

In addition, RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 67) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during the startup processing (see FIG. 41) when power is turned on. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

As shown in Figure 51 (b), the RAM 203 also has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time-saving counter 203g, a special chance flag 203h, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for special symbol 1 and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), the values of each counter C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting with the area with the lowest area number. In other words, the area with the lowest area number stores data corresponding to an older winning event, and holding area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if all four holding areas already contain data, no new data is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in that execution area.

Note that when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserve area 4) into the reserved areas with area numbers one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserve area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a where winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserve area 4). Furthermore, the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to special pattern 2.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserve areas (reserve area 1 to reserve area 4) in order of lowest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern reserve ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserve areas, no new data is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for a winning normal symbol, the value of counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the drawing of a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of counter C4 stored in that execution area.

Note that when data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, and as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas into a reserved area with an area number one smaller. Furthermore, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (wait times) for the variable display of the special pattern (first pattern) (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning slot 64 (initial winning). This special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is initially set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in Figure 61). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see S307 in Figure 60).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved ball counts N1 for the special symbol variable display) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command. The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d changes.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning at the second winning slot 640. Other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls for the variable display held by the main control device 110 using a reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number for the variable display managed by the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number for the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waits) for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. This normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S704 in Figure 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in Figure 63).

When a ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in Figure 64). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in Figure 64: No).

The time-saving counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for a normal symbol; when the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or greater, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for a normal symbol, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for a normal symbol. This time-saving counter 203g is initially set to zero, and each time a lottery for a special symbol is conducted in the main control device 110 and a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. In other words, when a jackpot for a special symbol occurs, a new value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set, regardless of the value of the time-saving counter 203g.

The probability variable flag 203h is a flag that indicates that the game state is a probability variable game state. When the probability variable game state is set as the game state, the probability variable flag 203h is set to ON. This probability variable flag 203h is set to OFF when a jackpot B is won. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, first pattern display device 37, second pattern display device 83, second pattern hold lamp 84, and solenoids 209, including a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, which include a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 211, as well as a work area (work region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see Figure 65) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues a command to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of the on/off of the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, such as variable effects (variable display) and continuous preview effects, performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the presentation content during a super reach.

The voice and lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice and lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to promptly display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, a stop type selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a reserved effect flag 223h, an 8-element effect flag 223i, a set time memory area 223j, an effect mode memory area 223k, a normal period flag 223m, a start period flag 223o, an extended effect flag 223p, an extended effect time memory area 223q, a button effect flag 223r, a button effect counter 223s, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a is an area where winning information corresponding to reserved balls is stored based on winning commands output from the main control unit 110. The winning information includes various information such as the winning/losing determination result, fluctuation pattern, stop type, etc.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a memory area where the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 is stored based on the reserved ball command. The special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a memory area where the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is stored based on the reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is a memory area where the number of reserved normal symbol balls is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The change start flag 223e is a flag that indicates the timing to start changing the third symbol.

The stop type selection flag 223f is a flag that indicates the stop type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used by the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the details of various effects and variation patterns, and for various lotteries. This effect counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the main processing within the range of 0 to 198.

The hold effect flag 223h is a flag indicating that a normal hold effect is being executed. It is set to ON when a normal hold effect is being executed, and is set to OFF based on the timing at which the hold symbol begins to change.

The 8-piece effect flag 223i is a flag indicating that an 8-piece effect is being executed. It is set to ON when it is determined that an 8-piece effect will be executed, and is set to OFF when the 8th reserved symbol displayed when the 8-piece effect is executed starts to change.

The set time memory area 223i is a memory area that stores time information for executing the time effect period. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, information for the time effect period for 24 hours is set in this set time memory area 223i in S1222 of the time setting process (S1214, Figure 69) within the startup process (see Figure 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the sound lamp control device 113.

The presentation mode memory area 223k is a memory area in which information relating to presentation mode A, presentation mode B, and presentation mode C is stored (set). If the current presentation mode is the normal play period (outside of the time presentation period), presentation mode A is stored; if it is the time presentation period, presentation mode B is stored; and if it is the extended time presentation period, presentation mode C is stored.

The normal period flag 223m is a flag that indicates that the normal play period is about to begin. When this normal period flag 223m is set to on, the background image is changed from the time effect period or extended time effect period to a background image that corresponds to the normal play period. In this case, the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, followed by a background image indicating the normal play period.

The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that the time effect period is about to begin. When this time effect period is set to ON, a background image of a super school of fish (see Figure 46(a)) indicating that the time effect period is in progress is set on the third pattern display device 81.

The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that the time effect extension period is about to begin. When this time effect extension period is set, a background image indicating the time effect extension period shown in Figure 47 (b) is set.

The extended effect time memory area 223q is a memory area that calculates the time until the end of the variation that results in a jackpot when a time effect extended period is set, and stores information indicating that time. The remaining time of the time effect extended period is displayed based on the value of this extended effect time memory area 223q.

The button effect flag 223r is a flag that indicates that a variation pattern that executes a button effect has been selected. This flag determines whether a button effect will be executed.

The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting the display mode of the button effect.

RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to that command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see Figure 71) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command storage area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs the processing corresponding to that command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to Figure 54.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 equipped with a RAM erase switch 122 (see Figure 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as needed to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 65).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control unit 110 to clear backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see Figure 3) is pressed. When the main control unit 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control unit 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figure 54. Figure 54 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice and lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if different models of pachinko machines 10 have different lottery probabilities for winning a special symbol jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for a single special symbol jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113, which is based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, which reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power is applied (including power recovery from a power outage; the same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Furthermore, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the pointer value indicated by the setting command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in that control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As will be explained in more detail below, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, by storing control programs, etc. in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the incidence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, NAND flash memory suffers from the problem of slow read speeds, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged contiguously across multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read quickly, but reading the first page of data requires a significant amount of time from the time the address is specified until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading non-contiguous data, a significant amount of time is required each time that data is read. Because NAND flash memory has such a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to read a control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the instructions that make up the control program. This could result in a degradation of the processing performance of the display control device 114, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233, which is provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is made up of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), which allows for high-speed data reading and writing, allowing the MPU 231 to read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complex effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via bus line 240. After a system reset is released, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via bus line 240 and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 (described below) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 (described below) of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is composed of a modularized NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit of the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

NAND flash memory has the advantage of being able to achieve a large storage capacity in a small area, making it easy to increase the capacity of the character ROM 234. As a result, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes in this pachinko machine, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, to further increase the player's interest, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character memory area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program memory area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234, which is provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the incidence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits with incorrect data written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on data read from NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes bad data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to those bad data blocks, allowing the MPU 231 and image controller 237 to easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address locations of bad data blocks, which differ between individual NAND flash memories 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

Buffer RAM 234c is memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to character ROM 234 is specified by MPU 231 or image controller 237 via bus line 240, ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address has been set in buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address is read from NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in buffer RAM 234c. ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to MPU 231 or image controller 237 via bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, each capable of holding one page of data from the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from one bank to the outside while leaving data set in the other bank, or to perform two parallel processes: transferring and setting one page of data from the NAND flash memory 234a, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, to one bank, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of character ROM 234 readouts.

NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in character ROM 234, and is configured with a significantly smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores the control programs stored in character ROM 234 that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a; specifically, a portion of the boot program that is executed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After a system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. This enables various controls to be executed in the display control device 114. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from this boot program, starting with the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released (for example, if one page has a capacity of 2 kilobytes, then 1,024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions), within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). The number of instructions in the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately to suit the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Meanwhile, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address in the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d for the following reason: As mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that, when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all control programs are stored in this NAND flash memory 234a, when address "0000H" is specified via bus line 240 by MPU 231 to fetch the first command code to be executed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 must read one page of data, including the data (command code) corresponding to address "0000H," from NAND flash memory 234a and set it in buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a significant amount of time to read the data and set it in buffer RAM 234c, so MPU 231 must wait a long time between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the command code corresponding to address "0000H." This increases the time it takes for MPU 231 to start up, which can result in a problem in which control of third symbol display device 81 in display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, NOR ROM is a memory capable of high-speed data readout. Therefore, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the first command to be processed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, in NOR ROM 234d, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d to buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," thereby enabling MPU 231 to start up in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in display control device 114 can be immediately initiated.

The boot program is programmed to transfer a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a (i.e., control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d) and fixed value data used in those control programs (e.g., the display data table and transfer data table described below) to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

As mentioned above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the internal bus address being set to "0000H," the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 can be left set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and the transfer process can be performed using the other bank. Therefore, since there is no need to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program memory area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. In other words, rather than reading out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a that has the second program memory area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 that has the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, because the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and so that the instruction pointer 231a is set to the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used by those control programs (e.g., the display data table and transfer data table described below) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is set to the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) that is executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) by the boot program is completed.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to completion by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referencing the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complex effects.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions, starting with the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 to be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, simply adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234 enables MPU 231 to start up in a short time, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies this shortened startup time.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see Figure 57) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later, and displays the drawn image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the one frame of image information previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 processes the drawing process of this one frame of an image and the display process of this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see Figure 85 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at the image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing is complete, so it is possible to prevent starting to draw a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or to prevent an image from being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information contained in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been completed after power is turned on, image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. This eliminates the time required for reading, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise result from providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

Image data transfer instructions issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 using transfer instructions and transfer data information in the drawing list include the starting address (starting address of the source storage) and ending address (final address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the starting address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that has been read from character ROM 234 over a period of time to be temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from buffer RAM 237a to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short period of time. This prevents resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long period of time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, making the video RAMs 235, 236 unavailable for image drawing processing, which can result in the image not being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from buffer RAM 234c to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by image controller 237, so it is easy to determine the period when resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to retain image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without overwriting it while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a background image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area that stores data corresponding to the power-on main image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area that stores image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball entering the first winning slot 64 is detected.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see Figure 83).

Here, the power-on variable image will be explained. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, upon receiving a display variation pattern command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image with a "○" design in the lower right position as you face the screen, and a power-on variation image with an "X" design in the same position as the "○" design, during the variation period. The result of the lottery conducted by the main control device 110 is then determined from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special pattern jackpot," an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation presentation has stopped, and if it is a "special pattern miss," an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation presentation has stopped.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to view the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take its time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235.

In addition, when checking operation at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on.Furthermore, using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of the operation check from being reduced.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to display images showing "○" and "×" alternately on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable effect to be produced using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable effect image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, if a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Figure 54, we will continue the explanation. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 main patterns (see Figure 40) numbered "0" through "9" as the third patterns. This eliminates the need to read image data from the character ROM 234 each time a variable effect is performed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable effect can be quickly initiated on the third pattern display device 81. This prevents a situation in which the variable effect does not immediately begin on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, even though the variable effect has already begun on the first pattern display device 37.

The character design area 235e is an area that stores image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters, including a "boy," are displayed in accordance with the various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of a command received from the sound and lamp control device 113, it does not need to newly read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead reads image data that is pre-resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, allowing the image controller 237 to draw the specified image. This eliminates the need to read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and allows character designs to be changed instantly even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs within the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound and lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound and lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by means of an error command. Furthermore, if the sound and lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of any other error, the sound and lamp control device 113 also notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error along with the type of error by means of an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the perspective of preventing player cheating and protecting players from errors, it is required that error messages be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. Therefore, the display control device 114 is able to instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required to draw the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 that stores the type of image data. In response, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that image data transfer instructions are issued by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described below) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue image drawing instructions and image data transfer instructions simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously displayed is read from the other frame buffer, and the image information is transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display that one frame of image.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the read one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

The work RAM 233 is a memory configured from DRAM that stores the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily stores work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. This work RAM 233 includes at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Once all the control programs have been stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 then executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As mentioned above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, allowing for high-speed read operations. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and diverse and complex effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a single effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a single effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are typically stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. After a system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231, and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Once all data tables have been stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 then controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As mentioned above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, allowing for high-speed read operations. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can easily be used to execute diversified and complex effects.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable effect is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable effect is also received. For example, when a variable effect is started, if the stop type of the variable effect is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss will be displayed as the final stop, whereas if the stop type of the variable effect is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot will be displayed as the final stop. By visually checking the stop patterns in this variable effect, the player can recognize the type of jackpot and easily determine the game value awarded according to the type of jackpot.

Furthermore, since the first winning slot 64 is a winning slot that pays out five balls as prize balls when a ball enters it, if a jackpot with a normal symbol is reached and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second winning slot 640, more prize balls will be awarded. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to be in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be depleted or are not depleted even when playing, so the player can get a sense of the period when the balls held are unlikely to be depleted or are not depleted and a jackpot with a special symbol can be won. This can therefore increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As mentioned above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a starting win has not started. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9," is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. When the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect. Furthermore, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set, one table per variable effect pattern will be prepared for a total of 32 variable display data tables, which are display data tables for variable effects.

Now, with reference to Figure 55, the display data table will be explained in detail. Figure 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table from among the display data tables. The display data table corresponds to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and, depending on the sprite type, drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is specified.

The sprite type is information used to specify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to specify the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to that magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed at a larger size than the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed at a smaller size than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when rotating a sprite for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

In the variable display data table, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light on the image, and drawing information for each sprite, such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. One or more pieces of information about effects and characters are specified depending on the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are kept constant over time, so the variable display data table only specifies the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When the MPU 231 determines from this background type that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time effects) should be displayed, it identifies the background image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the backgrounds as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame as time passes.

In this embodiment, the display data table describes a case where only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. However, instead, the display data table may specify the back surface type and position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to that back surface type should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table began. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the time the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began based on the display database, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the type of back surface and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. Alternatively, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) have symbol type offset information recorded as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of third symbol is because the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance and the stopped symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the variable performance until a predetermined time has passed records the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance. This causes the variable performance to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, each third symbol is assigned a unique number, so the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stopping symbol corresponding to the stopping type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to that third symbol.Furthermore, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the symbol offset information is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state, it is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the symbol offset information from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 55) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to use in response to commands (e.g., display variable pattern commands) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next image content to be drawn is identified and a drawing list (see Figure 57), described below, is created. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, which issues a drawing instruction for that image. As a result, the drawing content is identified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 simply by replacing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine were configured to launch a program executed by the MPU 231 each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 was changed, the launch and execution of programs that become increasingly complex and expansive as the variety of effect images increases would place a heavy load on the processing, restricting the processing power of the display control device 114 and potentially limiting the variety of effect images that could be controlled. In contrast, with the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. This means that a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, the reason why a display data table can be prepared for each presentation mode, a display data table buffer can be set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the results of a lottery performed based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than pachinko machines, the display content changes on the fly based on user operation, making it impossible to predict the display content. Therefore, it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table for each presentation mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the results of a lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Furthermore, if all image data for sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This prevents the capacity of the data table storage area 233b from increasing.

The transfer data table stores transfer data information for image data of sprites (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that should begin transferring at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 56 correspond to this). The transfer start timing for the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specific sprite begins according to the display data table, and the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred in association with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, meaning that there is no image data to be transferred at the address (address "0002H" in Figure 56).

The transfer data information includes the starting address (storage source starting address) and ending address (storage source ending address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 56) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred that should be specified in that transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to use in accordance with commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. If a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads that transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, it identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see Figure 57), which will be described later. It also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should begin transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds that transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of Figure 56, if pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it determines that there is no image data to be transferred and from which transfer should begin, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 without adding any transfer data information to the created drawing list.

If transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for image data to be transferred at a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. The image data stored in image storage area 236a can then be used to draw the specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that sprite image data used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easier to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

In addition, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, corresponding to the address. Therefore, the timing for starting transfer can be specified so that the image data for a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can easily be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag that indicates whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, once all resident target image data has been stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the flag is set to OFF to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S3605 in FIG. 95(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced during V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85(b)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed so that various images are displayed in accordance with commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S3501 in Figure 95(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process (see Figure 95(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 96) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing display data tables corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands, etc. sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands, etc. from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands, etc. sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to that presentation mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 then increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see Figure 57), described below, that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the presentation corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see Figure 57) for each frame that contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing transfer data tables corresponding to the display data tables stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands, etc. sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands, etc. from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if null data is not written), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list (see Figure 57) described below, which contains the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes processing to transfer image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing that sprite can be sure to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Pointer 233f is used to specify the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is to be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S2303 in Figure 85(b)) of the V interrupt process, which is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, pointer update processing (see S3105 in Figure 70(b)) is executed, and the value of pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this way, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and creates a drawing list (see Figure 57) described below. The MPU 231 also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should begin being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e and adds this transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and used to draw a specified sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on that transfer data table by the time the drawing of that sprite begins using the corresponding display data table. This means that even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the images of each sprite specified in the display data table are being drawn. Furthermore, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, and is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, with reference to Figure 57, the details of the drawing list will be explained. Figure 57 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images. As shown in Figure 57, the drawing list describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite used in one frame's image, such as the background image, third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information that causes the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, as well as its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs scaling on a standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the various video RAMs according to the magnification, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using a method specified by that information, before drawing the resulting image at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count symbol, or a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data, among the detailed information for each sprite, are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from other image content. In other words, the area of resident video RAM 235 where the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) specified in the display data table as is among the detailed information for each sprite.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed closest to the front, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front.

Furthermore, if transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the effect displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing for one frame of image is completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see Figure 85(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S3107 in Figure 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed using the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the effect.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag that indicates the storage status of all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in Figure 83) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred corresponding to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 96) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF."

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 references the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in Figure 96). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S3514 in Figure 96) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on," the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is canceled. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 will be expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information about this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list (see S3802 in Figure 97).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 also reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value from "0" to "1" and vice versa. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time drawing processing is performed in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image is completed (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110>
Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 58 to 67. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, main process that is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process that is started periodically (every 2 milliseconds in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The timer interrupt process first executes a process for reading various winning switches (S101). That is, the status of the various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the status of those switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and then a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first winning slot 64 (S105). Details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 59 to 62.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process is executed in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67 (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 63 and 64. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, provided that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, with reference to Figure 59, the special symbol change processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Figure 59 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change processing (S104). This special symbol change processing (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 58), and is processing for controlling the change display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, the change display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). A special symbol jackpot includes the period when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during special symbol jackpot play), and the period of time after the special symbol jackpot play has ended. If the determination shows that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If a special symbol jackpot has not been reached (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is currently changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not currently changing (S202: No), a special symbol change start process is executed to start a changing display on the first symbol display device 37 (S203). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed by the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S204). The change time of the change display being executed by the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S204: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the change time for the currently executing variable display has elapsed in the processing of S204 (S204: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The setting of the stopped symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol change start processing (S203), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether a special symbol jackpot has been awarded is determined based on the value of the first win random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been awarded, whether it will be jackpot A or jackpot B is determined based on the value of the second win type counter C2.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED on the first pattern display device 37 is lit, and if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit. Furthermore, if a miss occurs, the red and green LEDs are lit. The LEDs are turned off when the next variable display begins, but they may also be lit for only a few seconds after the variable display stops.

After the processing of S205 is completed, when the ongoing variable display on the first symbol display device 37 begins, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start processing (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S206). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S206: Yes), the type of jackpot is determined from the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S207). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving counter 203g in RAM 203 is set to 100 (S209). Then, the processing of S210 is executed. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability period, which is a probability variation period (S208). Then, the start of a special symbol jackpot is set (S210), and this processing ends.

In the process of S206, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special symbol (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or greater (S211), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or greater (S211: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S212), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to Figure 60, the special symbol variation start process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S203). This special symbol variation start process (S203) is a process executed within the special symbol variation process (see Figure 59) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58), and performs a lottery (win/lose determination) for a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area shared by the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and is a process for determining the presentation pattern (variation presentation pattern) of the variation presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol change start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved special symbol change displays) is obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S304). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S304, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball count area 203b is shifted (S305). In processing S305, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After processing S305 is executed, a process is executed to obtain the data for the execution area in the special pattern reserved ball count storage area (S310).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d obtained in the processing of S301 is 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S306 that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S307), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S308). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S308, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In processing S309, the data stored in reserved areas 1 through 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, and reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution areas of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are obtained (S310).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability game period (high probability game state) (S311). The determination of whether or not it is in a high probability game period is made by determining whether a high probability game flag (not shown) is on. This high probability game flag is set on when a jackpot game based on jackpot A has ended. On the other hand, it is set off when a jackpot game has started.

If it is determined that the game is in a special chance mode (S311: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special chance mode, and the process proceeds to S312. In S312, the result of the lottery as to whether or not a special jackpot has been won is obtained based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained in S310 and the special jackpot random number table for high probability (S312). Specifically, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special jackpot random number table for high probability. As mentioned above, there are 30 random number values set for special symbol jackpots: "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299." If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, a jackpot for the special symbol is determined. Once the special symbol lottery results are obtained, processing proceeds to S314.

On the other hand, if the process of S311 determines that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state for the special symbol (S311: No), the process of S313 is executed. In S313, the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol has been won is obtained based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S313). Specifically, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. The three random number values for special symbol jackpots are "7, 107, and 282," and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that a special symbol has been won. Once the result of the special symbol lottery has been obtained, the process proceeds to S314.

In S314, the lottery result for the special symbol obtained in S312 or S313 is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S314). If it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S314: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the second jackpot type counter C2 obtained in S310 (S315). More specifically, the value of the second jackpot type counter C2 obtained in S310 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table to determine the type of jackpot between the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59," it is determined to be jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability period until the next jackpot after the jackpot play), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99," it is determined to be jackpot B (16R jackpot, short period of 100 times for normal symbols).

In this S315 process, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Furthermore, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed in a stopped state on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S316). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S316, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation presentation in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops on the jackpot pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 203 is checked, and the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Note that the relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation time is specified in advance using a table or the like.

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol, which notifies the result of the win/lose judgment, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113. The voice lamp control unit 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the win/lose judgment. Even if the main control unit 110 displays a reach-to-miss display mode, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to be able to switch between the reach display mode and a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various types of "Miss normal reach", various types of "Miss super reach", and various types of "Miss special reach". The fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B include various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach".

If it is determined in the processing of S314 that the special symbol has missed (S314: No), the display mode for when it misses is set (S317). In the processing of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missing symbol, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a loss is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a loss symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, as with the processing of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

Next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S316 or S318 (S319). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the processing of S316 or S318 (S320). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (Figure 67). The voice lamp control device 113 sends the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S320 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, referring to Figure 61, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described. Figure 61 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58) and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first winning slot 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it holds the values indicated by the various random number counters and, from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been held, performs a pre-read of the lottery results for the special symbol.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether a ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning slot 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that a ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times N1 for the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command for special pattern 1 is set, indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see Figure 67) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S405, the values of the first win random number counter C1, second win type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in RAM 203 (S406). Note that in processing S406, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is designated as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is designated as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is designated as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is designated as the first area.

Next, for S407 to S411, the same processing is performed as for S401 to S406 described above, except that the processing for winning in the first winning slot 64 is changed to the processing for winning in the second winning slot 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, when a gaming ball wins in the second winning slot 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning type counter C2 are also obtained and stored in the corresponding empty reserved area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by obtaining the same values for the first winning random number counter C1 and second winning type counter C2 for special pattern 2 as for special pattern 1, based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640, the lottery can be performed using a common random number for both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, making it possible to keep the winning probability constant for both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

After executing the processing of S411, a look-ahead process is executed (S412). Details of the look-ahead process (S412) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 62, but the process executes a process to determine in advance the results of each lottery to be executed at the start of fluctuations based on the values of various counters obtained for balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640.

In this embodiment, the values of each counter are selected based on the ball entering the ball, but they can also be selected when the fluctuation starts. This configuration eliminates the need for storage space to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, reducing the use of storage space in RAM 203. It is also possible to configure the system so that only some of the counters (for example, only stop type selection counter C3) are acquired when the fluctuation starts. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss determination to be acquired when the ball enters the ball, and the counters not related to the hit/miss determination to be acquired later, reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining fairness in the game.

Next, with reference to Figure 62, we will explain the look-ahead processing (S412), which is one process within the start-up winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Figure 62 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead processing (S412).

In the pre-reading process (Fig. 62, S412), first, a determination is made as to whether the hit/miss judgment at the start of the fluctuation is a jackpot based on the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 (S501). The hit/miss judgment at the start of the fluctuation determines whether the game state at the start of the fluctuation is a normal game state (low probability) or a high probability game state (high probability game state) based on the hit/miss judgment and hit type of the counter values displayed before the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. If the result of the judgment is a jackpot (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot is set (S502). On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S501 is not a jackpot (S501: No), a determination is made as to whether the game state is a miss super reach (S503). If the process of S503 determines that the game is a "missing super reach" (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating that the game is a "missing super reach" is set (S504). On the other hand, if the process of S503 determines that the game is not a "missing super reach" (S503: No), a winning command indicating that the game is a "missing" is set (S505). In this way, the result of the preliminary win/loss determination before the start of the variation is output as a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113 each time a reserved ball is formed, so that the audio lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss determination result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute a preview effect that notifies the player of the win/loss determination result for the reserved ball in advance (for example, by changing the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the win/loss determination result, or by outputting an alarm sound to notify the player of the win/loss determination result for the reserved ball). Additionally, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball that is created, the audio and lamp control device 113 can also recognize when a reserved ball is created.

Next, referring to Figure 63, we will explain the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601). The second symbol is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win indication, and when the electric device 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is being controlled to open and close. If the determination shows that the second symbol is winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the second symbol is not currently winning (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is currently changing (S602). If the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not currently changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (the number of times M of the normal symbol variable display has been reserved) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In S606, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, and reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving mode is active (S608), and if the time-saving mode is not active (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the time-saving mode is active (S608: Yes), it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is active (S609). The special symbol jackpot is active while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and during a predetermined period of time after the special symbol jackpot game has ended.

If the special symbol jackpot is not currently being won in S609 (S609: No), the process proceeds to S610. If the special symbol jackpot is currently being won in S609 (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S610.

If the game is in a special mode or a time-saving mode (i.e., in the time-saving mode) (S609: Yes), and the pachinko machine 10 is not in a jackpot with a special symbol (S609: No), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained (S610) based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 and the normal win random number table 202c for high probability (see Figure 52(c)). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for high probability (see Figure 52(c)).

In the processing of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the result of the lottery as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 and the normal win random number table 202c for low probability (see Figure 52(c)) (S611). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for low probability (see Figure 52(c)).

In this embodiment, the system is configured so that during a special jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to result in a winning result. This is because, during a special jackpot (i.e., during the special game mode), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning slot 65a, and the electric device 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is opened to prevent the ball intended to win the special winning slot 65a from entering the second winning slot 640 as much as possible. Furthermore, because the special winning slot 65a is located directly below the second winning slot 640, even if balls are prevented from entering the second winning slot 640 during a special jackpot, many balls will enter the second winning slot 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning slot 640 reaches its maximum (four times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game mode.

Next, the lottery result for the normal symbol obtained by processing S610 or S611 is determined to be a winning second symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a winning second symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode for the winning symbol is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether the time-saving mode is active (S614).

If it is determined in the processing of S614 that the time-shortening state is active (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently active (S615). If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is active (S615: Yes), the processing proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during a special symbol jackpot, in order to minimize the ball entering the second winning slot 640, the number of times and the opening time of the electric device 640a are set in the same way as when a normal symbol wins, even if the normal symbol wins.

In the processing of S615, if a jackpot with a special symbol is not currently being won (S615: No), the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 (S616), and the processing proceeds to S619.

If it is determined in the processing of S614 that the time-saving state is not in effect (S614: No), the process proceeds to processing of S617. In processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state for a special symbol or is in the normal state for the second symbol, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to processing of S619.

If it is determined in the process of S612 that the second symbol is a miss (S612: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S618). In this process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has finished, the "X" symbol is set to be displayed as a lit stopped symbol (second symbol). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening state is in effect (S619). If the time-shortening state is in effect (S619: Yes), the variable display time on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the time-shortening state is not in effect in the process of S619 (S619: No), the variable display time on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process ends. In this way, except during a jackpot with a special pattern, when the probability of the second pattern is high, the variable display time is significantly shorter (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) than when the probability of the second pattern is low. Furthermore, the opening period of the second winning slot 640 is significantly longer (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing in the processing of S602 (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S622). Note that the change time here is the time that was set in advance by processing of S620 or S621 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time for the currently executing fluctuation display has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stopped display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode has been set by the processing of S613, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "○" pattern as a stopped display (illuminated display) as the second pattern. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode has been set by the processing of S618, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display an "X" pattern as a stopped display (illuminated display) as the second pattern. When the stop display is set by processing S623, the next time the second pattern display update processing (see S1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 67) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 will end, and the stop pattern (second pattern) will be displayed as a stop (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S613 or S618.

Next, when the ongoing variable display on the second symbol display device 83 begins, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing (the current lottery result) is a winning normal symbol (S624). If the current lottery result is a winning normal symbol (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric role device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric role device 640a is set by the processing of S625, the next time the electric role device opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 67) is executed, the opening/closing control of the electric role device 640a begins, and the opening/closing control of the electric role device 640a continues until the opening time and number of openings set by the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a losing normal symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64. Figure 64 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67, and, if a ball has passed, obtaining and reserving the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is then stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of RAM 203 (S705). Note that in S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referenced. If the value is 0, reserved area 1 is designated as the first reserved area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area will be the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area will be the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area will be the first area, and this process will end.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt processing causes power outage information to be stored in RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the ongoing control and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage information in RAM 203 as the power outage information setting (S801), and terminates the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/launch control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in RAM 213. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, causing the MPU 211 to interrupt the control currently being executed and start the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to Figure 66, the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when power is applied to the main control unit 110 will be described. Figure 66 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is initiated by a reset when power is applied. In the startup process, first, an initial setting process associated with power application is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S902). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see Figure 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is on (S904), and if it is on (S904: Yes), processing proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), it is possible that processing did not end normally during the previous power outage, so in this case too, processing proceeds to S912.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to S912. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 67, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at a working area address in RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are saved correctly.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout initialization command is received, the payout control device 111 clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized upon power-on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed during startup processing, RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, RAM 203 initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed if power outage information has not been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.). In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S914). After RAM 203 initialization processing is executed, processing proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power outage information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S908) while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203. Next, a payout restoration command upon power restoration is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state it was in when the drive power was cut off (S909), and processing proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout restoration command, it becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls while retaining the data stored in RAM 213.

In the processing of S910, a performance permission command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 113, allowing the audio and lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main processing described below.

Next, referring to Figure 67, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing. Figure 67 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, each of the processes S1001 to S1007 is executed as periodic processing at a 4 millisecond cycle, and the counter update processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), an external output processing is executed (S1001) to send output data such as commands stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203 to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is determined, and if winning detection information is present, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls acquired is sent to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball count command set in the special pattern variation processing (see FIG. 58) or the start winning processing (see FIG. 61) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning processing or the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 62) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output processing sends to the voice lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the third pattern variation.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Once the variable type counter CS1 has finished updating, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, if a special symbol jackpot state is reached, jackpot control processing is executed to execute the jackpot presentation and open or close the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and a determination is made as to whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. If either of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that, although the jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing in this embodiment, it may also be executed in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, an electric device opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 (S1005). In the electric device opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric device 640a is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see Figure 63), opening/closing control of the electric device 640a is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric device 640a continues until the opening time and number of openings set by the process of S613 or S617 in Figure 63 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display on the first pattern display device 37 (S1006). In the first pattern display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S316 or S318 of the special pattern variation start process (see FIG. 60), the first pattern display device 37 starts displaying variations according to that variation pattern. In this embodiment, from the start of variation until the variation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on; if the green LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on; and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 once the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by processing S315 or S317 of the special pattern fluctuation start process (see FIG. 60) has ended, the fluctuation display being executed on the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by processing S315 or S317 of the special pattern fluctuation start process (see FIG. 60).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display on the second pattern display device 83 (S1007). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S620 or S621 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 63), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" and "X" symbols are alternately lit as the second symbols. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stationary display on the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 63), the change display being executed on the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stationary symbol (second symbol) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 63).

Then, it is determined whether or not power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S1008). If power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has not output a power outage signal SG1, and the power supply has not been interrupted. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes from S1001 onwards described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of this main processing (S1009: No), the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the predetermined time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main processing (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, the execution time for each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly using this remaining time to update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the stop type selection counter C3 can also be randomly updated in the same way.

Furthermore, if power outage information is stored in RAM 203 during the processing of S1008 (S1008: Yes), power was interrupted due to a power outage or power-off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, resulting in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 65. Therefore, the processing for power outage from S1012 onward is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1013). Next, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved (S1014), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015). This infinite loop continues until power is completely interrupted and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the backed-up stack area and work area of RAM 203.

Note that S1008 is executed at the end of a series of processes in S1001-S1007 corresponding to changes in game status, or at the end of one cycle of S1010 and S1011, which are performed within the remaining time. Therefore, since the main control unit 110 checks for power outage information when each setting is completed during its main processing, when recovering from a power-off state, processing can begin from S1001 after the startup processing is completed. In other words, processing can begin from S1001, just as it would if initialization were performed during startup processing. Therefore, during power-off processing, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initialization processing (S901), allowing processing to begin from S1001. This reduces the control burden on the main control unit 110 and enables accurate control without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

<Control process executed by the voice and lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to Figures 68 to 82, we will explain each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, referring to Figure 68, we will explain the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is initiated when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was initiated during the power-off processing of S1320 (see FIG. 70) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), it executes the power-off processing of S1320. Before executing this power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is set on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is set off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1320 is currently being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), this startup process was initiated after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing at S1320 was completed, or because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1203).

Checking for data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" was written to a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the current startup process is initiated after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because RAM 223's memory is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that RAM 223 data has been corrupted (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if the current startup process is initiated after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power-off process of S1320 has been completed, or if the startup process is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), this startup process was initiated after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1320 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, control cannot continue in this case, so the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of RAM 223 begins.

In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1204). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written to a specific area of RAM 223, and RAM corruption check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written to this specific area, it is possible to check whether data corruption has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in RAM 223 is reported (S1207), and an infinite loop occurs until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is reported by the indicator lamp 34. The abnormality in RAM 223 may be reported by sound output from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81.

In S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1208 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process was started after a momentary power outage and after the power-off process of S1320 had been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared (S1209) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, initial values are set in RAM 223 (S1210), interrupt permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the working area of RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area for storing commands, etc. received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is set to OFF and S1208 is reached, the process proceeds from S1204 to S1206 to S1208 because the current startup process was initiated after the power supply was completely shut off, or if the process was initiated because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which clears the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1210. After setting the initial values of RAM 223 (S1210), interrupt permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to main processing. It is then determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1212).

The clearing process of S1209 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S1204 to S1206 and then to S1208, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the startup process is initiated, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

In S1214, the time setting process is executed (S1214). Details of this time setting process (S1214) will be explained with reference to Figure 69.

Next, referring to Figure 69, we will explain the time setting process (S1214), which is one process within the startup process (see Figure 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 69 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1214). The time setting process (Figure 69, S1214) determines the setting of the setting switch 291 to determine whether or not to execute a time effect. If the setting is to execute a time effect, time information is obtained from the RTC 292, and based on that time information, the time effect period is set in the set time memory area 223j.

In the time setting process (Fig. 69, S1214), time information is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S1221). The time information obtained here consists of hour and minute values. The RTC 292 is a timing device with an internal battery, and is configured so that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 using a specified jig. The internal battery has a capacity of approximately three and a half years of operation. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine the year, month, and date. Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, it is possible to control the display to change to a Christmas-specific background image or to display special characters such as Santa.

Next, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time performance period are calculated and set in the set time memory area 223j (S1222).

In this embodiment, the preparation period and time presentation period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time memory area 223j. However, this is not limiting; the system may be configured to first set 54 minutes for normal gameplay, measure that period by counting down or counting up, etc., and set the preparation period when 54 minutes have passed. Alternatively, the system may be configured to set a time 54 minutes from now, and when that time is reached, set the time for the next period. This configuration reduces the required memory area capacity. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to be configured more inexpensively.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1301: No), processing of S1302 to S1311 is not performed and processing proceeds to S1312. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in processing of S1301 is that S1302 to S1311 are primarily processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in short cycles (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1312, the variable display setting processing of S1313, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) in short cycles. By executing the processing of S1312 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1313 at short intervals, it is possible to set the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1314 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1302). Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described below (S1303), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies the user that power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when power is turned on. This notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not being turned on, the power-on notification process is not made and the process proceeds to S1305.

In the processing of S1305, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, followed by a reserved ball count display update processing (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, settings are made to switch the display on the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball count display update processing, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Then, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors whether the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input from the frame button 22 is confirmed. This frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307) will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 80.

Once the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), followed by the sound editing and output process (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29-33 are set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1309, the LCD display execution management process is executed (S1310), and then the background image setting process is executed (S1311). Then, the process proceeds to S1312. In the LCD display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this LCD display execution monitoring process. The sound editing and output process of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110 (S1312). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figure 71. After the command determination process (Figure 71, S1312) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control unit 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, this command is sent to the display control unit 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 74.

Once processing of S1313 is completed, processing of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. Details of this synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to Figure 77.

After S1314 is completed, it is determined whether power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in S1317 (S1317: Yes), the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are both turned on (S1319), and power failure processing is executed (S1320). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and the processing then enters an infinite loop. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off output from the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: No), a determination is made as to whether RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1318). If RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1318: No), the processing returns to S1301 and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1318: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop subsequent processing. If RAM corruption is determined and an infinite loop occurs, the main processing is not executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred and to call a parlor staff member or the like to request repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that RAM 223 has been corrupted, a RAM corruption alert may be issued by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

Next, referring to Figure 71, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed within the main process (see Figure 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is first read from the command storage area in RAM 223, analyzed, and a determination is made as to whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1401). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and the data in the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). Thereafter, the preview selection process is executed (S1404), and processing proceeds to S1419.

Here, details of this advance notice selection process (S1404) will be explained with reference to Figure 72. Figure 72 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

In the preview selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1501). It is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode memory area 223k is effect mode A (S1502). If it is determined that effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), a normal preview effect is selected based on the result of the success/failure determination and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1503). Then, a display preview command indicating the selected preview effect is set (S1504).

On the other hand, if presentation mode A is not set in the processing of S1502 (S1502: No), it is determined whether presentation mode C is set (S1505). If presentation mode C is set (S1505: Yes), and the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit, a display preview command is set on the third pattern display device 81 to preview a super school of fish, in which a school of fish flows from right to left (S1507).

On the other hand, if presentation mode C is not set in the processing of S1505 (S1505: No), or if the result of the hit/miss determination in the processing of S1506 is not a hit (S1506: No), this processing ends.

In this way, the display preview command to be set can be switched and configured based on the selected presentation mode. Furthermore, the preview presentation is also determined based on the result of the win/loss judgment and the value of the presentation counter 223g at the start of the fluctuation, so there is no need to determine and select the timing of the display start, etc., thereby reducing the control load. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timing for displaying the preview is predetermined based on the fluctuation pattern, and a display preview command indicating that timing is set, so that the display is set to be displayed at that timing in the display control device 114.

Now, returning to Figure 71, we will continue the explanation. After the preview selection process (Figure 72, S1404) has been executed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1405). If a stop type command has been received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f in RAM 223 is set to on (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see Figure 74), described below, is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). If a reserved ball count command has been received (S1408: Yes), the respective reserved ball counts are extracted from the received command and set in the corresponding special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c (S1409).

Here, the reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held. Therefore, each time an initial winning is detected or a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively, by processing S1407. Therefore, even if the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected when a start winning is detected or when a special pattern is drawn, so that they match the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if a reserved ball count command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1410). If a winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), winning command reception processing is executed (S1411). Processing according to other commands is then executed (S1419), and the process returns to main processing. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (initial winning), the main control unit 110 acquires the values of each of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired values of each of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count storage area 203b, respectively. Additionally, as soon as the main control unit 110 acquires the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1, various information that will be obtained if the original lottery is held is read in advance (predicted) from the acquired values of counters C1-C3, separate from the original jackpot lottery for the special symbol. Then, when the main control unit 110 completes the read-ahead, a winning command including the various information obtained by the read-ahead (win/lose, stop type, variation pattern) is sent from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113.

Now, referring to FIG. 73, we will explain the winning command reception process (S1411), which is part of the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312). FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command reception process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1512). Next, it is determined whether the 8-piece effect flag 223i is on (S1513). If the 8-piece effect flag 223i is on (S1514: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the 8-piece effect flag 223i is not on, it is determined whether the total number of reserved balls in the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c is 8 (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is the maximum value) (S1514).

If the number of reserved balls is eight (S1514: Yes), an eight-ball lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a preview display mode for the eight reserved balls based on the effect counter 223g (S1519). Here, the eight-ball lottery is performed by determining whether the value of the effect counter 223g (a counter that updates within the range of 0 to 198) obtained in the processing of S1512 is between 0 and 49.

If the result of the 8-ball effect lottery is to execute the 8-ball effect (S1520: Yes), the 8-ball effect flag 223i is turned on and the 8-ball effect is set (S1522). On the other hand, if the result of the 8-ball effect lottery is not to execute the 8-ball effect (S1520: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is not 8 in the process of S1514 (S1514: No), a normal reserved effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223g (S1515), and it is determined whether there has been a change in the reserved effect (S1516). Here, if the received winning command is a win, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", a normal reserved effect (the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is changed to a symbol displayed as PUSH, as shown in FIG. 41(a)) is selected; otherwise, a normal reserved effect is not selected (i.e., there is no change in the reserved effect (display mode of the reserved symbol)).

If there is a change in the hold effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to ON (S1517), and the selected normal hold effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, if there is no change in the hold effect (S1516: No), this process ends.

Returning to Figure 71, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S1410 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1419), and the process returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that that command is sent to the display control device 114.

In this way, in this embodiment, the display of the reserved effect is set to differ depending on the number of reserved items. When the number of reserved items reaches the maximum value, as shown in Figure 42(a), a different effect from the normal reserved effect (see Figure 41(a)) is displayed, so the player can play with the motivation to increase the number of reserved items as much as possible.

As will be described later, in the normal hold effect, the reserved symbol that indicates the result of the hit/miss judgment corresponding to the changed reserved symbol is changed by operating the frame button 22. Specifically, if the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, a star symbol is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, and if the selected variation pattern is a super reach, a triangle symbol or the like is displayed. In the eight-symbol effect, the notification mode is determined based on the hit/miss judgment result and the type of variation pattern for one of the eight displayed reserved symbols. For example, a hold that will result in a jackpot is stored, and as a notification mode based on this, if the frame button 22 is pressed to change and display each of the eight push symbols, the words "Jackpot!!!!" are displayed, as shown in Figure 42(b). Figure 42(b) shows the state in which the first two push symbols are displayed.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that an eight-ball effect will be executed, the display mode is determined based on the hit/miss judgment result in the reserved memory and the selected variation pattern type. However, this is not a limitation. A decision on whether to execute an eight-ball effect can be made based on whether the number of reserved balls has reached eight. If it is determined that an eight-ball effect will be executed, the reserved symbol display is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 42(a). If a reserved memory whose hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot is set within this reserved memory, a notification mode indicating a jackpot (e.g., "Jackpot!!!!") is set. On the other hand, if no reserved ball whose hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot is stored, a notification mode that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., "Jackpot determined????") can be set. If the reserved balls are consumed and new reserved balls are stored before the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode set can be changed based on the hit/miss judgment result of the reserved ball. In this case, if the result of the hit/miss determination for the newly established reserved ball is a jackpot, the notification mode may be set to a new notification mode that suggests a jackpot (for example, "Jackpot confirmed!!"). This allows the player to enjoy the fun of deciding when to press the frame button 22.

Next, referring to Figure 74, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 74 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed within the main processing (see Figure 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

The variation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313) first determines whether the variation start flag 223e stored in RAM 223 is on (S1601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is not on (i.e., off) (S1601: No), this indicates that a variation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S1605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then a variation pattern selection process is executed (S1603). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S1603) are explained in detail with reference to FIG. 75. Based on the current presentation mode, a process is executed to determine the details of the variation pattern in accordance with the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation time, variation type (reach, non-reach, etc.), and other general details are determined by a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, and the actual variation mode to be displayed (details of the variation pattern) is determined by the presentation mode and presentation counter value set in the audio lamp control device 113.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated and set to send this command to the display control device 114 (S1604). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, although not shown in the figure, the data stored in the prize information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize information storage area 223f is shifted sequentially to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After the data has been shifted, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f stored in RAM 233 is on (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1605: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type for the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from RAM 223 (S1607). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is set as the stop type for the variable effect in the third pattern display device 81 (S1608), and processing proceeds to S1609.

In the processing of S1609, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and this command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S1609). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable effect so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is displayed as a stop on the third pattern display device 81. After the processing of S1609 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 75, we will explain the variation pattern selection process (S1603), which is one process within the variation display setting process (Figure 74, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process (S1603).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1611). It is determined whether effect mode A (normal play period) is set in the effect mode memory area 223k (S1612). If it is determined that effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), button effect selection process is executed (S1613). This process then ends. Details of this button effect selection process (S1613) will be explained with reference to Figure 75, but a process is executed to select a variation pattern exclusively for the normal play period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1612 that the mode is not presentation mode A (S1612: No), it is determined whether presentation mode B (time presentation period) is set (S1614). If it is determined that presentation mode B is set (S1614: Yes), a variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table 222a for the corresponding time presentation period based on the value of the presentation counter 223g and the contents of the variation pattern command (S1615). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the processing of S1614 determines that the mode is not presentation mode B, i.e., presentation mode C (time presentation extension period) (S1614: No), a variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table 222a for the corresponding time presentation extension period based on the presentation counter 223g and the contents of the received variation pattern command (S1616). Then, this processing ends.

In this way, a dedicated variation pattern is selected based on the selected presentation mode, allowing the presentation content displayed to change depending on the period. This allows for more variety in the presentation of the game, and prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, with reference to Figure 76, we will explain the button effect selection process (S1613), which is one process within the variation pattern selection process (Figure 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of this button effect selection process (S1613).

In the button effect selection process (Fig. 76, S1613), first, a variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the corresponding normal play period based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1621). It is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a button effect (a variation pattern of a composite display mode). If it is determined to be a variation pattern of a composite display mode (see Fig. 43) (S1622: Yes), a stop pattern for a button effect is set as a reach stop pattern (S1623). Here, a reach display mode in which the sub-patterns are in diagonal positions is set. The button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S1624). This process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1622 that the selected variation pattern is not a variation pattern of a composite display mode (S1622: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 77, we will explain the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one process within the main process (Figure 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). This synchronous effect management process (S1314) acquires time information from the RTC 292, and based on that time information, determines whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and executes processing to set the effect mode that indicates that.

In the synchronized effect management process (Fig. 77, S1314), first, time information (hours and minutes) is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1701). It is determined whether effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode memory area 223k (S1702). If it is determined that effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data obtained in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). If it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to on (S1704). It sets effect mode B (time effect period) in the effect mode memory area 223k (S1705), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that it is not the time effect period, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1702 that presentation mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether presentation mode B (time presentation period) is set (S1706). If it is determined that presentation mode B is set (S1706: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the processing of S1701 is 3 seconds before the end of the time presentation, i.e., 3 seconds before the end timing of the time presentation period (S1707). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a premonition presentation indicating whether or not a 3-second extended presentation will be executed.

If it is determined that the time presentation period has ended (S1707: Yes), the extended presentation setting process is executed (S1708). This process then ends. This extended presentation setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 78, and the process determines whether or not to set the time presentation extension period. On the other hand, if it is determined that the presentation mode is not B, that is, the presentation mode is C (time presentation extension period) (S1706: No), it is determined whether the time presentation extension period is not in progress, that is, whether the time presentation extension period has ended (S1709). If it is determined that the time presentation extension period has ended (S1709: Yes), the presentation mode is set to A (S1710). This process then ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 78, we will explain the extended performance setting process (S1708), which is one process within the synchronous performance management process (Figure 77, S1314) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this extended performance setting process (S1708).

The extended effect setting process (Fig. 78, S1708) first determines whether a jackpot game is in progress (S1721). If it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to on (S1722), and effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). This process then ends.

As such, since extended effects cannot be executed during jackpot play, by executing a process to set the normal play period, it is possible to control the game so that the background image for the normal play period is set after the jackpot play.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1721 that the jackpot game is not currently being played (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end of the time presentation period (S1724). If it is determined that it is the end of the time presentation period (S1724: Yes), it is determined in the processing of S1728 described below whether a re-changing presentation has been set, i.e., whether it has been determined that an extended presentation will be set (S1725). If an extended presentation has been determined (S1725: Yes), the extended presentation flag 223p is set to ON (S1725). The presentation mode is set to C (S1727). This processing then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1725 that an extended effect has not been decided (S1725: No), the processing proceeds to S1722. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1724 that the timing for the timed effect to end has not yet arrived (S1724: No), it is determined whether winning information that would result in a win is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, or whether the hit/miss judgment during the change is a hit (S1728). If winning information that would result in a win is stored, or if the hit/miss judgment during the change is a hit (S1728: Yes), the time until the end of the winning change is calculated and set as the extended effect time (S1729). A re-changing effect is set (S1730). Here, the re-changing effect is set to a display mode in which a school of fish appears from the right, as shown in Figure 47 (b). After the processing of S1730 is completed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 79, we will explain the pending item count display update process (S1306), which is one process within the main process (see Figure 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the contents of this pending item count display update process (S1306).

In the pending number display update process (Fig. 79, S1306), it is first determined whether the pending symbol display needs to be changed (S1801). This determination is made based on the pending command obtained from the main control unit 110. A display pending command indicating the changed pending symbol display is set (S1802). This process then terminates. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1801 process that there is no change to the pending display (S1801: No), this process terminates.

Next, with reference to Figure 80, we will explain the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307), which is one process within the main process (see Figure 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Fig. 80, S1307), it is first determined whether a valid period has been set that is determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed (S1811). If it is determined that a valid period has been set (S1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the 8-ball effect flag 223i has been set on (S1813). If it is determined that the 8-ball effect flag 223i is on (S1813: Yes), the corresponding reserved 8-ball effect flag 223i is set off (S1814). Note that the 8-ball effect flags are configured so that a flag is set for each reserved ball, and the flag corresponding to the reserved symbol that has been changed to and displayed as the notification reserved symbol is set on. Furthermore, the notification pending symbol is set to OFF based on (or when) it is displayed in a variable notification mode (in this embodiment, text display) based on the operation of the frame button 22.

After processing S1814, the notification mode for the eight-piece effect is set for the notification pending symbol that has the earliest change start order among the pending symbols for which the eight-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1815). This processing then ends. Note that this notification mode is preset when the eight-piece effect is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is outside its valid period (S1811: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1812 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1812: No), this processing is terminated.

Furthermore, in the processing of S1813, if it is determined that the 8-effect flag 223i is off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816). If it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to off (S1817). A normal hold effect for the corresponding hold is executed (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is off in the processing of S1816 (S1816: No), the composite display mode change pattern is being executed, so a button effect execution process is executed (S1819). This process then ends.

Next, referring to Figure 81, we will explain the button effect execution process (S1819), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring and effect process (Figure 80, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of this button effect execution process (S1819). In this button effect execution process (S1819), control of the button effects in the variation patterns of the composite display mode shown in Figures 43 and 44 is executed.

In the button effect execution process (Fig. 81, S1819), it is first determined whether the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that a variation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in Fig. 44(b) is displayed has been selected. The variation patterns of the composite display mode also include fake variation patterns in which the composite display mode shown in Fig. 44(b) is not displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether the timing has come after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44(b)) has been displayed (S1832). If it is determined that the timing has come after the composite display mode has been displayed (S1832: Yes), a display command indicating the composite display mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1843). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1831 that the button effect flag 223r is off (S1831: No), it is determined whether this is the timing when the notification symbol is variably displayed before the composite display mode is displayed (see Figure 43 (b)) (S1835). If it is determined that this is the timing before the composite display (S1835: Yes), the button effect counter is incremented by 1 (S1836). A display command indicating the pre-composite effect mode (notification mode) is set based on the selected variable pattern and the value of the button effect counter (S1837). This processing then ends. Here, characters such as "chance" or the like are displayed to notify the player of the win/loss judgment result in advance.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1835 that the button was not pressed before the composite display mode was displayed, this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this embodiment, multiple button effects are set, and they are controlled by distinguishing between the different flags. This configuration allows for a configuration without increasing the number of frame buttons 22, making it inexpensive and easy to understand.

Next, with reference to Figure 82, we will explain the background image setting process (S1311), which is one process within the main process (see Figure 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of this background image setting process (S1311).

In the background image setting process (Fig. 82, S1311), it is first determined whether the extension effect flag 223p is on (S1901). If the extension effect flag 223p is on, i.e., if it is the start timing of the extension effect (S1901: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to off (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time effect extension period is set (S1903). In this embodiment, a background image is set in which the color of the background image for the time effect period has been changed to gold. This background image is used when the time effect period is extended, i.e., when it has been determined that a winning variation will begin, and therefore becomes the background image that notifies the player of a win. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the extension effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is then determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). If it is determined that the start period flag is on (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to off (S1905), and a display background change command corresponding to the time effect period is set (S1906). In this way, when the start period flag 223o is on, it is the start timing of the time effect period, and a background image dedicated to the time effect period (see Figure 46 (a)) is set. This allows the background image to be changed in accordance with the start timing, so the background image can be changed in synchronization with other pachinko machines 10 of the same model.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is then determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). If it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to off (S1908), and a display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). This processing then terminates. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), this processing terminates.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to Figures 83 to 97, the various controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is repeatedly executed after power-on; command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio/lamp control device 113; and V interrupt processing, which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal occur simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the audio/lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to Figure 83, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. Figure 83 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing executes initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and a system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided within the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H," it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts executing the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main processing.

Here, if the boot program to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released were all stored in NAND flash memory 234a, when character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on bus line 240 is "0000H," it must read one page of data, including the data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H," from NAND flash memory 234a and set it in buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a significant amount of time to read the data and set it in buffer RAM 234c, so MPU 231 must spend a lot of time waiting between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H." This increases the time it takes for MPU 231 to start up, resulting in a problem in which control of third pattern display device 81 in display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Because the NOR ROM is a memory capable of high-speed data readout, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," enabling the MPU 231 to quickly start main processing. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to Figure 84. Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234, which is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND-type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, and is therefore able to store sufficient image data as well as control programs, etc., while eliminating the need for a dedicated program ROM to store control programs, etc. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failure due to an increased number of parts.

However, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 were to directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, this could degrade the processing performance of the display control device 114, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, this boot process transfers and stores the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233, which is composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). This causes the MPU 231 to begin executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by processing S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, rather than reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, and therefore reads at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the processing for those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, the remaining control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot program whose execution is initiated by the set instruction pointer 231a (S2103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) mentioned above among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in Figure 83) that should be executed after the boot process (see S2001 in Figure 83) is completed (S2105), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referencing the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex effects using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions, starting with the first instruction to be processed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, can be stored, and the remaining boot program can be stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, but the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, simply adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234 enables MPU 231 to start up in a short time, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies this shortened startup time.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by processing S2101 is configured to include all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by processing S2101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be executed following processing S2102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute processing to set the starting address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The processes of S2103 to S2105 may then be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 may further transfer a predetermined portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. The portion of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing may further transfer a predetermined portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. The process of transferring a predetermined portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a may then be repeated multiple times, including the processing of S2101 and S2102, before executing the processing of S2103 to S2105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a to transfer it to the program storage area 233a in predetermined amounts at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is described as storing a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system is released from reset. However, all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute steps S2103 to S2105 without executing steps S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time for the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to more quickly start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, let's return to the explanation of Figure 83. Once the boot process is complete, initial setting processing is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for registers within the MPU 231, I/O devices, etc. Also, processing is performed to clear the storage of the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236. Furthermore, various flags are set in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to a different color depending on the model of pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color appropriate for the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has completed. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of internal memory provided within image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read the information in this register or partial area of internal memory as needed, and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby determining that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has completed.

Image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off. Based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, once the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of that image data, information about the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the starting address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 95(a)) described below is executed, which instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S3402 in FIG. 95(a)).

Furthermore, based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed. As a result, during this time, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in Figure 85(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in Figure 85(b)) are executed in the V interrupt process (see Figure 85(b)) so that the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figure 47 are drawn.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 10 uses NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main processing, after power is turned on, the power-on main image and power-on variable image are first transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows players and hall staff to view the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining resident image data is being transferred to resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining resident image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and can therefore wait until initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Furthermore, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and preventing the efficiency of operation checks from being reduced by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image. Therefore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, resulting in a ball entering the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be immediately displayed during the variable effect period, allowing a simple variable effect to be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, because the character ROM 234 is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, this transfer takes time, and therefore the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, with this pachinko machine 10, simple variable effects can be produced using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so players can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After processing S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and the main processing then executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by processing S2006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Figure 85(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 85(a) is a flowchart showing this command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

This command interrupt process extracts the received command data and sequentially stores the extracted command data in a command buffer area provided in work RAM 233 (S2201), then terminates. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Figure 85 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 85 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. This V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, creates a drawing list (see Figure 57) for that image, and sends this drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing for that image.

As described above, this V interrupt processing begins when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing processing or display processing of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first provide an overview of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in Figure 85 (b), it is first determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S2301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed to display a normal effect image on the third pattern display device 81, rather than the power-on image shown in Figure 47.

In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

This command determination process analyzes and processes all commands currently stored in the command buffer area. This is because the command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds that the V interrupt process is performed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control unit 110 decides to start a variable effect, it is highly likely that display variable pattern commands and display stop type commands will also be stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly determine the variable effect mode and stop type selected by the main control unit 110 and audio lamp control unit 113, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 86 to 91.

The display setting process (S2303) specifically identifies the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Furthermore, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 92 to 94.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). This task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, as determined by the display setting process (S2303) or the simplified display setting process (S2309), and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Furthermore, when a continuous preview command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is also set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview images used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 95 and 96.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in Figure 57 is generated from the types of sprites that make up one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, as determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2305). This drawing list is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to Figure 97.

Next, an update process is performed on various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S2107 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) that determines the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, during the command determination process, when reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type counter is compared with the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B), and the stop pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S2308) is executed to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and processing proceeds to S2304.

Next, with reference to Figures 64 to 68, we will explain the details of the command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Figure 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 86, this command determination process (S2302) first determines whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S2401). If there are no unprocessed new commands (S2401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there are unprocessed new commands (S2401: Yes), the new command flag is set to ON (S2402), which notifies the display setting process (S2303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the command type is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S2403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2405), and processing returns to S2401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 87 (a). Figure 87 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set multiple display data tables, and it is possible to process the set display data tables by moving the pointer synchronously. Therefore, even when executing different displays corresponding to multiple background modes, it is possible to switch between multiple display contents by setting one of the multiple display data table buffers active and switching it.

Here, the main control unit 110 always determines the start of a variation at least several seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that some of the commands may change due to noise or other factors, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. To prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the main control unit 110 actually instructs a change presentation with a shorter change time than the set display data table, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control unit 110 while the change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which could cause a sense of discomfort to the player.

In contrast to this, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern with the shortest variable time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this embodiment, even if the main control unit 110 actually instructs a variable presentation with a longer variable time than the set display data table, as will be described later, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the variable presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, allowing the player to continue watching the third pattern variation on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether it is a composite display mode variation pattern (a button effect variation pattern) (S2503). If it is determined to be a composite display mode variation pattern (S2503: Yes), a reach symbol corresponding to the composite display mode variation pattern is set (S2504). Then, the processing of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2503 that it is not a composite display mode variation pattern (S2503: No), the processing of S2505 is executed.

Then, of the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set to off (S2505). In the display setting process, by referencing the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2506, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2507). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S2508), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508, extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and identifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, it extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, the display setting process uses the timing counter 233h, for which time data has been set by the processing of S2507, to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable effect in the variable display data table has ended, controls the stop display settings so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 86. If it is determined in the processing of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and processing returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be explained with reference to Figure 87 (b). Figure 87 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, before jackpot B) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S2601), and that stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see Figure 85 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance (S2602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set to off (S2603). After that, the processing returns to S2401 in FIG. 86.

As described above, the variable display data table contains offset information (pattern offset information) from the stopped pattern set by the S2602 process as type information that identifies the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation based on the data table. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stopped pattern set by the S2602 process is identified from the stopped pattern discrimination flag set by S2603, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting process is added to the identified stopped pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that, as described above, the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to Figure 86, the explanation continues. If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display preview display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If it is determined that a display preview command has been received (S2408: Yes), preview command processing is executed (S2409).

Here, details of the advance command processing (S2409) will be explained with reference to Figure 88. Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the contents of this advance command processing (Figure S2409).

In advance command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set multiple display data tables, and it is possible to process the set display data tables by moving the pointer synchronously. Therefore, even when executing different displays corresponding to multiple background modes, it is possible to switch between multiple display contents by setting one of the multiple display data table buffers active and switching it.

Here, the main control unit 110 always determines the start of a variation at least several seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that some of the commands may change due to noise or other factors, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. To prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, of the data table discrimination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each preview pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referencing the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are both set to off (S2706), the preview command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to Figure 86, we will continue the explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display preview command (S2408: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands. If it is determined that a display hold command has been received (S2410: Yes), hold command processing is executed.

Here, we will explain the pending command processing (S2411) with reference to Figure 89. Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of this pending command processing (S2411).

In the pending command processing (Fig. 89, S2411), it is first determined whether the received command indicates the number of pending items (S2801). If it is determined that the command indicates the number of pending items (S2801: Yes), pending display data corresponding to the pending number and design (pattern, color, etc.) indicated by the received display pending command is set in the display data table (S2802). This processing then terminates.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2801 that the received command is not a command indicating the number of reserved items (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command for a normal reserved effect (S2803). If it is determined that it is a command for a normal reserved effect (S2803: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to a normal reserved effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2804). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2803 that the received command is not a command indicating a normal hold effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command for an 8-piece effect (S2805). If it is determined that it is a command for an 8-piece effect (S2805: Yes), display data that changes to the preview symbol for the 8-piece effect is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2805 that the command is not for an eight-item effect, other pending display settings are executed (S2807). Then, this processing ends.

Returning to Figure 86, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that a display hold command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a display performance command has been received (S2412). If it is determined that a display performance command has been received (S2412: Yes), performance command processing is executed (S2413).

Here, details of this effect command processing (S2413) will be explained with reference to Figure 90. Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect command processing (S2413).

In the effect command processing (Fig. 90, S2413), it is first determined whether a re-changing effect (see Fig. 47(b)) is set during the time effect extension period (S2901). Here, when the re-changing effect is set in the processing of S1730 of the extension effect setting processing (Fig. 78, S1708) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is notified by command. If it is determined that a re-changing effect has been set (S2901: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the re-changing effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). Then, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the re-changing effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-extension effect (S2903). This pseudo-extension effect is a precursor effect that is displayed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect pattern is displayed shaking (see Figure 47 (a)). If it is determined that the pseudo-extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the pseudo-extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). Then, the processing proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2903 that the pseudo-extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether the 8-item effect is set (S2905). If it is determined that the 8-item effect is set (S2905: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the 8-item effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). Then, the processing proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2905 that the 8-item effect has not been set (S2905: No), it is determined whether the normal hold effect has been set (S2907). If it is determined that the normal hold effect has been set (S2907: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal hold effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). Then, the processing proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2907 that the normal hold effect has not been set (S2907: No), this processing ends.

In the processing of S2909, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set to off (S2910).

Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the change time is set in the time counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2912). This process then ends.

Returning to Figure 86, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display effect command (S2412: No), it is determined whether a background image change command has been received (S2414). If it is determined that a background image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S2415).

Here, the background image change command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of this background image change command processing (S2415).

In the rear image change command processing (Figure 91, S2415), the rear image change flag is set to ON (S3001). The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type after the change indicated by the command is set to ON (S3002). This processing then terminates.

Now, returning to Figure 86, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that a rear image change command has not been received (S2414: No), it is determined whether an error command has been received (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

Here, details of the error command processing (S2417) will be explained with reference to Figure 91 (b). Figure 91 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state, is set to ON (S3101). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S3102), after which the error command processing ends and the processing returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, processing in S3002 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 86. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there are no error commands (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and processing returns to S2401.

In S2401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if there are any unprocessed new commands (S2401: Yes), the processes of S2402 to S2419 are executed again. Then, S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if S2401 determines that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on during V interrupt processing (see Figure 85(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the corresponding processing, that is, the variation pattern command processing (see Figure 87(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Figure 87(b)), is executed. Other commands are discarded without being processed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see Figure 87 (a)) executed in this case, in processing S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in display data table buffer 233d, and the image data of the power-on main image and power-on variation image required in this case are stored in power-on main moving image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235, so in processing S2302, null data is written to transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figures 92 to 94, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 92 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 92, this display setting process determines whether the new command flag is on (S3201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., if it is off (S3201: No), it is determined that a new command was not processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and steps S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command was processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed in steps S3203 to S3204.

In the processing of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to Figure 93. Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images for errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3301).

The task processing uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let's return to the explanation of Figure 92. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S3203: No), the process then proceeds to the process of S3205.

In S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to Figure 94. Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing updates the pointer 233f, which specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to pointer 233f (S3401). That is, pointer 233f is updated so that, as a general rule, it is incremented by 1 each time V interrupt processing is executed. Also, as mentioned above, various data tables have Start information written at address "0000H" and the actual data is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, this pointer update process updates the value to 1, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order, starting from address "0001H".

After the value of pointer 233f is updated by processing S3301, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S3402). If the result is End information (S3402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3403), and if it is a demo display data table (S3403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S3404), pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, the display setting process can unfold the drawing contents in order from the top of the demo display data table, allowing the third pattern display device 81 to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3303 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3406), the processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting processing, if a display data table other than a demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content of the previous address containing the End information is always displayed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in that display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), the processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Now, returning to Figure 92, we will continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In task processing, based on the drawing content expanded in the process of S3206, along with the warning image and other data expanded earlier, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or greater (S3108: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), this means that the display time for the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S3209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is OFF (S3209: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been performed and it is time to perform it. Therefore, the confirmation display data table is first set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3211). Time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display data table is then set in the timing counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which is ON and indicates that the confirmation display effect is being performed, is set ON (S3214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag stored in the work RAM 233 (S3215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stopped pattern in the variable effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time with the end of that effect. Furthermore, simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to a final display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to a final display effect. Furthermore, compared to the conventional method of changing the display content by launching a separate program, the program does not become complex and bloated, and therefore does not place a heavy load on the MPU 231. Therefore, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S3215 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable effect, and the variable display data table contains pattern offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable effect until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect based on that data table. In the task processing (S2304), the stop symbol of the previous variable effect is identified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable effect starts from the stop symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is off and not on in the processing of S3209 (S3209: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3216). If the demo display flag is off (S3216: Yes), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display effect ends. Therefore, a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3217), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3218). Time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S3219). The pointer 233f is then initialized to 0 (S3220), and the demo display flag, which is on and indicates that a demo effect is in progress, is set to on (S3221), after which the processing ends and the processing returns to V interrupt processing.

In the processing of S3216, if the demo display flag is on (S3216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the confirmation display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, and the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on during the V interrupt processing (see Figure 85 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d that specifies that one image (not shown) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command will be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the duration of the variable effect using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figures 95 and 96, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Figure 95 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 95 (b).

On the other hand, if the result of processing S3501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., is off (S3501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and processing returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 96.

Next, with reference to Figure 95(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 95(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

This resident image transfer setting process first determines whether an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S3601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S3501: Yes), the process then determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has completed (S3602). In S3602, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer completion signal indicating the completion of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, the process determines that the transfer process has completed. If S3602 determines that the transfer process has not completed (S3602: No), this indicates that the image controller 237 is still transferring images, and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the transfer process has completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, if the result of processing in S3501 shows that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

In the processing of S3603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S3603: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process includes transfer data information for untransferred resident target image data. Based on the transfer data information in the drawing list, the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area in resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address in resident video RAM 236 while resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is complete, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If, as a result of the processing of S3603, all resident target image data has been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 85(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 85(b)), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 86-91) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 92-94) are executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to resident video RAM 235, display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in image controller 237 while using the image data resident in resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. This eliminates the time required for reading, and allows the image to be drawn immediately and displayed on third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as background images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, audio lamp control unit 113, display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until an image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to Figure 96, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 96 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information stored at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303) is retrieved from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3701). It is then determined whether the retrieved information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S3703). Furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates the presence of image data for which transfer should be initiated when in the ON state, is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Furthermore, in the processing of S3702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S3702: No), the processing of S3703 and S3704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3705. In the processing of S3705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S3705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has ended (S3706).

In this processing of S3606, after an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. Then, if it is determined through processing of S3606 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3706: No), image transfer processing is continuing in the image controller 237, and this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S3706: Yes), processing proceeds to S3707. Also, if the result of processing of S3705 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), processing proceeds to S3707.

In S3707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), image data exists for which transfer should begin. Therefore, the transfer start flag is turned off (S3708). The image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off (S3707: No), this process ends.

In the processing of S3709, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). This determination in the processing of S3709 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite selected as the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236; if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S3709 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This prevents image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of processing S3709 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in normal video RAM 236 (S3709: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3710). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to image controller 237 during the drawing process, and image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information included in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address in the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing S3610, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and this normal transfer setting process ends. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON," and by setting the storage status corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that sprite to "OFF."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed during the previously executed command determination process, and if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be a jackpot stop type as a result, image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the background image is changed based on the reception of a background image change command during the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that background image that is not stored in the background image area 235c of resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table.By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easier to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

Next, with reference to Figure 97, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 97 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

During the drawing process, a drawing list as shown in Figure 57 is generated (S3801) from the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2305). That is, in the processing of S3701, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of each sprite is stored are identified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304), and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. The sprites are then sorted in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back in one frame of image to the sprite that should be placed furthest foreground, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the sorted sprite order, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, including the type and address of the storage RAM where the sprite's image data is stored and the parameters required to draw the sprite. Furthermore, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), are added to the end of the drawing list as transfer data information.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored, depending on the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S3802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order, starting with the sprite listed at the top of the drawing list, and then overwrites and expands them into the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the back of one frame of image generated by the drawing list, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foreground.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address is read out in order from character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and the image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, allowing the drawing process and display process to be performed simultaneously in parallel.

After S3702, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the voice and lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as a single device.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a command is first sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the command to be sent to the display control device 114, and then the command is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast to this, a command may first be sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and then the command is sent from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access character ROM 234, read image data from character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 may temporarily store the image data read from character ROM 234 in buffer RAM 237a, and then determine whether the destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from buffer RAM 237a to the destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236.

In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination is unused may be determined by providing the image controller 237 with a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (i.e., that it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (i.e., that it is in use), and the MPU 231 checking the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM at the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 may monitor signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and determine from the status of those signals whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 may notify the MPU 231 of this information as needed, and the MPU 231 may determine whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on that notification.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 can determine whether the scan is in a blank period by checking the drive status of the image controller 237 or by receiving a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scan status is in a blank period, it can determine that each video RAM 235, 236 is unused. In this way, the image controller 237 can determine whether it is unused by checking only the scanning status of the third pattern display device 81, making the determination easy.

In this case, if transfer data information other than null data is present at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may begin processing to read image data from character ROM 234 and transfer it to normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is specified for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of that specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table, etc. Therefore, by transferring image data in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, etc., image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, the image data stored in normal video RAM 236 can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

The process of reading image data from character ROM 234 and transferring it to normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the main display process or main process loop executed by MPU 231. This allows MPU 231 to execute the image data transfer process by utilizing the time when important processes in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt process or V interrupt process, are not being executed. Furthermore, since command interrupt process and V interrupt process are executed with priority over the main display process, MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process without affecting command interrupt process or V interrupt process.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but may manage each video RAM by assigning a different address area to each video RAM within an address system commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify to the image controller 237 which video RAM to access (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), but simply specifies an address, and the image controller 237 can determine whether the area specified by that address is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In other words, when the MPU 231 specifies to the image controller 237 the video RAM to be accessed and the address of that video RAM area, it simply specifies an address set within the common address system, thereby simplifying the structure of the command that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the information indicating the storage location of sprite data does not include the storage RAM type, but simply specifies the storage address using an address set within a common address system, thereby simplifying the configuration of the drawing list.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is described as being directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connecting the MPU 231 and image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 may also be directly connected to the image controller 237. Alternatively, a bridge circuit may be provided that converts the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

By providing this bridge circuit, it is possible to connect the character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, using the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240), which was designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM would be used as the character ROM. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or bridge circuit, it may be configured so that the character ROM 234 can be accessed directly from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is described as being configured with NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be configured with a large-capacity, inexpensive non-volatile storage means, such as a hard disk. Such large-capacity, inexpensive storage means generally have slow read speeds, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, images can be displayed without any problems at the desired time.

In the above embodiment, a NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released is stored in its first program storage area 234d1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. A first program storage area may be provided in memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can read data faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released may be stored in that area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase Change RAM) may be provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area may be provided therein to store a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released is stored in that area. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operations faster than the NAND flash memory 234a may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), a first program storage area may be provided in that memory, and a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released may be stored in that area. For example, instead of NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM) may be provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided in this area to store part of the boot program that is executed first in MPU 231 after system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) has been designated as "0000H," it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c, reads the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Alternatively, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power has been applied from the power supply device 115, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) has been designated as "0000H," it reads the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies address "0000H" on the internal bus (bus line 240) after system reset is released, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c or is in the process of being set therein. This allows the character ROM 234 to output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 specifies address "0000H." Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," allowing the MPU 231 to quickly launch the display main process. As a result, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, control of the auxiliary performance unit or third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately initiated.

Furthermore, when the ROM controller 234b detects that an address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies a control program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, it may read the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address directly from the first program memory area 234d1 and output it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). This allows the MPU 231 to receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" shortly after specifying address "0000H," thereby enabling the MPU 231 to quickly launch the display main processing. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, control of the auxiliary performance section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately initiated. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program memory area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. This reduces power consumption in the character ROM 234.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 is described as being connected to the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The resident video RAM 235 may also be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231, character ROM 234, and image controller 237. Furthermore, if the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By configuring the resident video RAM 235 to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be easily installed in the display control device 114 even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to allow direct connection of the resident video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 is described as being provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more video RAMs may be provided. Alternatively, multiple resident video RAMs may be provided, each containing resident image data corresponding to images according to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are described as being configured using single-port DRAM (one input/output port), but this is not necessarily limited to this; multi-port RAM may also be used. This allows data to be written to and read from the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 simultaneously, so that, for example, image data can be read from the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image while image data read from the character ROM 234 is written to the normal video RAM 236 in parallel. This reduces the risk of delays in the drawing process due to the writing of image data.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but this is not necessarily limited to this. A single RAM may be divided into a resident area and a normal area, with the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 stored in each area. Furthermore, when configuring a resident area and a normal area in a single RAM, it is desirable to use a multi-port RAM to prevent the input/output ports of that memory from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be set appropriately depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, it is preferable to make at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 resident in the resident video RAM 235 in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input.

In the above embodiment, a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 234 is transferred to resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all of the image data stored in character ROM 234 may also be transferred to resident video RAM 235. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in resident video RAM 235, normal video RAM 236 may be used as dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by image controller 237.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 is described as retaining its contents without being overwritten while the power is on, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a specified trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, a specified transitional image may be displayed as a transitional period while the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is being changed. Furthermore, the image data corresponding to the transitional image may be stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and may continue to be retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. Alternatively, while the transitional image is being displayed, MPU 231 may directly access character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via buffer RAM 237a while resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while image data corresponding to the transitional image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transitional image is being displayed, MPU 231 may send a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for the image data to be newly resident to image controller 237, and image controller 237 may read the image data to be resident from character ROM 234 in accordance with the transfer instruction (transfer data information), and transfer the image data via buffer RAM 237a while resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while image data corresponding to the transitional image is not being read).

Also, when updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transitional image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transitional image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, while the transitional image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the new image data to be resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Alternatively, the image controller 237, upon receiving an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, may access the character ROM 234, read the new image data to be resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transitional image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without causing the player any discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 is made resident, a RAM judgment value is stored to determine whether the data in resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is resolved. During the main display processing or main processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114 after power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is checked before starting to transfer the main image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 at power on. If the RAM judgment value is normal, this means that the image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, and the transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 may be disabled. In this case, the simple image display flag may be turned off to disable the transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235. As a result, even if a momentary power outage causes a system reset to be input to the display control device 114 and the MPU 231 to start the main display process or main process, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 can be prevented, thereby shortening the time required for power recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a, which has a slow read speed, transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 takes a long time. In contrast, by storing a RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains correctly after a momentary power outage, the time required for transferring the image data can be shortened, allowing the third symbol display device 81 to immediately display a normal effect image. This allows the player to immediately begin playing. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Additionally, instead of using this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written to a specified area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly saved.

In the above embodiment, the buffer RAM 237a is described as being provided within the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to this and it may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). Also, if the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the buffer RAM may be provided within the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, allowing for efficient transfer without being affected by the internal bus (bus line 240), which has a high volume of data signals exchanged.

In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a was described as being equivalent to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during the period (blank period) during which the third pattern display device 81 scans a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. This allows the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be carried out reliably by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period.

In the above embodiment, a single buffer RAM 237a is provided, but this is not necessarily limited to this; two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, one buffer RAM may be configured to store image data read from character ROM 234 while another buffer RAM transfers stored image data to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, one buffer RAM may be divided into two or more areas, and while one area stores image data read from character ROM 234, that image data may be transferred from another area to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of image data read from character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of image data written to the buffer RAM to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 can be processed in parallel, thereby reducing the time required for these processes.

In the above embodiment, we described a case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. However, image data corresponding to this power-on main image may also be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This allows image data to be resident from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 to be transferred while the power-on main image is displayed using image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data transfer to be completed quickly and simplifies processing.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. However, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image may also be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This allows image data to be resident from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 to be transferred while the power-on image is displayed on third pattern display device 81 using image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data transfer to be completed quickly and simplifies processing.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the power-on main image, image data corresponding to the power-on main image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. Furthermore, if the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on main image is displayed using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from resident video RAM 235 while it is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, then the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. This allows the image data transfer to be completed more quickly without going through buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, we have described a case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are being transferred, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. Furthermore, if the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on image is displayed on third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from resident video RAM 235 while it is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. This allows the image data transfer to be completed more quickly without going through buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when a player operates the frame button 22, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the Super Reach presentation mode based on the back image change command or frame button operation command. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 may grasp the gaming status of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and generate a back image change command or a gaming status command in accordance with the gaming status, for example, in conjunction with a change in the gaming status. This allows the display control device 114 to change the back image or the Super Reach presentation mode in accordance with the gaming status based on the back image change command or the gaming status command. Alternatively, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming status of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the Super Reach presentation mode in accordance with the gaming status. Then, image data corresponding to at least a portion of the changed rear image, or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed presentation mode, is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the rear image can be instantly displayed from that resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

The display control device 114 may also change the rear image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, or composite data table. In this case, image data corresponding to the changed rear image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information set forth in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table. Here, when transferring image data of the rear image according to the transfer data information set forth in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in a sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored, or the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in an area separate from the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the rear image to the original rear image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer image data corresponding to the original rear image again, thereby suppressing an increase in the processing load on the display control device 114.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the output signal from the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and if the voice lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114, causing the display control device 114 to immediately display a warning image on the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal from the vibration sensor may be input to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may send an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, if an error command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the error command and further send an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error.

On the other hand, the output signal from the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, which may then detect whether or not there is a vibration error. If a vibration error is detected, an error occurrence flag may be turned on, and an error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error may be turned on. If the display setting process (see FIG. 69) determines that the error occurrence flag is on, a warning image setting process (see FIG. 70(a)) may be executed, thereby causing a warning image to be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, there is no need to send or receive error commands from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and therefore the warning image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 more quickly.

In addition, while the above embodiment describes a case where a vibration sensor is attached to the underside of the game board 13, a magnetic sensor may be attached to the underside of the game board 13 instead of or in addition to the vibration sensor. This magnetic sensor is a sensor for detecting a magnetic field applied to the game board in order to change the flow of the ball with a magnetic field such as a magnet, thereby preventing the ball from being intentionally thrown into the ball entry hole. The output signal of the magnetic sensor may be input to any of the main control unit 110, the sound and light control unit 113, and the display control unit 114. When the output signal of the magnetic sensor is input to the main control unit 110, if the main control unit 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnetic sensor, an error command indicating a magnetic field error may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the sound and light control unit 113 or directly. Furthermore, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if the voice lamp control device 113 determines based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13, an error command notifying the magnetic field error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 may be configured to store image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81, and upon receiving an error command notifying the magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display a warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if the display control device 114 determines based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13, the display control device 113 may turn on an error occurrence flag and an error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error, thereby displaying the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice and lamp control device 113, or detects the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, it can promptly display an error message image notifying the player of the magnetic field error on the third pattern display device 81 using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, when a player applies a magnetic field to the gaming board, the third pattern display device 81 immediately notifies the player of the magnetic field error by displaying an error message image, thereby deterring the player from engaging in fraudulent behavior.

When the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of a single effect is specified by an additional data table or a display data table, the additional data table or display data table may correspond to an address representing the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and may specify the type of sprite whose color tone will be changed and color information specifying the changed color tone of the sprite for that time. If the type of sprite whose color tone will be changed and color information specifying the changed color tone of the sprite are specified at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 may create a drawing list by replacing the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d with the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the display data table. This allows the image controller 237 to draw images while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information specified in the additional data table.

Furthermore, when the drawing content required to change and display an image displayed in a single effect is specified by a display data table, the display data table may correspond to an address representing the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and may specify the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information for that sprite for that time. If the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information for that sprite are specified at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 may include the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information for that sprite in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced, among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image containing the new sprite to be displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the display data table was described as including transfer data information for image data required to draw an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table. However, the display data table may also include transfer data information for image data required to draw an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table (additional transfer data information). In this case, the additional transfer data information may be associated with identification information (such as "additional effect 1," "additional effect 2," etc.) for identifying the additionally displayable effect for each address, and may be specified together with or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the additional effect to be displayed, it may be configured to create a drawing list that includes the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect.

This allows the image controller 237 to transfer sprite image data used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, according to the drawing list, before that image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the additional effects to be displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, the necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content, so the drawing of many sprites can be specified depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a variety of effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the above embodiment, we described a case where the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a Super Reach specifies the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach that can be selected by the player in the display data table, and only the drawing content corresponding to the Super Reach selected by the player is identified. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected Super Reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it easy to identify the drawing content of the Super Reach selected by the player. Furthermore, because there is no need to specify the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach in the display data table, the data search for the display data table can be prevented from becoming too large.

In the above embodiment, the display data table contains drawing content and transfer data information. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table may specify drawing content and transfer data information, and the additional drawing content of the additional effect to be displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an additional effect to be displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to that effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. The additional data table may also specify not only the additional drawing content, but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required to draw the image according to the additional drawing content. This makes it possible to identify the drawing content of the additional effect to be displayed and the transfer data information of the image required for that drawing using the additional data table. This reduces the processing load required for this identification compared to identifying the drawing content and transfer data information from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 was described as preparing a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. It is also possible to prepare a display data table for each element of the variation effect, such as "variation start-up," "high-speed variation," "preview effect," "normal reach," or "super reach." After identifying the elements required for that variation effect according to the variation pattern indicated in the display variation pattern command, the display data tables corresponding to the forms required for the identified variation effect are combined into one to generate a final regular display data table corresponding to that variation pattern. Variation patterns such as "variation start-up," "high-speed variation," and "normal reach" often have a common display. Therefore, by breaking down the variation effects into elements in this way and preparing a display data table for each element, data tables can be efficiently maintained.

In the above embodiment, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and transfer data table to identify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by that pointer 233f, but a pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 sends a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) at which the drawing process is completed. However, the image controller 237 may also send this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds), so by sending a V interrupt signal each time one frame of image is displayed, the time interval can be maintained accurately without having to be timed.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed based on the drawing target buffer information sent from the MPU 231, and reads out the image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits it to the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The image controller 237 may alternately select the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed each time it receives a drawing list, and read out the image information previously displayed from a frame buffer other than the selected frame buffer and transmit it to the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, the image controller 237 may swap the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed and the frame buffer that outputs image information to the third pattern display device 81 each time it sends one frame of image information to the third pattern display device 81.

In the above embodiment, after a confirmed display data table corresponding to a confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, if neither a variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor a demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 before the confirmed display effect ends, a demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may also be configured to set a confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect again in the display data table buffer 233d. Furthermore, in this case, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the confirmed display effect ends, until either a variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or a demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to continue displaying a confirmed display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control unit 110.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where the demo effect changes the back image and displays a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9." However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo effect may also display a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. It may also be a case where only the back image changes without displaying the third pattern. It may also be a case where a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, and after the transfer is complete, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 may first transfer only image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, and after the transfer is complete, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then the image data to be resident, including the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image, is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. This allows the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power is turned on, allowing players, hall staff, and factory personnel during manufacturing to immediately confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has started operating without any problems upon power-on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may also monitor the completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b based on the display variable pattern command. Note that it is preferable to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to more quickly display the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and transfer data table correspond to a time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and specify the image content to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the image data information to be transferred at that time (transfer data information). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and any table may specify the display content at a predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set to match the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, i.e., the third pattern display device 81 displays 30 frames of image per second, the third pattern display device 81 will display one frame of image every 1/30 seconds, and therefore the display data table may specify the display content at 1/30 second intervals.

Furthermore, the display data table may specify the address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored as the sprite type to be drawn at each predetermined time interval, rather than specifying the sprite type itself. The display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from character ROM 234, and manages the address of character ROM 234 where image data for that sprite type is stored, in association with each sprite type. Therefore, if the display data table specifies the address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored as the display content to be displayed at each predetermined time interval, it becomes unnecessary to manage both the sprite-identifying information and the character ROM 234 address, in association with each sprite type, thereby reducing the processing burden.

In the above embodiment, a stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and information indicating whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. However, instead, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when issuing an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 may refer to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 to determine whether the predetermined image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a. If the predetermined image data is not already stored in the image storage area 236a, the MPU 231 may set an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type. Furthermore, when issuing an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 may store information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction was set in the work RAM 233, and erase the information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a where the image data of that sprite type is stored.

In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a specific sprite type from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 determines whether image data of that sprite type is stored in normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if image data of that specific sprite type is stored in normal video RAM 236, the transfer process is not executed. However, this process may also be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i may be prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in normal video RAM 236 for each sprite may be stored. Furthermore, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 may send transfer data information for that image data to the image controller 237, regardless of the storage status of the image data in the normal video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where only image data corresponding to "Back A" out of multiple back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of back images used in some super reaches may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making back images of super reaches that appear frequently or are expected to appear frequently resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the number of times the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, a transfer command for image data is defined in the transfer data table or display data table in association with the address indicated by pointer 233f, and MPU 231 controls image controller 237 to transfer the image data indicated by the transfer command from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Information regarding the sprite type required for the display data table may be written at the beginning of the display data table, and MPU 231 may control image controller 237 to transfer the required image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the beginning of the display data table. Alternatively, based on a command received from audio lamp control device 113, MPU 231 may determine the sprite type to be displayed on third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and control image controller 237 to transfer image data of that image type from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where the color tone of part of the image, back C, which is the back image of the "island stage," changes over time, but the color tone of the entire image may also change over time. Furthermore, the back image need not necessarily scroll or change over time; instead, it may be one in which an object (e.g., a person) that appears moves or changes over time.

In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 includes information on the various counters (first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning that it notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 in the reserved ball count command, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the information on the various counters (first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning may be notified to the sound lamp control unit 113 by a separate command.

In the above embodiment, when a variation effect is executed, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that they are invisible to the player. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size that is invisible to the player, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which numerous white dots are displayed randomly.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where the game board 13 is provided with one first winning slot 64, which initiates a lottery for a special jackpot when a ball enters it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The game board 13 may be provided with multiple (e.g., two) first winning slots, each of which independently detects a ball entry and initiates a lottery for a jackpot. In this case, the number of reserved balls command sent by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a reserve at each first winning slot may include information indicating which first winning slot the reserve is from. Furthermore, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when a variation is to begin may also include information indicating which first winning slot the reserve is from. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 prepares a reserved ball number counter for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the reserved ball number command is set to the reserved ball number, and when a variation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each first ball entrance.

In the above embodiment, a reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control unit 110 is updated (i.e., each time it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a reserved number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control unit 110 increases. Furthermore, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrement the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In the above embodiment, winning at the first winning slot 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Furthermore, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning at the first winning slot 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern serving as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may also be performed by displaying the pattern moving vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

Third Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 98 to 104. In this third embodiment, display control of the rotation operation unit 600 and the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment will be described.

Figure 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode when the main pattern is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotational operation unit 600. The spherical liquid crystal device 670 has a display area formed by an array of multiple pixels each 1 mm square. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in Figure 98(a) and the display area Pa shown on the third pattern display device 81 are display areas of the same size.

Figure 98 (b) is an enlarged view of display area Pa and display area Pb. Display area Pa is made up of 2 rows x 2 columns of 1.5 mm square pixels, for a total of 4 pixels. Display area Pb is made up of 3 rows x 3 columns of 1 mm square pixels, for a total of 9 pixels. In this way, the third pattern display device 81 is made up of pixels that are 1.5 times the size of the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

The spherical LCD device 670 has a display area that overlaps the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is configured to be able to display display effects that are related to each other.

Next, with reference to Figures 98 to 102, an example of a display mode in which the third pattern display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 are displayed in association with each other will be described. Figure 98(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third pattern is displayed only on the spherical liquid crystal and scrolls while being enlarged from the upper right to the lower right. When the main pattern is displayed to the edge of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the third pattern moves and is displayed at the boundary between the third pattern display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670, as shown in Figure 99(a). In this case, the same display data as the main pattern previously displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is set and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, the third pattern display device 81 is configured with a pixel size 1.5 times larger than that of the spherical LCD device 670, so the third pattern is displayed at 1.5 times the size. This makes it appear to the player as if the image is gradually enlarged and scrolled from the spherical LCD device 670 to the third pattern display device 81. This reduces the processing required to enlarge and set the main pattern, and reduces the control load on the display control device 114.

After that, as shown in Figure 99(b), the third symbol is enlarged by 1.5 times and scrolled. Furthermore, when it is scrolled within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, it is enlarged by 1.5 times and displayed variably. By configuring it in this way, even if the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the spherical liquid crystal device 670 without changing the enlargement setting, there is no change in the pixel-based enlargement rate, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Figures 100(a) and 100(b) show the state in which the image is enlarged and scrolled while being rotated within the display area of the spherical LCD device 670. In this case, too, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times each time it is moved. Figures 101(a)-(b) and 102(a) show the state in which the image is scrolled from the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 to the right and left after being rotated on the spherical LCD device 670. Again, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times each time it is moved. As shown in Figure 102(b), this is a table showing the size of the image actually displayed at the magnification ratio set for the third pattern display device 81 (main LCD) and the spherical LCD device 670 (sub LCD).

The actual size of the image set at magnification c1 on the sub-LCD differs by 1.5 times from the image set at magnification c1 on the main LCD.

In this embodiment, when scrolling within the same display device, the image is gradually enlarged at the same magnification, but this is not a limitation. The magnification may be increased at a fixed rate, and set to approximately 1.5 times (the ratio of pixel size) at the boundary between the main LCD and the sub-LCD. This configuration reduces the sense of incongruity when switching between the main LCD and the sub-LCD. The image may also be configured to scroll while shrinking from the main LCD to the sub-LCD. In this case, the image may be gradually changed at the same reduction rate or at the same rate, similar to when the image is enlarged, to match the pixel reduction rate at the time of switching. In this embodiment, the main pattern is used as an example, but this is not a limitation and other patterns, characters, letters, etc. may also be used.

The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this third embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 103. Figure 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in this third embodiment.

In this third embodiment, a sub-display data table buffer 233m, a sub-pointer 233n, and a sub-time counter 233i have been added to the second embodiment. Here, the sub-LCD is configured in the same way as the main LCD 81 so that different display modes can be displayed simultaneously with the main LCD. Therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted as it is the same as the explanation already given in the second embodiment.

Next, with reference to Figure 104, the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this third embodiment will be described. Note that in this third embodiment, only this command determination processing is changed; the other processing is the same as in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this third embodiment differs from that in the second embodiment in that the variation pattern command process (FIG. 87, S2302) within the command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302) has been changed to variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). The rest of the configuration is the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 104, the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2450) in this third embodiment adds the processing of S2519 to S2523 to the variation pattern command processing (Figure 87 (a), S2405) in the second embodiment.

If it is determined in the processing of S2513 that the effect is not a button effect (S2513: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is set to display effects using the sub-LCD (spherical LCD device 670). If it is a variation pattern that does not use the sub-LCD, the processing proceeds to S2515.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2519 that there is an effect using the sub-LCD (S2519: Yes), a display data table for the sub-LCD is set (S2520). A sub-data table determination flag corresponding to the set display data table for the sub-LCD is set to ON (S2521). Time data is set in the sub-timing counter based on the data table (S2522). The sub-pointer is initialized and set (S2523), and processing proceeds to S2515.

This configuration allows the sub-LCD and main LCD screens to display different display modes independently, providing players with a wide variety of display effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 105 to 148. In this fourth embodiment, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064, the processing order of balls that have entered the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81 are different from those in the second embodiment described above, but the other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Detailed differences between the display control of this fourth embodiment and the second embodiment include the addition of an additional winning effect and a special continuation effect (described below) to the eight reserved effect, the addition of an effect using the frame button 22 to the composite display effect, and the ability to change the time effect period (described below) in the time effect.

Figure 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 in this fourth embodiment. As shown in Figure 105, a distribution unit 1064 into which balls can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80 provided on the front of the game board 13. Balls that enter this distribution unit 1064 are configured to be alternately distributed to the first winning slot 964a or the left second winning slot 964b, which will be described later.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth embodiment is provided with two winning slots (so-called second winning slots) through which the lottery for special symbol 2 is held when a winning ball is won: a right second winning slot 640 (a second winning slot located on the lower right side of the game board 13) and a left second winning slot 964b (a second winning slot located within the allocation unit 1064).

Now, with reference to Figure 106, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064 will be described. Figures 106(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064. In practice, a cover body made of transparent resin is placed on the front side of this, and the surface of the cover body is colored with a spiral pattern to make the interior difficult to see. In addition, a decorative LED (shown) is attached to the distribution unit 1064, which emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is playing a jackpot game or a regular game, creating an effect to make the game board 13 look dazzling. The light emitted when creating such an effect is reflected by the surface of the cover body, making the interior of the distribution unit 1064 difficult to see while play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10, and making the interior of the distribution unit 1064 easily visible when play is not being performed. This configuration prevents fraudulent activity that exploits the principles of the ball distribution mechanism, and also makes it easy for store staff to visually inspect the inside of the distribution unit 1064 when no games are being played.

A pass-through opening through which game balls can enter is provided at the top of the distribution unit 1064, and a transparent ball entry sensor 1064a is disposed to detect when a game ball passes through the pass-through opening. Balls that pass through the pass-through opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first winning opening 964a located below it and the second winning opening 964b on the left.

The balls sorted by the sorting member 900 roll on the first guide member 900z1 and second guide member 900z2 erected on the sorting unit 1064, and are guided to each winning slot. By providing guide members 900z1 and 900z2 between the sorting member 900, which is configured to be rotatable left and right, and each winning slot 964a, 964b, it is possible to prevent the rotating sorting member 900 from coming into contact with each winning slot 964a, 964b. Furthermore, it is possible to make the sorting member 900 more compact.

The size of the sorting member 900 is preferably such that the storage section 900a of the sorting member 900 is large enough that two balls cannot be stored at once (the length of the wall constituting the storage section 900a is less than 5.5 mm). This configuration prevents multiple balls stored in the storage section 900a from balancing each other and impeding the rotation of the sorting member 900. Furthermore, to prevent one storage section 900a from receiving multiple game balls consecutively, a gently sloping section may be provided that temporarily receives balls that enter the sorting unit 1064 and allows them to flow down a gentle slope. Using this configuration, balls that enter the sorting unit 1064 consecutively (a string of balls) flow down the gently sloping section, creating gaps between the balls, preventing one storage section 900a from receiving balls consecutively.

The sorting member 900 is attached to a base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 1064 via a pivot support 900d so that it can rotate left and right, and is configured to receive entering game balls in storage section 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. The sorting member 900 is configured symmetrically about pivot support 900d, and is pivotally fixed so that the boundary wall between storage section 900a and storage section 900c is vertical (directly above) due to the weight of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in storage section 900a, the weight of the game ball causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, guiding the game ball toward the first winning opening 964a.

Restricting members 900y1 and 900y2 are erected within sorting unit 1064, allowing sorting member 900 to rotate approximately 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise within its rotation range. In addition, magnet 900b is provided at the boundary between storage section 900a and storage section 900b.

A magnet (base-side magnet) 901 is positioned on the center line of the passage opening on the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 1064. The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (south pole or north pole) is generated at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is positioned and fixed so that the tip faces the sorting member 900.

Like the base-side magnet 901, magnet 900b is also a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that its tip faces the base-side magnet 901. When the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between storage sections 900a and 900c is directly above, the base-side magnet 901 and magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (with their tips facing each other). Here, because the magnets are arranged with the same polarity, they repel each other, and the sorting member 900 does not stop in a position where the boundary wall faces directly above, but remains in the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b attached to the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 reaches a position on the center line of the passage opening (directly above) due to its own weight, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, causing the sorting member 900 to rotate to the left or right, with either storage section 900a or storage section 900c facing the side that receives balls entering the sorting unit 1064 (the upper side of the gaming machine). This prevents balls from coming into contact with the boundary wall between storage section 900a and storage section 900c, preventing ball jams.

Furthermore, the repulsion between magnet 900b and base-side magnet 901 prevents, for example, storage section 900a from receiving a game ball and rotating approximately 45 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball toward first winning opening 964a, and then the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (storage section 900a facing upward). As a result, after guiding a game ball toward first winning opening 964a, storage section 900c faces upward. The next ball that enters sorting unit 1064 is received by storage section 900c, and the weight of the ball causes sorting member 900 to rotate approximately 90 degrees to the right, guiding the game ball toward second winning opening 964b. In this way, sorting member 900 can alternately guide balls that enter sorting unit 1064 to first winning opening 964a and left second winning opening 964b. This allows game balls to be evenly distributed between the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, making it possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (first lottery game) resulting from a ball entering the first winning opening 964a and a lottery game (second lottery game) resulting from a ball entering the left second winning opening 964b, as described below.

Next, we will explain the operation of the sorting member 900 when a ball enters the sorting unit 1064. Figure 106(a) shows a state in which the storage section 900a of the sorting member 900 is positioned (upper side of the gaming machine) so as to face the passage opening of the sorting unit 1064. In this state, the magnet 900b is positioned to the right of the base-side magnet 901, maintaining a position where the leftward rotational force due to the weight of the sorting member 900 and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are balanced. In this state, when a ball passes through the passage opening, it is stored in the storage section 900a, and its own weight causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise, rolling on the guide section 900z1 and being guided to the first winning opening 964a. When a ball enters the first winning opening 964a, prize balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out and the first lottery game is executed.

After the balls have been distributed to the first winning opening 964a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is maintained in a position where the storage section 900c faces upward, as shown in Figure 106 (b). When the balls then pass through the passage opening, they are stored in the storage section 900c, and the game balls are distributed to the left second winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the left second winning opening 964b, prize balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out and a second lottery game is executed. Thus, balls can be distributed alternately between the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b.

The configuration of the distribution member 900 is not limited to that described above, and may be one that rotates at regular intervals using an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid. When using such a configuration, the position at which the game ball can be guided to one of the winning slots (for example, the first winning slot 964a) can be set as the origin position, and the configuration can be such that the distribution member returns to the origin position when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or when it is detected that no lottery play has been played for an extended period of time. This makes it possible to provide a fair game experience for players.

In addition, while in this embodiment the distribution member 900 distributes balls in two directions, the first winning slot 964a and the left second winning slot 964b, it may also be configured to distribute balls in three or more directions. In such cases, it is advisable to set the distribution destinations to the through gate 67, which triggers the drawing of the second symbol (normal symbol), and the general winning slot 63, which triggers the payout of prize balls. In this way, it is possible to consolidate the devices that trigger the game (draw and prize balls) of the pachinko machine 10 in one location, and it is possible to secure a large area on the game board 13 that can be used for decorations and presentations, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls when a ball enters the first winning slot 964a and the left second winning slot 964b is the same, but they may be different. Also, while the distribution member 900 is configured to distribute balls equally to each destination, the distribution ratio may be changed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is capable of storing up to eight lottery games resulting from ball entry (four first lottery games and four second lottery games) in the order in which the balls enter (details will be described later). Therefore, by configuring the balls that enter the distribution unit 1064 as described above to alternately enter the first winning slot 964a and the left second winning slot 964b, it is possible to store two lottery games evenly, preventing a situation in which only one of the lottery games is stored and the maximum number of lottery games that can be stored (eight) is not reached.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to also play the second lottery game when a ball enters the right second winning slot 640. In other words, during normal play, a left-handed play (a game in which the ball is fired at the left side of the play area provided on the game board 13) is performed, and by aiming at the distribution unit 1064, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are alternately provided. During a probability variation period or a time-saving period in which the electric device 640a is more likely to open, a right-handed play (a game in which the ball is fired at the right side of the play area provided on the game board 13) is performed, and by aiming at the right second winning slot 640, the player can always play the second lottery game.

Next, we will explain the effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. Figure 107 is a time chart for explaining the effect control related to the reserved symbol effects described below. As shown in Figure 107, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is controlled to perform multiple reserved symbol effects based on an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more, a reserved symbol effect that differs from the normal effect (the reserved symbol effect that occurs when the number of reserved balls is below the predetermined number) is displayed. Details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later, but by displaying a special effect when the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number or more, players are encouraged to continue playing until the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number or the upper limit in order to see the special effect.

First, we will explain the increase and decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in Figure 107. The number of reserved balls refers to the number of stored information related to the lottery game that is triggered by a ball entering the first winning slot 964a or the left second winning slot 964b, and in this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to eight (four for the first lottery game and four for the second lottery game). As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is equipped with two second winning slots, but this explanation will use the game state during left-hand play, when the number of reserved balls is likely to reach eight. Therefore, of the two second winning slots, the left second winning slot 964b will be used for the explanation.

The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined period of time (variation time) for displaying the result of the lottery game (jackpot or loss) in a distinguishable manner. This variation time is used to provide the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game (for example, a dynamic display (variation display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81), thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, the above-mentioned variation time is set in multiple ways depending on the result of the lottery game; for example, it is set to 5 seconds if the result of the lottery game is a loss, 30 seconds if the result is a miss, and 60 seconds if the result is a jackpot. This is intended to encourage the player to decide whether the result of the lottery game currently being played is a jackpot, and the longer the variation time, the longer the effect can be played.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is designed so that multiple of the above-mentioned lottery games cannot be played simultaneously, and has a function (reservation function) that stores the lottery game triggered by a ball that enters the first winning slot 964a or the left second winning slot 964b while one lottery game is being played so that it can be played after the currently played lottery game has ended. The number of these stored lottery games is the number of reserved balls.

In other words, the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in Figure 107 occurs when a ball enters the first winning slot 964a, the left second winning slot 965b, or the right second winning slot 640 during the lottery game, and decreases when the lottery game ends and a new lottery game begins, with the maximum number of reserved balls being 8. This number of reserved balls is displayed using reserved patterns in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 108 (b)), and a reserved pattern effect (details described below) is performed that changes the display mode of the reserved patterns based on information about the lottery game results (win/lose determination results) that are individually stored.

Period A shown in Figure 107 represents the period until the number of reserved balls reaches 8, and during this period, a normal reserved effect is displayed as the reserved symbol effect. Note that the normal reserved effect is the same as that described in the second embodiment above, so its description will be omitted.

Next, when the number of reserved balls reaches eight, the 8 reserved balls effect is performed (period B begins). This 8 reserved balls effect is a reserved symbol effect that uses the eight reserved symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds (see Figure 110). Period B is the period from when the 8 reserved balls effect starts until when the 8 reserved balls effect ends (the point at which the last lottery game for the reserved balls used in the 8 reserved balls effect starts). In other words, period B continues from when the number of reserved balls reaches eight until the eighth lottery game starts.

If the number of reserved balls increases during period B (a new lottery game is stored), an additional winning effect is produced. An additional winning effect is a reserved symbol effect that is produced when a new lottery game is stored (an additional winning effect) while a reserved symbol effect using multiple reserved symbols, such as an 8-reserved symbol effect, is being performed. Unlike a normal reserved symbol effect, this effect changes the reserved symbols to make it appear as if a reserved symbol effect using multiple reserved symbols is being performed continuously (see Figure 111 (b)). By producing this additional winning effect, players will experience a different reserved symbol effect from the normal one, and will continue playing even while the 8-reserved symbol effect is being performed. This increases the player's motivation to play, and has the effect of reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, if there are five or more reserved balls at the end of period B, a special continuation effect is performed using all of the reserved symbols displayed at that time (start of period C). In other words, the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect that is only performed if at least five or more new lottery games are stored during period B. Because the start conditions for this special continuation effect are more difficult than the eight-reserved symbol effect described above, the reserved symbol effect provided is also an effect that is valuable to the player. Examples of valuable effects include always displaying a premium effect that is only displayed in a small percentage of cases where the result of the lottery game is a jackpot, or displaying information that can award a large amount of the points that the player has accumulated regardless of the result of the lottery game. Period C is the period from when the special continuation effect starts to when the special continuation effect ends (when the last lottery game to be played using the reserved balls used in the special continuation effect starts). Note that additional winning effects are also executed during period C.

When period C, during which the special continuation effect is performed, ends, the game transitions again to period A. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment performs a multiple reserved symbol effect (8 reserved symbol effect) using the multiple reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, provided that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (8). Then, at the time this multiple reserved symbol effect ends, if the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (5), a second multiple reserved symbol effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the multiple reserved symbols displayed at that time. Furthermore, for any newly generated reserved symbols while a multiple reserved symbol effect using multiple reserved symbols is being performed, an additional winning effect different from the normal reserved symbol effect is performed.

By configuring it in this way, players can be encouraged to play so that a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are always displayed.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained with reference to Figures 108 to 112. Figure 108(a) is a diagram showing the area division settings and valid line settings of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the reserved patterns corresponding to winning in the first winning slot 964 (special pattern 1 reserved patterns) and the reserved patterns corresponding to winning in the left second winning slot 964b (special pattern 2 reserved patterns) are displayed in the secondary display area Ds (maximum of eight) in winning order from the left of the screen. Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, when playing from the left, the special pattern 1 reserved patterns and the special pattern 2 reserved patterns are displayed alternately.

In this embodiment, the special reserved symbol 1 and the special reserved symbol 2 are displayed in an indistinguishable manner, but they may also be displayed in a distinguishable manner. Furthermore, the reserved symbol that was displayed in correspondence with the special symbol being displayed in the main display region Dm may be displayed separately in a predetermined location in the secondary display region Ds. This configuration allows the player to understand which reserved symbol, the special reserved symbol 1 or the special reserved symbol 2, is being used in the game (or will be used), which increases interest in the progress of the game. Other aspects are configured in the same way as in the second embodiment described above, so a description will be omitted.

Figure 108(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. In Figure 108(b), seven reserved symbols are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. In this embodiment, as described above, reserved memories for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are stored alternately, but they are indistinguishable from the display of reserved symbols. By displaying reserved symbols in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether the lottery game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner is based on special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the player can play while anticipating what kind of bonus will be offered if they hit the jackpot.

The displayed reserved pattern may be displayed so that it can be distinguished between reserved memory for special pattern 1 and reserved memory for special pattern 2. It may also be displayed so that it can be distinguished whether the currently changing lottery game is based on special pattern 1 or special pattern 2. By configuring it in this way, players can be made aware of the bonuses they will receive in the event of a jackpot, and can build anticipation for the changing performance.

Figure 109 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a normal hold effect during period A in Figure 107. In Figure 109(a), the fourth reserved symbol from the left is displayed as a "push" symbol (announcement reserved symbol), and when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, it is displayed as a "△" symbol shown in Figure 109(b). Details are omitted here, as they are the same as in the second embodiment described above. In this embodiment, the variable display content of the reserved symbol ("△" symbol) is determined based on the results of a lottery game corresponding to the variably displayed reserved symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and it may also be determined based on the results of a lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed before and after the variably displayed reserved symbol. In such a case, it is preferable to use an "arrow" symbol or other display content that gives the player hope that there is a chance near the variably displayed reserved symbol.

Also, a reserved symbol that has been variably displayed may be configured to be variably displayed again after a period of time. By doing this, even if the content of the variably displayed symbol is not promising, there is a possibility that it may be variably displayed again and become promising, which can give the player hope until the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol is executed.

Figure 110 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing the eight-reserved symbol presentation during period B in Figure 107. Figure 110(a) shows the state in which the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 have been changed to notification reserved symbols. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the notification reserved symbols are changed in order, starting with the notification reserved symbol displayed on the left (see Figure 110(b)). Details are the same as in the second embodiment described above, and will be omitted here. In this embodiment, the notification reserved symbols are changed in order from left to right each time the frame button 22 is pressed. However, multiple notification reserved symbols may be changed when the frame button is pressed once, or the order in which they are displayed may be set randomly. This makes it possible to add a game-like element to the player's operation (pressing the frame button 22) to change the notification reserved symbols.

Figure 111 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing the eight reserved effect and additional effect during period B in Figure 107. Figure 111(a) shows the state after all of the notification reserved patterns displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 have been changed by operating the frame button 22. In this embodiment, when a notification is made to confirm that there is a reserved memory among the eight reserved memories whose hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot, the eight reserved patterns are set to be displayed as "Jackpot!!!!", and the "Jackpot!!!?" display shown in this figure is intended to notify that there may be a reserved memory among the eight reserved memories whose hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot.

Figure 111(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a state in which three reserved memories have been consumed and two new reserved memories have been added from the state of Figure 111(a). As shown, in Figure 111(a), "Jackpot!!!?" was displayed using eight reserved symbols, but because three reserved memories have been consumed, the reserved symbols ("Jackpot") that were displayed corresponding to the consumed reserved memories have disappeared from the display screen. In addition, the reserved symbols that were displayed corresponding to the two newly generated reserved memories during this time are displayed in the two sub-display areas Ds as notification reserved symbols.

In this way, for new reserved memories that occur while the reserved symbol presentation based on the eight reserved symbol presentation is being performed, instead of the usual reserved symbol presentation, an additional winning presentation is performed to make it appear as if the eight reserved symbol presentation is continuing. Specifically, a notification reserved symbol ("push" symbol) is displayed as the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved memory (see FIG. 111(b)). As with the eight reserved symbol presentation described above, the display mode of this notification reserved symbol changes depending on the operation of the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, if one of two newly stored reserved memories has a hit/miss judgment result of a jackpot, changing the notification reserved symbol corresponding to that reserved memory by operating the frame button 22 changes the last "?" in the string of characters "Jackpot!!!?" displayed in the eight reserved symbol presentation (see FIG. 111(a)) to "!", and the notification reserved symbol itself also changes to "!". Additionally, if the result of the hit/miss judgment for both of the newly stored reserved balls is a miss, the notification reserved symbol is changed to "?" without changing the string of characters "Jackpot!!!?" displayed in the 8 reserved balls effect. In this way, the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved memory that occurs during the 8 reserved balls effect can also be associated with the 8 reserved balls effect, allowing the player to continue firing game balls in an attempt to generate more reserved balls while the 8 reserved balls effect is being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the win/loss judgment is indicated by the notification mode ("?" or "!") of the rightmost character (the character corresponding to the reserved symbol that will be consumed last) of the string of characters displayed in the 8 reserved symbol presentation. Therefore, in the additional winning symbol presentation, a single character is changed using a reserved symbol that corresponds to one reserved memory. However, if the 8 reserved symbol presentation uses multiple characters to indicate the result of the win/loss judgment, multiple characters may be changed using a reserved symbol that corresponds to one reserved memory in the additional winning symbol presentation, or multiple characters may be changed using reserved symbols that correspond to multiple reserved memories.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed to a display mode that displays a string of eight characters using the 8 reserved symbols effect, that is, a variable display that changes to a number of characters corresponding to the number of reserved symbols, but this is not limited to this, and the 8 reserved symbols effect may also be changed to combine multiple reserved symbols to form a single notification mode.

In addition, in the eight reserved symbols presentation of this embodiment, the notification mode suggesting the result of the win/loss judgment is displayed using characters corresponding to the reserved symbol that will be consumed last out of the eight reserved symbols. However, instead of the reserved symbol that will be consumed last, the notification mode may also be displayed using all or any of the characters on the right side of the string of characters displayed by the eight reserved symbols presentation (characters corresponding to the reserved symbol that will be consumed last out of the eight reserved symbols).

Figure 112 illustrates an example display screen showing the special continuation effect during period C in Figure 107. Figure 112(a) shows the state in which the reserved symbol corresponding to the last of the eight reserved symbols used in the eight reserved symbols effect has been consumed. In other words, the five "?" symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed by the additional winning effect described above. In this state, if there are five or more reserved symbols, the display screen of the third symbol display device displays "Press it!!" When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the appearance of the reserved symbol displayed as "???????" changes again. Specifically, for example, if the judgment result for any of the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols displayed as "??????" in Figure 112(a) is a jackpot, the five characters "Congratulations" are displayed as shown in Figure 112(b). In this way, if the number of reserved memories (number of displayed reserved symbols) at the time when the display of reserved symbols using the 8 reserved symbol effect has finished is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (five in this embodiment), an additional special reserved symbol effect is performed, which makes it possible to encourage the player to continue firing game balls.

In this embodiment, the special continuation effect is performed using multiple reserved symbols displayed as "?" in the additional winning effect, so it is advisable to, for example, set the percentage of times that the characters indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed in the additional winning effect to be displayed low, and set the percentage of times that the characters indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed in the special continuation effect to be displayed high. By doing this, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the reserved and stored hit/miss determination results include a determination result that will result in a jackpot (see Figure 112 (b)) in the special continuation effect that is performed after the additional winning effect, thereby increasing the player's desire to watch the special continuation effect.

In addition, in the special continuation effect, in addition to the text string (message) based on the result of the pending stored win/loss judgment, it is also possible to provide an effect that displays information to help the player acquire a large number of points that they have saved, or to provide a bonus such as displaying the current game status (probable win or normal). By doing this, it is possible to encourage the player to continue firing game balls in order to receive bonuses other than the win/loss judgment result.

If, at the timing when it is determined whether or not to perform a special continuation effect (the boundary between Period B and Period C in Figure 107), there are more reserved memories than the number required to perform a special continuation effect (five in this embodiment), the reserved symbols corresponding to the surplus reserved memories can be changed to highlighted characters (such as "!" or "Congratulations") that emphasize the string of characters changed by the special continuation effect ("Congratulations"). By doing this, even if the number of surplus reserved memories is indefinite, it is possible to perform an effect that does not change the content displayed by the special continuation effect and that does not cause any sense of incongruity.

In addition, when a special continuation effect is performed, the reserved symbol displayed as "????" may be temporarily changed to a notification reserved symbol before the effect is performed. This makes it possible to emphasize that the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect using multiple reserved symbols.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned additional winning effect is performed even while the special continuation effect is being performed, but the content of the effect is the same as that described above, so it will be omitted.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the normal reserved symbols are changed to notification reserved symbols that prompt the player to operate the frame button 22. The notification reserved symbols are then changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. A reserved symbol (result display reserved symbol) that makes up a single meaning is displayed using multiple reserved symbols based on the win/lose determination results contained in the eight reserved memories. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the characters displayed by changing the notification reserved symbol (such as "big," "win," or "no") may be displayed in a separate location on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring it in this way, the string displayed as a result of the eight reserved symbol effect can be maintained even if the reserved symbols used in the eight reserved symbol effect are consumed as the game progresses. In this case, it is recommended that the string displayed in a separate location be erased when all of the reserved symbols used in the eight reserved symbol effect are consumed.

Furthermore, when the dynamic display of the third symbol is paused during the variable time and then restarted (so-called pseudo consecutive display or development into a super reach), the reserved symbol that has already become the result display reserved symbol by operating the frame button 22 can be changed to the notification reserved symbol, and the eight reserved symbol display can be performed again. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to perform a reserved symbol display that corresponds to the dynamic display display of the third symbol, which makes one lottery game look like multiple lottery games.

In this way, when redoing the reserved symbol presentation in conjunction with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display content of the initial result display reserved symbol can be set to an presentation with a low probability of winning compared to the hit/miss determination results contained in the eight reserved memories, and the reserved symbol display corresponding to the hit/miss determination results can be displayed in the replay of the eight reserved symbol presentation, or the display content of the result display reserved symbol displayed in the replay of the eight reserved symbol presentation can be set in advance to have a higher probability of winning than the display content of the initial result display reserved symbol. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the display content changes to a lower probability of winning compared to the original reserved symbol presentation as a result of redoing the reserved symbol presentation.

The eight reserved symbols may also be used to display text such as "Back in Action!!!" or "One More Time!!" suggesting that the third symbol will restart. This makes it possible to use the reserved symbols to inform the player of game content other than the win/loss determination results contained in the eight reserved memories, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with rich playability.

Furthermore, based on one or a combination of two or more of the results of the win/loss determination contained in the eight reserved memories, the lottery result for the third symbol being dynamically displayed at that time, and the determination result as to whether or not there will be an effect in which the third symbol being dynamically displayed at that time will be restarted, the possibility of providing an advantageous state to the player may be displayed in abstract text such as "Chance!!!!" or "Marine-chan!". In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with even greater playability.

In this embodiment, the condition for the "8 reserved items" effect is when eight reserved items have been accumulated, but any predetermined number can be accumulated, and it can also be seven.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved pattern is changed to an informing reserved pattern to indicate the reserved pattern that changes due to the reserved pattern presentation and to notify the player to operate the frame button 22, but this may also be done by displaying the reserved pattern in a different way without changing the display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notification pending symbol is always displayed in the same manner ("push" symbol) regardless of the stored win/loss judgment result, and the display manner of the result display pending symbol ("Jackpot!!!!") that is displayed by operating the frame button 22 is changed based on the stored win/loss judgment result. This allows the player to see the effect that suggests the stored win/loss judgment result only by operating the frame button 22, which encourages players to actively participate in the game and prevents them from becoming bored early. Note that multiple notification pending symbols may be provided based on the stored win/loss judgment result. In this way, it is possible to easily provide multiple levels of expectation by combining the display manner of the notification pending symbol and the display manner of the result display pending symbol.

Next, using Figures 113 to 117, the composite display effects described above in the second embodiment will be explained in detail. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the second embodiment will be omitted. Figure 113 is a time chart for explaining the flow of the composite display effects. A series of flows regarding the variable display that uses the composite display effects will be explained with reference to Figure 113.

First, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol began to change on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a frame button effect preparation period (e.g., 10 seconds) begins, and the player is notified that an effect requiring the operation of the frame buttons 22 will begin (see FIG. 114(a)). Then, after the third symbol enters a reach display mode, a frame button operation valid period (e.g., 10 seconds) begins, and a display prompting the player to operate the frame buttons 22 is displayed, and a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) within the frame button operation valid period is detected (see FIG. 114(b)). After the frame button operation valid period has elapsed, if a frame button operation meeting predetermined conditions is performed within the frame button operation valid period, the effect transitions to a PUSH effect, which is a composite display effect (see FIG. 115(b)).

On the other hand, if the frame button operation that meets the specified conditions is not performed within the frame button operation valid period, the game will transition to the normal performance period in which the normal super reach performance is performed (see Figure 115 (c)). Also, if the current change is a reach miss, regardless of the content of the frame button operation within the frame button operation valid period, the game will not transition to the composite display performance, and the third symbol will stop in a miss mode.

The PUSH effect is divided into a first half (period shown in Figure 113(d)) and a second half (period shown in Figure 113(e)). In the first half, a game is played in which the "push" symbols displayed on the display screen are collected (Figure 116(a)). In the second half, composite "push" symbols corresponding to the collected "push" symbols are displayed (Figure 116(b)). The "push" symbols are changed into number symbols by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. The combination of number symbols displayed on the display screen is then temporarily stopped, and the symbols are confirmed after a predetermined time has passed.

As shown in Figure 113, the composite display effect in this embodiment has the same change time as other specified super reach effects. Furthermore, the image data from the start of the change of the third symbol to the development of the super reach (image data used during the periods of Figures 113(a) and (b)) and the image data from when the change of the third symbol is temporarily stopped to when it is confirmed (image data used during the period of Figure 113(f)) are configured to be reusable from the image data of other specified super reach effects. In this way, there is no need to prepare image data used from the start of change to when the symbol is confirmed for each super reach effect, making it possible to reduce the amount of image data. Furthermore, the image data used during the periods of (a), (b), and (f) shown in Figure 113 can also be used to perform reach-miss effects.

Figure 114 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the period (a) shown in Figure 113. This display screen is displayed during the frame button effect preparation period, which notifies the player in advance that an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 will be performed, and is displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the frame button 22.

Figure 114 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen for the period (b) shown in Figure 113. This display screen is displayed during the frame button operation valid period during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid, and displays a message urging the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22, as well as a status display ("1/50") indicating the rapid press mission achievement condition of "50" and the current number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed, "1." Note that this embodiment has a function that allows the number of presses to be increased by continuing to press the frame button 22 for a predetermined period of time. Note that the remaining time of the frame button operation valid period (rapid press mission period) may also be displayed.

Figure 115 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the period (c) shown in Figure 113. This display screen is displayed during the normal performance period to which the game transitions if the rapid-fire mission is not completed during the valid frame button operation period, and its content is the same as that of Figure 43 (a) in the second embodiment described above, so its explanation will be omitted.

Figure 115(b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the period (d) shown in Figure 113. The display content of this display screen is the same as that of Figure 43(b) in the second embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Although not shown, values based on the "push" symbols acquired during this period (e.g., 15 seconds) (number of acquired symbols, acquired points, and expected jackpot value) are displayed in color and text in a designated area of the display screen.

Figure 116 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen for the latter half of the period shown in Figure 113 (d). The display content of this display screen is the same as that shown in Figure 44 (a) of the second embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this diagram, six "push" symbols are displayed, but the number of "push" symbols displayed varies depending on the stopping pattern of the symbol row. In this way, the number of "push" symbols displayed indicates the likelihood of a jackpot in this variable display, and it is preset so that the greater the number of "push" symbols displayed, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, there are multiple variable patterns that create composite display effects with different numbers of "push" symbols displayed, and the variable patterns with a greater number of "push" symbols displayed are set so that the probability of the winning/losing result being a jackpot is higher in variable patterns with a greater number of "push" symbols displayed than in variable patterns with a smaller number of "push" symbols displayed.

Figure 116(b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the period (e) shown in Figure 113. The display content of this display screen is the same as that shown in Figure 44(b) in the second embodiment described above, so further explanation will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the blank symbol changes to a "push" symbol and the "push" symbol is compositely displayed. However, the blank symbol may also be transformed into various characters and a message (message) corresponding to the characters compositely displayed. This configuration allows the player to predict the composite message that will be displayed by combining the displayed characters when the blank symbol changes into various characters, building anticipation for the game that follows. When using this configuration, it is preferable to compositely display a message using only a portion of the displayed characters, rather than using all of the various characters displayed. This allows the player to predict various patterns of message. Furthermore, by making the appearance (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used different from the other characters so that the characters that are always used can be identified, the player can be given a hint as to the message that will be created in the composite message, making it more enjoyable to predict the message that will be created in the composite message.

Figure 117 is the display screen for the period (f) shown in Figure 113. On this display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the composite display symbols stop at the third symbol (main symbol) combination that indicates the result of the win/loss judgment. In this figure, the symbols stop at the combination "777," which indicates that the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and are displayed as confirmed after a predetermined time has passed. During the period (f) shown in Figure 113, the symbols are displayed in a temporary stopped state (slightly wobbly) at "777," and come to a complete stop at the end of the period (f) shown in Figure 113.

As explained above, this embodiment has two variation patterns with the same variation time: one that produces a push effect and one that does not produce a push effect (a normal super reach variation pattern). Based on the results of determining the conditions for completing the rapid-fire mission, the variation pattern is set to either one that produces a push effect or one that does not produce a push effect. In other words, because the variation pattern includes a push effect, it is easy to change the subsequent effect depending on the result of the rapid-fire mission. Furthermore, because players who want to experience the push effect need to complete the rapid-fire mission, this encourages players to actively participate in the game, increasing their motivation to play.

Next, the time presentation described above in the second embodiment will be explained in detail using Figures 118 to 121. Explanations of parts that overlap with the second embodiment will be omitted. This embodiment has a function that makes it possible to set the period for which the time presentation is performed. By providing this function, it is possible to perform the conventional time presentation (synchronized presentation) that creates a sense of unity by synchronizing the presentations executed on multiple pachinko machines 10, while intentionally varying (extending) the period for which the time presentation (synchronized presentation) is performed, thereby providing players with a surprising presentation.

Figure 118 is a time chart to explain the flow of time-based effects. We will explain the flow of time-based effects with reference to Figure 118.

This embodiment has a function that allows the user to set the period during which the timed effect is performed (details will be described later). In Figure 118(a), the first timed effect after power-on is performed for 5 minutes, while in Figure 118(b), the first timed effect after power-on is set to be performed for 8 minutes. Furthermore, the 8-minute timed effect shown in Figure 118(b) is divided into the first 5 minutes and the remaining 3 minutes, with the first 5 minutes set as effect mode B, which is the timed effect period, and the remaining 3 minutes set as effect mode D, which is the special timed effect period. By setting it in this manner, it is possible to perform the effect using the same timed effect period (effect mode B) for the first 5 minutes of the timed effect, whether the timed effect period is 5 minutes or 8 minutes. Then, when effect mode B ends (when 5 minutes of the timed effect have elapsed), a teasing effect is displayed to determine whether to transition to effect mode C or effect mode D, and if the transition conditions are met, the effect is controlled to transition to effect mode C or effect mode D.

In the time presentation of the second embodiment described above, the condition for not transitioning from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, which is the normal play period, i.e., the condition for transitioning to presentation mode C, is that the win/loss determination result contains a jackpot determination result in the pending memory at the end of presentation mode B. This means that extremely few gaming machines executing presentation mode B will transition to presentation mode D, and the transition to presentation mode C itself is an indication that a jackpot has been found in the pending memory, which causes players to lose interest in the variable display of the third symbol.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in addition to the technology described in the second embodiment above, a condition for transitioning to presentation mode D is added as a condition for not transitioning from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, which is the normal play period, i.e., the period during which the time presentation is performed is set to 8 minutes in advance. This increases the number of gaming machines that transition from presentation mode B to a mode other than presentation mode A. Furthermore, by unifying the content of the presentation between presentation mode C and presentation mode D, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation that a jackpot is about to occur when transitioning from presentation mode B to a presentation mode other than presentation mode A (C or D).

Figure 119(a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in Figure 118, showing the state after two minutes have passed since the time effect began. The "180 seconds remaining" displayed in the upper right corner of this screen is the number of seconds remaining until five minutes have passed since the time effect began. In other words, the same display will be shown whether five minutes or eight minutes is selected as the time effect period. The rest of the content is the same as Figure 46 of the second embodiment described above, so explanation will be omitted.

Figure 119(b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in Figure 118, showing the state after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the start of the time effect (3 seconds remaining). Note that whether 5 minutes or 8 minutes is selected as the time effect period, the display will be the same as Figure 46(b) in the second embodiment described above, and therefore a description of the display content will be omitted.

Figure 120(a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen at the end of the time effect period shown in Figure 118, showing the state five minutes have passed since the time effect period began. Note that whether five minutes or eight minutes is selected as the time effect period, the display will be the same as Figure 47(a) in the second embodiment described above, and therefore a description of the display content will be omitted.

Figure 120(b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time extension period or special extension period shown in Figure 118. During the time extension period, Super School of Fish Time continues until the variable display that indicates a jackpot ends, and during the special extension period, Super School of Fish Time continues for three minutes. Therefore, if the remaining number of seconds were displayed, the player would easily know whether the current Super School of Fish Time is during the time extension period or the special extension period, so the top right of this screen displays "? seconds remaining." By displaying it in this manner, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player that a jackpot may occur each time a variable display that occurs during Super School of Fish Time is displayed. Note that the other display contents are the same as those in Figure 47(b) of the second embodiment described above, so a description of the display contents will be omitted.

Figure 121 is a diagram illustrating the display screen when the timed effect period shown in Figure 118 ends or the special extended effect period ends, and the pending or changing special symbols stored at that time do not result in a jackpot. In this way, the image displayed when Super School of Fish Time ends is the same regardless of whether the timed effect period or the special extended effect period ends, making it possible to reduce the amount of image data required. Note that the display content is the same as Figure 48 in the second embodiment described above, so a description of the display content will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the time presentation is designed to keep the player hopeful until the very end during the time presentation period (presentation mode B), without any presentation suggesting that the game will transition to presentation mode C or presentation mode D at the end of the time presentation period. However, if a win/loss determination is made based on the information reserved and stored just before the end of the time presentation period, and the result of the determination indicates that there is a reserved memory of a jackpot, in other words, if it is determined that the game will transition to the time presentation extension period (presentation mode C) after the end of the time presentation period and result in a jackpot, a presentation may be provided that suggests this.

Also, if a time presentation of 5 minutes or more has been set in advance, that is, if a transition to a special extended presentation period (presentation mode D) occurs after the end of the time presentation period, a presentation suggesting this may be provided. In this case, the content of the suggestive presentation should suggest that the presentation will continue for 5 minutes or more, and preferably the suggestion should not make it clear whether the transition will be to presentation mode C or presentation mode D. To achieve this, the timing for executing the suggestive presentation should be just before the end of the time presentation period, that is, when the timing for the third symbol fluctuation, which corresponds to the pending memory of a jackpot as a result of the hit/miss determination, stops after the time presentation period has elapsed (for example, if the jackpot fluctuation time is 1 minute, when the remaining time in the time presentation period is within 59 seconds).

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 122 to 125. The pachinko machine 10 of this fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment in terms of electrical configuration in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110, part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound and lamp control device 113, and part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 have been changed (added), and it is clearly indicated that an RTC 292 is connected to the sound and lamp control device 113; otherwise, the two are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 122. Figure 122 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

This block diagram differs from the block diagram (Figure 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that it clearly indicates that an RTC 292 is connected to the sound and lamp control device 113; otherwise, the two are identical and will not be described again. As described above, this RTC 292 is used as a timing device for producing time effects.

Other changes include changes (additions) to ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110, parts of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice and lamp control device 113, and parts of ROM 234 in the display control device 114; these will be described later with reference to Figures 123 to 148. As other parts are the same, the same reference numerals will be used and their description will be omitted.

Referring to Figure 123, the contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 of this embodiment will be described. Figure 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and Figure 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of RAM 203 in the main control unit 110.

The ROM 202 in this embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment, so its description will be omitted.

In addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 in this embodiment also includes at least a change execution flag 203i and a change order storage area 203j.

The change execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether a change is being executed on special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. This change execution flag 203i is set in the change execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in special symbol change process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). It is then referenced in special symbol change process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) to determine whether a change is being executed (see S4005 and S4010 in FIG. 126), and is set to off when the change execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) is executed (see S4101 in FIG. 127).

The variable order storage area 203j stores the winning order for each reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This variable order storage area 203j has eight storage areas, and winning data is stored in the previous storage area in the order in which it was won. The storage areas are also shifted based on the start of special symbol fluctuation. This variable order storage area j stores the winning order in the start winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). It is then referenced in the fluctuation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figure 124. In addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above, the ROM 222 in this embodiment has at least a performance time selection table 222b (see Figure 124(a)). In addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in this embodiment has at least a special continuation performance flag 223t, an additional performance flag 223u, an 8-performance counter 223v, a special continuation performance counter 223w, an identification number memory area 223x, a performance time memory area 223y, and a startup flag 223α (see Figure 124(b)).

The effect time selection table 222b is a table that is referenced when selecting the period during which a synchronous effect (time effect) will be performed, and is used in the effect time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b contains multiple pieces of data for different periods (time effect periods) during which a synchronous effect (time effect) will be performed, and is configured so that a different time effect period can be selected by selecting the time effect period corresponding to the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, by assigning the same identification number to adjacent gaming machines, it is possible to start the synchronous effect at the same time.

In this embodiment, by selecting a predetermined time presentation period from among the multiple time presentation periods contained in the presentation time selection table 222b based on the assigned identification number, it is possible to execute synchronized presentations at the same timing on multiple pachinko machines 10, creating a presentation with a sense of unity, or to intentionally vary the timing at which synchronized presentations are executed on only some of the multiple pachinko machines 10, creating a presentation with an element of surprise.

The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when the conditions for performing a special continuation effect are met during the eight-effect setting process (S4806 in FIG. 143). It is turned off when the value of the special continuation effect counter, described below, reaches 0 (S4809 in FIG. 143). When this special continuation effect flag is turned on, a special continuation effect is performed on the reserved symbols (S4605 in FIG. 136).

The additional effect flag 223u is turned on (S4802 in FIG. 143) when the conditions for performing an additional effect are met during the 8-effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143). It is turned off when the value of the 8-effect counter described below reaches 0 and the number of reserved symbols stored is 4 or less, or when the value of the special continuation effect counter reaches 0 (S4810, S4812 in FIG. 143). When this additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed on the reserved symbols (S4607 in FIG. 136).

When the 8-piece effect flag 223i is turned on, the 8-piece effect counter 223v is set to a counter value of 8 (S1553 in FIG. 139). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the counter value is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). This 8-piece effect counter 223v determines the period during which the 8-piece effect is performed, and in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 8, and when a new fluctuation starts, the value is decremented by 1. By determining that the counter value has reached 0, it is possible to determine whether all of the reserved symbols (8 symbols) corresponding to the 8-piece effect have been consumed.

In this embodiment, eight reserved symbols are used to create the effect (eight-symbol effect), but if you want to create the effect using a number other than eight reserved symbols (for example, seven), simply set the value of this counter to 7.

When the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on during the eight-effect setting process, the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to a counter value of 5 (S4807 in FIG. 143). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on during the fluctuation display setting process 2, the counter value is decremented by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). This special continuation effect counter 223w determines the period during which the special continuation effect is performed, and in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 5, and when a new fluctuation starts, the value is decremented by 1. By determining that the counter value has reached 0, it is possible to determine whether all of the reserved symbols (5) corresponding to the special continuation effect have been consumed.

In this embodiment, five reserved symbols are used to create the effect (special continuation effect), but if you want to create the effect (special continuation effect) using reserved symbols other than five (for example, six), you can simply set the value of this counter to 6.

The identification number storage area 223x stores (S4506 in FIG. 135) the identification number entered during the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134). The identification number stored during startup process 2 is then cleared (S1209 in FIG. 131). This identification number storage area 223x is used to store the identification number entered by the operator during the identification number input process to set the period (time) during which the time effect (synchronized effect) using the RTC 292 will be performed. Note that if the operator does not enter an identification number, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x during the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S1210 in FIG. 131) will be used.

In this embodiment, an identification number can be assigned to each gaming machine by performing a specific operation on the frame button 22 for a specific period of time after power-on. Then, by reading the performance time (the time during which the synchronous performance is performed) corresponding to the assigned identification number from the performance time selection table 222b stored in ROM 222, it is possible to set the period during which the time performance (synchronous performance) using the RTC 292 is performed.

When reading the performance time from the performance time selection table 222b, it is advisable to read it based on two parameters: the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x, and the time data (date, day of the week, etc.) obtained from the RTC 292. By doing this, even if the identification number is the same, the period during which the synchronized performance is performed can be changed by changing the date, making it possible to reduce the work of assigning identification numbers.

The performance time memory area 223y stores the performance time selected in the performance time setting process (S4905 in FIG. 145). The performance time stored in startup process 2 is then cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). This performance time memory area 223y is used to store the performance time, which is the period during which a synchronous performance based on the RTC 292 is performed, and the synchronous performance (time performance) will be performed based on the performance time stored in this memory area.

The startup flag 223α is set to ON by the time setting process 2 executed in the voice lamp control device startup process 2 (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, the identification number input process sets the startup flag to OFF when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has passed since the startup flag was set to ON, or when an identification number input operation is performed (S4504 in FIG. 135). This startup flag 223α is used to perform a process (identification number input process) that allows operation only for a predetermined time after the gaming machine's power is turned on, and allows an identification number to be entered only when the startup flag 223α is ON.

Next, referring to Figure 125, we will explain the performance time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 in the audio and lamp control device 113. Figure 125(a) is a schematic diagram of the performance time selection table 222b, and Figure 125(b) is a schematic diagram of a timetable of performance times selected by the performance time selection table 222b.

The performance time selection table 222b is used to set specific performance time data from among multiple performance time data stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, specific performance time data is set using parameters including an identification number that can be set by the operator and day of the week data, which is time information obtained from the RTC 292.

In addition, the day of the week data has items for Event 1 and Event 2, separate from the days of the week (Sunday to Saturday). These are items for special days such as holidays and anniversaries. For dates that fall under Event 1 or Event 2, the Event item is set to take priority over the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday) item.

Next, the timetable for each performance time will be explained with reference to Figure 125(b). Figure 125(b) shows the timetable for each performance time selected by the performance time selection table 222b. Different timetables are set for the performance times "I" to "XI." The letters "A," "B," and "D" written above the timetable indicate the performance mode that will be set during that period, and represent performance mode A, performance mode B, and performance mode D, respectively. The numbers written below them indicate the time (minutes) indicating that period.

Of the presentation modes, presentation mode A is a period during which normal presentations are performed, while presentation mode B and presentation mode D are periods during which time presentations (synchronized presentations) are performed. In particular, presentation mode D is set to transition less frequently than presentation mode B, and during presentation mode D, a presentation is executed that provides information that may be advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the time presentation (synchronized presentation) begins, the player can play the game with the expectation that there is a possibility of transitioning to presentation mode D.

Note that presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is only entered if there is a jackpot in the reserved memory at the time presentation mode B and presentation mode D end; in other words, whether or not the presentation mode is entered depends on the results of the game lottery. Therefore, although it is not shown in Figure 125(b), in reality, after presentation mode B and presentation mode D, both presentation mode A and presentation mode C are set, and the appropriate presentation mode is selected depending on the results of the game lottery.

In this embodiment, "I" to "VIII" are assigned as the performance times selected when using the normal items (Sunday to Saturday) of the day of the week data, while "X" and "XI" are assigned as the performance times selected when using the special items (Event 1, Event 2) of the day of the week data.

Here, we will explain performance time "I." Performance time "I" is a timetable in which performance mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, followed by performance mode B (time performance (synchronized performance)) for 5 minutes, and this cycle is repeated.

Next, we will explain performance time "II." Performance time "II" consists of 55 minutes of performance mode A (normal period), followed by 5 minutes of performance mode B (time performance (synchronized performance)) and 3 minutes of performance mode D (time performance (synchronized performance)), for a total of 8 minutes of time performance (synchronized performance). Then, after 52 minutes of performance mode A, performance mode B is again executed for 5 minutes.

The duration of the timed effect (synchronized effect) is set to be different between effect time "I" and effect time "II." Similarly, the duration of the timed effect (synchronized effect) is set to be different for effect times "I" through "VIII" (though some parts are the same). However, regardless of which effect time is selected, the timing at which the timed effect (synchronized effect) starts is set to be the same. For effect time "I" and effect time "II" described above, the duration of effect mode A is set to be different so that the timed effect (synchronized effect) starts 55 and 115 minutes after the start of the effect. By configuring in this way, even if various effect times are selected, a unified effect can be created by matching the timing at which the timed effect (synchronized effect) starts (the timing at which effect mode A switches to effect mode B). Furthermore, since the player cannot tell whether the timed effect is set to 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the start of the timed effect, they can enjoy watching the timed effect and see whether the timed effect will be extended, which increases the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are performance times "X" and "XI" which are performance times that are selected only when special items such as "Event 1" and "Event 2" are referenced as day of the week data. As shown in Figure 125 (b), these two performance times "X" and "XI" are set to be clearly different from the other performance times, with time performance (synchronized performance) taking up half of the total time in performance time "X", and time performance (synchronized performance) taking up the entire time in performance time "XI".

In this way, when normal items (Sunday to Saturday) are used as day of the week data, efforts are made to ensure that the player does not notice the difference in the period during which the time presentation takes place (the player does not notice when the time presentation starts), but when special items (Event 1, Event 2) are used as day of the week data, presentation times are set that make it possible to clearly indicate the period during which the time presentation takes place.

In this embodiment, the performance time is set as described above, but other methods for setting the performance time may also be used. For example, the performance time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using day of the week data in the performance time selection table. When using such a configuration, the time information obtained from the RTC 292 is referenced, and if it is determined that the date has changed, the performance time assigned to the identification number is changed, thereby achieving the same effect as this embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the operator does not set an identification number, the identification number "I" stored as the initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of RAM 223 is used. However, the identification number stored as the initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed by referring to the time information obtained from RTC 292 and determining that the date has changed. In this way, it is possible to change the period during which the time effect is performed without having to enter an identification number, reducing the operator's workload.

In this embodiment, the synchronized effects are performed by referencing time information obtained from RTC292, but any configuration that allows the period for which the synchronized effects are performed can be used, and a different configuration may be used instead of RTC292.

Other possible configurations include, for example, a configuration in which a timer is provided to measure the elapsed time from when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the system can be set to enter a predetermined period in which a synchronous performance can be executed, or a configuration in which predetermined information is input by operating the frame button 22, and the system can enter a predetermined period in which a synchronous performance can be executed based on the input predetermined information.

Specifically, in order to synchronize and display the presentation mode (the reserved and stored presentation mode) scheduled to be executed on a specific pachinko machine 10 on other pachinko machines 10, presentation information including information indicating the reserved and stored presentation mode is output to the third pattern display device 81 of the specific pachinko machine 10 as a password that can be entered into the pachinko machine 10. By entering this password into the other pachinko machine 10, the player can set the specific presentation mode on the other pachinko machine 10 based on the presentation information included in the entered password. The player can then execute the set presentation mode at any timing, thereby synchronizing it with the presentation mode executed on the specific pachinko machine 10.

When using such a configuration, it is advisable to use the RTC 292 to include information indicating the time at which the reserved and stored performance mode will actually be executed in the performance information described above. By doing this, it becomes possible to enjoy synchronized performance modes on a specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines 10 at that time simply by entering a password into the other pachinko machines 10.

In addition, it is advisable to use a two-dimensional information code, which is information that can be acquired by an external device (mobile terminal), as the performance information displayed on the third symbol display device 81, rather than a password. This configuration allows performance information to be acquired by the mobile terminal and transmitted to a distant player via communication, making it possible to execute synchronized performance modes between distant pachinko machines.

Note that the synchronization is not limited to the presentation mode stored in reserve, but may also be the presentation mode during a jackpot. Furthermore, in the presentation mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) that is the source of synchronization and the pachinko machine 10 (subordinate pachinko machine) that is being synchronized, the subordinate pachinko machine may only be able to perform synchronized presentations when no play is being performed, or the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during special symbol play.

By using this type of configuration, players can set the specified period during which synchronous effects can be executed, which allows players to experience synchronous effects at their own discretion, making it possible to reduce boredom with the game.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 126 to 130. This fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in the order in which the reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the reserved balls of special symbol 2 are consumed. In other words, while the second embodiment described above performed control to consume the reserved balls of special symbol 2 preferentially over the reserved balls of special symbol 1, this embodiment performs control to consume the reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the reserved balls of special symbol 2 in the order of winning. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figure 126, we will explain the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 126 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S120). This special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process 2, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S4001). A special symbol jackpot period includes the period when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during special symbol jackpot play), and the period of time after the special symbol jackpot play has ended. If the determination shows that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S4001: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a special symbol jackpot is not occurring (S4001: No), a determination is made as to whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is currently changing (S4002). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not currently changing (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved special symbol variable displays N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of reserved special symbol variable displays N2) are obtained (S4003). Next, a determination is made as to whether a variable display will be performed using the reserved balls of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1) or the reserved balls of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2), and the variable execution flag 203i is set, thereby executing a variable execution determination process (S4004). The variable execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

The change execution flag 203i set by the change execution determination process (S4004) is determined to indicate whether a change is being executed on special chart 1 (S4005). If the change is not being executed on special chart 1 (S4005: No), the change execution flag 203i is determined to indicate whether a change is being executed on special chart 2 (S4010). If the change is not being executed on special chart 2 (S4010: No), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the change execution flag 203i indicates that a change is being executed for special symbol 1 (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S4006), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S4007). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S4007, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In processing S4008, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, and reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data has been shifted, a special pattern 1 change start process is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device 37 (S4009). The special pattern 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

In the processing of S4005, if the change execution flag 203i is not a change execution for special chart 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the change execution flag 203i is a change execution for special chart 2 (S4010). If the change execution flag 203i is a change execution for special chart 2 (S4010: Yes), the same processing is performed for the reserved balls of special chart 2 as for the reserved balls of special chart 1 described above.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S4011), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S4012). The reserved ball count command set here updates the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223c in RAM 223. After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S4012, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S4013), and special pattern 2 change start processing is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device 37 (S4014). The special pattern 2 change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

In the processing of S4002, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed by the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S4015). The change time of the change display being executed by the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S4015: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S4016), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the change time for the currently executing change display has elapsed in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S4017). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern 1 change start processing (S4009) described below with reference to FIG. 128 or the special pattern 2 change start processing (S4014) described below with reference to FIG. 129. When this special pattern 1 change start processing or special pattern 2 change start processing is executed, the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is set based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, if the jackpot is the first special symbol, the value of the first win type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B, and if the jackpot is the second special symbol, the value of the first win type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, a blue LED is lit on the first pattern display device 37, and if a jackpot B occurs, a red LED is lit. Furthermore, if a miss occurs, a red LED and a green LED are lit. The LEDs are turned off when the next variable display begins, but may remain lit for only a few seconds after the variable display stops.

After the processing of S4017 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first pattern display device 37, it is determined whether the special pattern display (the current lottery result) performed by the special pattern variable start processing is a special pattern jackpot (S4018). If the current lottery result is a special pattern jackpot (S4018: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S4019) and processing proceeds to S4022.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4018, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special pattern (S4018: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S4020), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S4020: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S4021), and processing proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), processing of S4021 is skipped and processing proceeds to S4022.

In the process of S4022, which is executed after the processes of S4019, S4020, or S4021, a stop command is set to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stop pattern set in the process of S4017, with the stopping of the fluctuations of the third pattern display device 81 (S4022).

Next, referring to Figure 127, the change execution determination process (S4004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (S4004). This change execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed within the special pattern change process 2 (see Figure 126) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58), and is a process for determining whether the change effect pattern (change effect pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 will be executed based on the values of the various counters stored in either the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The change execution determination process first initializes the change execution flag 203i by setting it to 0 (S4101), and then obtains the data in the change order storage area 203j (S4102). The data in the change order storage area 203j is then shifted (S4103). In S4103, the data stored in areas 1 through 8 of the change order storage area 203j is shifted sequentially to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 1 → execution area, area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → reserved area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → reserved area 6, and area 8 → reserved area 7. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (S4104).

If, in the processing of S4104, it is determined that the data in the execution area is special symbol 1 (S4104: Yes), the change execution flag 203i is set to change execution with special symbol 1 (S4105), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to special symbol change processing 2.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special symbol 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special symbol 2 (S4106). If it is determined in the processing of S4106 that the data in the execution area is special symbol 2 (S4106: Yes), the change execution flag 203i is set to change execution with special symbol 2 (S4107), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to special symbol change processing 2.

If, in the processing of S4106, it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special symbol 2 (S4106: No), there are no reserved balls to execute the change, so the change execution flag 203i remains in its initial state, this processing ends, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

Next, with reference to Figure 128, the special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Figure 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009). This special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009) is processing executed within special symbol variation processing 2 (see Figure 126) of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 58), and is processing for determining the presentation pattern (variation presentation pattern) of the variation presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the values of the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 for the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the game is in a special jackpot mode (S4202). Specifically, if the special jackpot mode counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the game is in a special jackpot mode, and if the special jackpot mode counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the game is not in a special jackpot mode. If it is determined that the game is in a special jackpot mode in S4202 (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the high-probability jackpot determination value in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the process proceeds to S4205. Here, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by comparing the value of the first win random number counter C1 updated in the processing of S103 with the value (win value) stored in the high probability jackpot determination value (Figure 52(a)) of the first win random number table 202a (S4203). If the value of the first win random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be a miss (see Figure 52(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in a special probability mode (S4202: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the low-probability jackpot determination value and low-probability jackpot determination value in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (S4204), and processing proceeds to S4205. Here, the lottery result for the special pattern is determined by comparing the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 updated in processing S103 with the value (win value) stored in the high-probability jackpot determination value (Figure 52(a)) in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (S4204). If the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is "7," it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is within the range of "0 to 6" or "8 to 399," it is determined to be a miss (see Figure 52(a)).

Next, a winning information command including the lottery results is set (S4205), and processing proceeds to S4206. In S4206, it is determined whether the lottery results obtained in S4203 or S4204 are a jackpot. If it is determined that the lottery results obtained in S4203 or S4204 are a jackpot (S4206: Yes), the display mode is set from the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained in S4201 (S4207), and processing proceeds to S4208.

More specifically, the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202b to determine which of the two special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59," it is determined to be jackpot A (16R special jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99," it is determined to be jackpot B (16R normal jackpot) (see Figure 52 (b)).

In this S4207 process, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Furthermore, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed in a stopped state on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S4208, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation presentation in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of RAM 203 is checked, and the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of pattern fluctuation is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see Figures 53 (a) to (d)). Specifically, when a jackpot occurs, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50", the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (30 seconds); if it is in the range of "51 to 179", the fluctuation pattern is super reach (60 seconds); and if it is in the range of "180 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is special reach (90 seconds) (see Figure 53 (b)).

If the processing of S4206 determines that the special pattern is a miss (S4206: No), the display mode for the miss is set (S4209). In processing of S4209, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the stop type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, stop types such as "reach for miss before or after," "reach for other than miss before or after," and "complete miss" are specified.

Next, the loss variation pattern is determined (S4210). During normal play (when the probability variation counter 203 is 0), the pattern is determined based on the loss (normal) selection table 202d2. During probability variation (when the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0), the pattern is determined based on the loss (probability variation) selection table 202d3. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the time for the third symbol to vary until it stops at a loss symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time for symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see Figures 53(a)-(d)). Specifically, if there is a complete miss when there is no chance of a special bonus, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", it is a short miss (7 seconds), if it is in the range of "99 to 198", it is a long miss (10 seconds); if it is a reach, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", it is a normal reach (30 seconds), if it is in the range of "150 to 197", it is a super reach (60 seconds), and if it is "198", it is a special reach (90 seconds).

Once the processing of S4208 and S4210 is completed, a variation pattern command is set (S4211) to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S4208 and S4210. Next, a stop type command is set (S4212) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S4208 and S4210. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of S1001 of the main processing (Figure 67). The voice lamp control device 113 sends the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. Once the processing of S4212 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to Figure 129, the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S4014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Figure 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S4014). This special symbol 2 variation start processing (S4014) is processing executed within the special symbol variation processing (see Figure 59) of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 58), and is processing for determining the presentation pattern (variation presentation pattern) of the variation presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process, similar to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009), S4301 is used to obtain the first winning random number counter C1 for the second special symbol and the lottery result based on the judgment value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Except for the processes of S4307 and S4309, the same processing as S4009 is performed on the data in the execution area in the reserved ball storage area for the second special symbol, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The processing of S4307 is executed when the lottery result obtained in the processing of S4303 or S4304 is a jackpot (S4306: Yes). In the processing of S4307, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selection table for special symbol 2 202e2 (Figure 54(c)) (S4307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S4307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Note that the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol fluctuation is specified in the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see Figures 54(a)-(c)). Specifically, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (overall range of values), the fluctuation pattern is time-saving B (0.5 seconds) (see Figure 54(c)).

S4309 is executed if the lottery result obtained in S4303 or S4304 is a miss (S4306: No). In S4309, the miss variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol 2 time-saving variation pattern table 202e2 (Figure 54(c)) (S4309). When the variation pattern is set in S4309, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is specified in the time-saving variation pattern selection table 202e (see Figures 54(a)-(c)). Specifically, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (overall range of values), the variation pattern is time-saving miss B (0.5 seconds) (see Figure 54(c)).

Next, referring to Figure 130, we will explain start winning process 2 (S121) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 130 is a flowchart showing this start winning process 2 (S121). This start winning process 2 (S121) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 58) and is a process for determining whether or not there has been a win (start winning) at the first start port 63a, and if there has been a start winning, for holding the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When start winning process 2 is executed, it is first determined whether the ball has entered the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S4401). Here, the ball entering the first start opening 63a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first start opening 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times N1 for the special pattern) is obtained (S4402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4403).

Then, if there is no winning entry into the first starting hole 63a (S4401: No), or if there is a winning entry into the first starting hole 63a but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first starting hole 63a (S4401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S4404). Then, a reserved ball count command is set indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation (S4405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see Figure 67) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S4405, the values of the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S4406), special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the variation order storage area 203j (S4407), and processing proceeds to S4408. Note that in processing S4407, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is designated as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is designated as the first area; if the value is 3, the third area is designated as the first area; and if the value is 4, the fourth area is designated as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203j using the change execution determination process (S4004) described above, even in cases where there are two types of changes in the starting gate, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this embodiment, the changes can be started in the order in which they were entered into the starting gate.

In S4408, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second starting hole 63b (starting winning) (S4408). If it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 63b (S4408: Yes), the same processing is performed on the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e as when the ball has entered the first starting hole 63a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of reserved special symbol variable display times N2) is obtained (S4409). If the value is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4410: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S4411), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is set (S4412). The values of the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 are then stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S4413), the special symbol 2 is set in the first area of the variable display order storage area 203j (S4414), and processing proceeds to S4415. The determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as in S4407.

If there is no winning entry into the second starting hole 63b (S4408: No), or if there is a winning entry into the second starting hole 63b but the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4 (S4410: No), the pre-reading process is executed (S4415) and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the voice and lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 131 to 146, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this fourth embodiment will be described. This fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in the content of the eight-item hold effect, composite display effect, and time effect (synchronization effect). The other parts are the same, and the same parts are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Figure 131, startup process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 131 is a flowchart showing this startup process 2. Like the second embodiment described above, startup process 2 is a process performed when the voice lamp control device 113 is powered on. In startup process 2, like the second embodiment, processes S1201 to S1211 are executed. Thereafter, time setting process 2 (S1251 in Figure 132) is executed, and the process proceeds to main process 2.

Here, referring to Figure 132, we will explain time setting process 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 132 is a flowchart showing time setting process 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed during startup process 2, and is a process for setting the time (time) at power-on (power startup) based on time information acquired from the RTC 292, and for setting startup flag 223α to on, which executes a process that is performed only for a predetermined period of time after power startup.

In time setting process 2, as in the second embodiment described above, time information is acquired from the RTC 292, which is the timekeeping means (S1221). Then, based on the acquired time information, the startup time is set in the set time memory area 223j (S1261), and the startup flag 223α is set to ON (S1262).

By executing this process and setting the startup flag 223α to on, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see Figure 135)) that can only be operated for a specified period of time after power is turned on.

Next, referring to Figure 133, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 133 is a flowchart showing main processing 2. This main processing 2 is executed after startup processing 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 has finished. This main processing 2 executes the processes of S1301 to S1306, as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 is executed (S1351). Note that this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1351) will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 134.

After the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1351) is executed, the processes of S1308 to S1312 are executed, as in the second embodiment described above. Then, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. Details of this variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the eight-item effect setting process (S1353) and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) are executed in this order. Then, as in the second embodiment described above, the processes of S1317 to S1321 are executed. Details of the eight-item effect setting process (S1353) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, and details of the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

Now, with reference to Figure 134, we will explain the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 133 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2. This frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351) is executed within the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in addition to the same content as the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in Figure 80) of the second embodiment described above, it is also a process for inputting an identification number used to set the period (time effect period) for the synchronous effect described below.

In frame button input monitoring and performance process 2, the identification number input process (S1851) is first executed.

Here, we will explain this identification number input process with reference to Figure 135. Figure 135 is a flowchart showing the identification number input process (S1851).

In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether the pattern is changing (S4501). If it is determined that the pattern is changing (S4501: Yes), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern is not changing (S4501: No), it is determined whether the activation flag 223α is set to on (S4502). If the activation flag 223α is not set to on (S4501: Yes), this process is completed.

On the other hand, if the startup flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether 20 minutes have passed since startup (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the startup time set in the set time storage area (S1261 in FIG. 132) with the current time information obtained from the RTC 292. If 20 minutes have passed since startup, the startup flag is set to OFF (S4504) and this processing is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not passed since startup, it is determined whether an identification number input operation has been performed (S4504).

Now, the identification number input operation will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to allow predetermined input operations to be performed using the frame button 22. Pressing the frame button 22 once within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in this embodiment) after power-on and when no symbol changes are occurring on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, while a demo screen is being displayed) displays the identification number input screen. After entering the desired identification number on the identification number input screen, the user can select "Input Complete" displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to execute the input of the identification number. The identification number can be input by selecting one of multiple input numbers displayed on the display screen, selecting multiple numbers from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen, or by entering the identification number by selecting multiple numbers from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen. Alternatively, the display screen can display "Random" and automatically selecting a predetermined identification number from among multiple identification numbers by selecting "Random."

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified time after power-on is set to 20 minutes. This is set as the time during which identification numbers can be entered for all pachinko machines 10, even if multiple pachinko machines 10 are powered on at the same time, and this time can be set as appropriate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period during which an identification number can be entered is a predetermined time after power-on, but this is intended to prevent players from entering identification numbers while playing; other methods may be employed as long as they achieve this objective. For example, an identification number entry operation screen may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by pressing a switch located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (for example, on the back of the gaming machine), or the time information measured by the RTC 292 may be determined to be outside business hours, and the identification number entry operation screen may be displayed only outside business hours. Even when such a configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent players from entering identification numbers.

Returning to Figure 135, we will continue the explanation. If no identification number input operation has been performed in S4505, this process ends. In other words, if no identification number input operation has been performed before the specified time has elapsed since power was turned on, there is a possibility that an identification number input operation will be performed before the specified time has elapsed, so this determination is repeated until the specified time has elapsed.

On the other hand, if an identification number input operation has been performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), the startup flag 223α is set to off (S4504), and this processing ends.

The identification number input process described above allows the identification number, a parameter necessary for setting the period during which the synchronous effects described below will occur (time effect period), to be set only within a limited time period, i.e., within a specified time after power-on. The period during which the synchronous effects will occur is changed based on the identification number set by this process. This allows the arcade to easily input identification numbers while preventing players from easily entering them. Therefore, even if the arcade intentionally assigns the same identification number to adjacent machines in an attempt to cause related synchronous effects to occur on the adjacent machines, the identification number set by the arcade will not be changed by the player, and the desired synchronous effects can be reliably performed.

Now, returning to FIG. 134, we will continue the explanation. After the identification number input process (S1851) is executed, processes S1811 to S1813 are performed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above. Then, if the hold effect flag is not set to on in S1813, the 8-item hold effect process (see S1852 in FIG. 136), which will be described later, is executed, and then the button effect process (see S1853 in FIG. 137), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the hold effect flag is set to on, the processes S1814 and S1815 are executed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above.

Next, the 8-ball reserved effect processing (S1852) will be explained with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the 8-ball reserved effect processing (S1852). This 8-ball reserved effect processing (S1852) is a process that executes an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the 8-ball effect that is executed when 8 reserved balls are accumulated, the special continuation effect that continues thereafter, and the additional effect that is executed while the 8-ball effect and the special continuation effect are being executed are being executed. This process executes an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 that is operated when the reserved pattern is a "push" pattern (alert reserved pattern).

In the 8-piece reserved effect processing (S1852), first, it is determined whether the 8-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the 8-piece effect flag 223i is not set to ON (S4601: No), it is then determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4602). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is then determined whether the additional effect flag is set to ON (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the 8-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601: Yes), the corresponding reserved 8-piece effect is executed (S4604), and processing proceeds to S4603. Note that if frame button 22 is operated during an 8-piece effect when the notification reserved symbol is not being displayed, that is, after the notification reserved symbol (the "push" symbol shown in FIG. 110(a)) has already been changed to the result display reserved symbol (the "Jack Hit!!!?" symbol shown in FIG. 111(a)) by operating frame button 22, a so-called "hype" effect is performed in which the expected level is expressed by audio and the color of the reserved symbol that has already been changed by the 8-piece effect (for example, "Jack Hit!!!?") is changed, rather than executing an effect for the reserved symbol.

Also, if the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON in S4602 (S4602: Yes), the corresponding reserved special continuation effect is executed (S4605), and processing proceeds to S4603. Note that if an operation input is made to the frame button 22 during the special continuation effect (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is ON) after the reserved symbol has already been changed by operating the frame button 22, a provocative effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button, similar to the 8-symbol effect described above.

If the additional effect flag 223u is set to on in S4603 (S4603: Yes), the corresponding reserved additional effect flag 223u is set to off (S4606), and the corresponding reserved additional effect is executed (S4607).

As explained above, in the 8-item reserved effect (S1852) executed during frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), different effects are executed based on the setting status of various flags (8-item effect flag 223i, special continuation effect flag 223t, additional effect flag 223u) at the time the frame button 22 is operated, allowing the player to experience a variety of effects simply by performing the same operation.

Next, the button effect processing (S1853) will be described with reference to Figure 137. Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the button effect processing (S1853). This button effect processing (S1853) is processing that sets the display effect when a frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during a composite display effect, and corresponds to pressing (operating) the frame button 22 based on the button rapid-fire mission displayed in Figure 114(b) and pressing (operating) the frame button 22 based on the "push" symbol displayed in Figure 116(b).

The button effect processing (S1853) first determines whether the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). If the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), it then determines whether the button effect stop symbol (the "push" symbol in Figure 116(b)) has stopped (S4702).

Here, we will explain the button effect flag 223r. The button effect flag 223r is a flag that is set to ON by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142) described below, and is set to ON when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that corresponds to the composite display effect.

If, in S4702, the button effect stop symbol has stopped (S4702: Yes), a display command is set that indicates the composite effect mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S4703). In other words, it is determined that the current press (operation) of the frame button 22 is to operate the "Push" symbol displayed in Figure 116 (b), and a display command is set to change the "Push" symbol to a number symbol.

On the other hand, if the button effect stop symbol has not stopped (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705). The button operation valid period is the period indicated by (b) in Figure 113, and is measured by a counter (not shown). If the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the button press condition has been met (S4706). In this embodiment, the button press condition is to press the button 50 times (see Figure 114 (b)).

If the button press condition is not met (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to OFF (S4704) and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the button press condition is met (S4706: Yes), this processing ends as is. In other words, if the button press condition has not been met when the button operation valid period has elapsed, the composite display effect is not continued, and after the period (b) in Figure 113 ends, the process transitions to the normal effect period (c), so the button effect flag is set to OFF and button effect processing is not performed.

Now, let's return to the processing of S4705 and continue the explanation. If the button operation valid period has not elapsed at S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is accumulated (S4707) and this processing ends.

The button effect processing has been explained above. In this processing, when a composite display effect is selected by button effect selection processing 2 (see FIG. 142), it is determined whether the button has been pressed a sufficient number of times to fulfill the button press condition within the valid button operation period (during the button rapid-fire mission) before the button effect stop symbol stops. Furthermore, if the button is pressed after the button effect stop symbol (the "push" symbol) stops, a display command is set to change the button effect stop symbol to a number symbol. Furthermore, if the button press condition is not fulfilled, the button effect flag is set to off, and the normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115(a)) is displayed without the button effect stop symbol stopping.

Next, referring to Figure 138, we will explain the preview selection process 2 (S1454) executed in the command determination process (S1312) of the main process 2 (see Figure 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the preview selection process 2 (S1454). This preview selection process 2 (S1454) is a process that sets a preview command for display based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292 and the presentation mode set by the synchronous presentation management process 2 (see Figure 144), which will be described later.

In preview selection process 2 (S1454), first, steps S1501 to S1507 are executed, similar to the preview selection process executed in the second embodiment described above. Here, if it is determined in the process of S1505 that presentation mode C has not been set, it is determined whether presentation mode D has been set (S1541). If presentation mode D has not been set (S1541: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if presentation mode D is set (S1541: Yes), a game status preview presentation is selected based on the win/lose determination result and the presentation counter (S1542), and a display preview command indicating the selected preview presentation is set (S1543). This process then ends.

Here, we will explain the display preview commands that are set when presentation mode D is set. Presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is set only when the period for which the synchronous presentation (time presentation) is performed is set longer (8 minutes) than usual (5 minutes) by the presentation time setting process (see Figure 145). During presentation mode D, preview presentations that may be advantageous to the player are performed to satisfy the player about entering presentation mode D. For example, preview presentations that notify the player that the current game situation is in a special chance, preview presentations that do not appear in other presentation modes, and preview presentations that are not directly related to the game results but include information that allows the player to earn a large amount of points that they have accumulated (points to raise the character's level) or information that allows them to obtain bonus footage (information display that can be read on a mobile phone) are possible.

Next, referring to Figure 139, we will explain the winning command reception process 2 (S1461) executed in the command determination process (S1312) of the main process 2 (see Figure 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1461). This winning command reception process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when a winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

In the winning command reception process 2 (S1461), first, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed, similar to the winning command reception process (S1411 in FIG. 73) executed in the second embodiment described above, and then it is determined whether the additional effect flag is set to on (S1551). If the additional effect flag is not set to on (S1551: No), the processes of S1514 to S1522 are executed, similar to the second embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if the additional effect flag is set to on (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552) and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Figure 140, we will explain variable display setting process 2 (S1352) executed in main process 2 (see Figure 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 140 is a flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 (S1352).

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1352), steps S1601 and S1602 are first executed, similar to the variable display setting process (S1313 in FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, the variable pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1651).

Now, referring to Figure 141, we will explain variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651). Figure 141 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651). This variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is a process that selects and sets a variation pattern based on the current presentation mode and the acquired presentation counter value, similar to the variation pattern selection process (S1603 in Figure 75) executed in the second embodiment described above.

In variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), first, the processes of S1611 and S1612 are executed, similar to the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. If effect mode A is set in S1612 (S1612: Yes), button effect selection process 2 is executed (S1661). Details of button effect selection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, if presentation mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed, similar to the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, if presentation mode B is not set in S1614 (S1614: No), it is next determined whether presentation mode C is set (S1662).

If it is determined that presentation mode C is set (S1662: Yes), a variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table for the corresponding time presentation extension period. On the other hand, if presentation mode C is not set (S1662: No), the current presentation mode is D, so a variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table for the special extension presentation period corresponding to presentation mode D.

Now, referring to Figure 142, we will explain button effect selection process 2 (S1661). Figure 142 is a flowchart showing button effect selection process 2 (S1661).

In button effect selection process 2, first, S1621 and S1622 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in S1622, if the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table is a button effect, the number of button presses is set (S1671). This number of button presses refers to the number of presses required to complete the button rapid-fire mission (see FIG. 114(b)) performed during the composite display effect, and is set to 50 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, 50 button presses is set as the condition for completing the mission during the composite display effect, but the number of button presses may be increased or decreased as a mission imposed during the composite display effect (condition setting for reaching the Push effect), or a condition may be operating the frame button at a specified timing.

Then, as in the second embodiment described above, steps S1623 and S1624 are executed, and then this processing ends.

As explained above, in addition to the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. 76) executed in the second embodiment described above, button effect selection process 2 sets the number of button presses as a condition for reaching the push effect that occurs during the composite display effect. By setting this condition, even if a button effect is selected as the variation pattern, the push effect will not occur unless the player operates the frame button 22 and achieves the set condition (50 button presses). This means that the player will actively operate the frame button 22 to see the special effect and participate in the game, allowing them to enjoy the pachinko machine 10.

Also, if a player feels like seeing the normal effects, they simply do not need to press the button. This allows the player to select the later effects depending on their mood.

In this embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50, but it is preferable to configure the number of button presses to be changeable each time a button effect is selected as a variation pattern. Furthermore, even if the number of button presses set as a condition setting is reached, the game does not necessarily transition to the push effect. For example, if the game lottery result is a jackpot, the game will always transition to the push effect, but if the game lottery result is a loss, the game may transition to the push effect only with a predetermined probability (30%). In this way, simply transitioning to the push effect can increase anticipation of a jackpot, allowing players to more actively participate in games that use the frame button 22.

Also, by making it possible to change the number of button presses set as a condition setting, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand whether the push effect did not occur because the lottery result was a loss, or because the conditions were not met. Furthermore, by setting the number of button presses set as a condition setting to one, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

When setting the number of button presses, it is advisable to set a number that is set only if the game lottery result is a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, players will be able to recognize that the game result is a jackpot when the different effects are displayed, and will pay more attention to the game effects. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116(a), a blank symbol is transformed into a "push" symbol, and the "push" symbol is compositely displayed. However, the blank symbol may be transformed into various characters, and a sentence (message) corresponding to the characters may be compositely displayed. This configuration allows the player to predict the compositely displayed sentence by combining the displayed characters when the blank symbol is transformed into various characters, creating a sense of anticipation for the game that follows. Furthermore, when using this configuration, it is preferable to compositely display sentences using only a portion of the displayed characters, rather than using all of the various characters displayed to compositely display them. This allows the player to predict various patterns of sentences. Furthermore, by making the appearance (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used different from the other characters so that the characters that are always used can be identified, the player can be given a hint as to the sentence that will be created in the composite display, making it more enjoyable to predict the sentence that will be created in the composite display.

Next, referring to Figure 143, the 8-symbol effect setting process (S1353) executed in main process 2 (see Figure 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 143 is a flowchart showing the 8-symbol effect setting process (S1353). This 8-symbol effect setting process (S1353) is a process for making various settings related to the reserved symbol effect (see Figures 110 to 112) that is performed based on the number of reserved symbols (reserved memory number).

In the 8-piece effect setting process (S1353), first, it is determined whether the 8-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). If the 8-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223u is a flag used when determining whether or not to execute an additional winning effect. Then, it is determined whether the value of the 8-piece effect counter 223v is greater than 0 (S4803). As described above, the 8-piece effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of pattern changes since the 8-piece effect using the reserved patterns was executed, and if its value is greater than 0, it indicates that the 8-piece effect is continuing.

If the value of the 8-piece effect counter 223v is greater than 0, i.e., if the 8-piece effect is continuing (S4803: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the 8-piece effect counter 223v is not greater than 0, i.e., if the value of the 8-piece effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the 8-piece effect flag 223i is set to off (S4804), and then it is determined whether the number of reserved items is greater than 4 (S4805).

If the number of reserved items is greater than four (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4806), and then the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 (S4807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items is not greater than four (if it is 4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (s4811), and this processing ends.

Returning to S4801, the explanation will continue. If the 8-effect flag 223i is not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set on (S4808). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set on (S4808: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the special continuation effect flag 223t is set on (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809).

If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809: Yes), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not greater than 0 (if the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to off (S4810), and the additional effect flag 223u is set to off (S4811). This processing is then terminated.

As explained above, this 8-piece effect setting process sets various flags that are referenced when determining whether to perform the 8-piece effect, special continuation effect, or additional winning effect, which are performed based on the number of reserved symbols (reserved memory number).

Next, referring to FIG. 144, we will explain the synchronous performance management process 2 (S1354) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the synchronous performance management process 2 (S1354). This synchronous performance management process 2 (S1354) is a process that sets a performance mode (A to D) based on time information obtained from the RTC 292, and is one additional performance mode that can be set compared to the synchronous performance management process (S1314) executed in the second embodiment described above.

In the synchronous performance management process 2 (S1354), the performance time setting process (S1751) is first executed. This performance time setting process (S1751) sets the performance time using the startup flag 223α set to on by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) executed during the startup process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after power is turned on, and the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

Here, the performance time setting process (S1751) will be explained with reference to Figure 145. Figure 145 is a flowchart showing the performance time setting process (S1751).

The effect time setting process first determines whether the effect time has already been set (S4901). If the effect time has already been set (S4901: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect time has not been set (S4901: No), it then determines whether the startup flag is set to on (S4902). If the startup flag is set to on (S4902: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the startup flag is not set to on (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903, which will be described later.

In other words, in S4902, the state of the startup flag 223α is checked to determine whether the period during which an identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has elapsed, and the performance time is set once the period during which an identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has elapsed. Note that if the startup flag is turned off without an identification number being entered during the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), the identification number stored as the initial setting in the identification number storage area 223x is used.

After determining in S4902 that the startup flag is not set to on, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is obtained (S4903), and the performance time corresponding to the identification number is selected from the performance time selection table (222b). The selected performance time is then stored in the performance time storage area 223y (S4905), and this processing ends.

As described above in Figure 125, the performance time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is configured to allow the performance time to be selected by referencing the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the day of the week data created based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292. By using such a performance time selection table 222b, the time at which the performance time is provided changes simply when the day of the week changes. Therefore, if you want to change the performance time every day, there is no need to change the identification number every day, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of work required to make changes.

In addition, two event days are set in addition to the normal day of the week data based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292, but this is not limiting and other parameters may be referenced as long as they can be created based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292. Other parameters may include a parameter that distinguishes between even and odd days, a parameter that identifies holidays, and a parameter that identifies dates where the month and day are the same (consecutive digits).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance time is set by referencing two parameters: day of the week data and identification number, but the performance time may also be set by referencing three or more parameters. In this way, more complex combinations can be easily provided.

In this embodiment, by allowing the operator to input an identification number as a parameter that can be set, it is possible to execute synchronized effects (time effects) at the same timing on a specified number of machines (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10), but other parameters that can be set by the operator may also be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the parameters set by the pachinko machine 10 are parameters (day of the week data) based on time information acquired from the RTC 292, but other parameters may be set. For example, it is preferable to set parameters based on the game information of the pachinko machine 10 on the previous day (number of jackpots and number of balls dispensed). This is preferable. By configuring in this way,
In addition to the frame buttons 22, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with input means such as a touch panel input means or a selection button (cross button) for selecting information to be displayed on the display screen as a means for the operator to set and input parameters. By providing such input means, even complex setting inputs can be easily operated. Furthermore, such input means may be used for the display effects of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to Figure 144, we will continue the explanation. After executing the performance time setting process (S1751 in Figure 145), the processes from S1701 to S1705 are carried out in the same manner as the synchronous performance management process (S1314 in Figure 77) executed in the second embodiment described above, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the performance mode is not set to performance mode A in S1702, it is determined whether the performance mode is set to performance mode B or performance mode D (S1752).

If it is determined that the mode is not presentation mode B or presentation mode D (S1752: No), steps S1709 and S1710 are performed as in the second embodiment described above, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is presentation mode B or presentation mode D (S1752: Yes), it is determined whether the time information (data) obtained from the RTC 292 is time information indicating that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the start of the time presentation (S1753).

The determination in S1753 may be made by comparing the time when the timed effect started with the current time to calculate the elapsed time, or by pre-setting a timing of 4 minutes 57 seconds later in the timetable for the effect time (see Figure 125 (b)) and determining whether that timing (time) has passed. Furthermore, a timer may be provided that starts timing from the time when the timed effect started, without obtaining time information from the RTC 292, and this timer may be used to measure 4 minutes 57 seconds.

If the time information obtained from the RTC 292 indicates that 4 minutes 57 seconds have not passed since the start of the time effect (S1753: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the time information obtained from the RTC 292 indicates that 4 minutes 57 seconds have passed since the start of the time effect (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the current time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754).

If the time duration is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, if the presentation mode is presentation mode C, the process of S1708 is carried out as in the second embodiment described above, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the time duration is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, if the presentation mode is presentation mode D, extended presentation setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and this process ends.

Next, Extended Performance Setting Process 2 (S1755) will be explained with reference to Figure 145. Figure 145 is a flowchart showing Extended Performance Setting Process 2 (S1755). This Extended Performance Setting Process 2 is executed when the time performance period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time performance period is 8 minutes, and is a process for making the settings necessary to extend the 5-minute time performance period.

In Extended Effects Setting Process 2 (S1755), it is first determined whether a jackpot is currently occurring (S5001). If it is determined that a jackpot is currently occurring (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the effects mode is set to effects mode A (S5003), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot is not occurring (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time presentation period (synchronized presentation period) has ended (S5004). If the time presentation period has not ended (S5004: No), it is then determined whether five minutes have passed since the time presentation began (S5005). If five minutes have not passed since the time presentation began (S5005: No), a re-changing presentation is set (S5008), and this processing ends.

In other words, S5008 is processing that is performed when S1753 in FIG. 144 determines that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the start of the time presentation, and S5005 in FIG. 146 determines that 5 minutes have not passed since the start of the time presentation, and is processing that sets the re-changing presentation that will be performed between 4 minutes and 57 seconds and 5 minutes after the start of the time presentation.

Note that the re-changing effect is the same as in the second embodiment, so explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5005 that five minutes have passed since the start of the time presentation (S5005: Yes), the extension presentation flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the presentation mode is set to presentation mode D (S5007), and this processing ends.

Returning to S5004, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in S5004 that the time presentation period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5009), and then the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

The winning information storage area 223a stores pending win/loss judgment results and currently changing win/loss judgment results, and can store up to nine judgment results.

If there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the jackpot variation ends is calculated, and this time is set as the extended effect time in the extended effect time memory area 223q (S5012).

Then, the re-changing effect is set (S5013), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the effect mode is set to effect mode C (S5015). Then, this processing ends.

The synchronous performance management process 2 described above differs from the synchronous performance management process (S1314 in Figure 77) executed in the second embodiment described above in that it performs extended performance setting process 2 as processing related to performance mode D, which is newly added in this embodiment; otherwise, the processing is the same.

In this embodiment, even if the time presentation period is eight minutes, in presentation mode D, as in other presentation modes, when the time presentation approaches five minutes (after four minutes and fifty-seven seconds have elapsed), a premonition display mode is displayed in which the presentation symbols are displayed slightly vibrating for three seconds (until five minutes have elapsed), as shown in FIG. 120(a). Therefore, the presentation when the time presentation period reaches five minutes can be made the same as other pachinko machines 10 that have presentation mode B set, enhancing the sense of unity in the presentation. Furthermore, after multiple pachinko machines 10 perform re-variation presentations at the same timing, only pachinko machines 10 for which presentation mode C or presentation mode D has been selected will perform the extended presentation. This allows players playing pachinko machines 10 for which presentation mode C or presentation mode D has been selected to feel as if their pachinko machine 10 has been selected, giving them a sense of superiority.

In the control processing of the audio and lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above, time information obtained from the RTC 292 is used in controlling the synchronous effects, allowing for a unified effect to be produced across multiple pachinko machines 10. However, if, for example, synchronous effects are to be enjoyed on only two adjacent machines, it is possible to perform a predetermined operation on the frame buttons 22 simultaneously without using the RTC 292, so that the time effect begins after the predetermined operation is executed. This configuration allows players to enjoy the time effect at their preferred timing, preventing the problem of players becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, while this embodiment uses effect data (display mode) specifically for timed effects, it is also possible to set and use effect data for timed effects from effect data that is also used outside of the timed effect period (normal state effect data). This makes it possible to reduce the amount of effect data. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to provide a means for restricting effect data set as effect data for timed effects so that it is not displayed outside of the timed effect period (normal state). The above-mentioned effect mode synchronization methods may also be combined.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 147 and 148, we will explain the differences between the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment described above and the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment described above. This embodiment differs in that it adds processing when a command related to a special continuation effect or an additional effect is received in pending command processing 2 (S2461 of Figure 147), and processing when a command related to an eight-item effect, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect is received in effect command processing 2 (S2463 of Figure 148). Note that the same parts as those in the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

First, referring to Figure 147, we will explain pending command processing 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 147 is a flowchart showing pending command processing 2 (S2461).

When pending command processing 2 (S2461) is executed, processing from S2801 to S2807 is executed, as in the second embodiment described above. Then, if it is determined in S2805 that the received command is not an 8-item effect (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851). If it is determined that the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding pending symbol is changed to a special continuation effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2852).

On the other hand, if the received command is not a special continuation effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is an additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the received command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), other pending display settings are executed (S2807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the received command is for an additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to an additional effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, other reserved display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends. Note that changing to an additional effect symbol means changing to the "?" symbol shown in Figure 111 (b).

In this embodiment, reserved command processing 2 is configured to process and set received commands related to the reserved number and received commands related to effects using reserved symbols at different times. In other words, even if both commands related to the reserved number and commands related to effects using reserved symbols are stored in the command buffer area, the command related to the reserved number is processed first, and then the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is looped before the command related to effects using reserved symbols is processed. By configuring it in this way, when reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is possible to reliably display the normal reserved symbol first, and then the displayed reserved symbol changes to an effect symbol. This allows the player to visually understand that the number of reserved symbols has increased and that the increased reserved symbols have changed into effect symbols.

The above configuration can be further enhanced by being implemented in the eight-piece effect performed in this embodiment. In other words, the eight-piece effect performed in this embodiment is an effect that can be implemented when the number of reserved symbols reaches eight, and one effect mode (character string) is displayed using eight reserved symbols (Figure 111 (a)). When performing such a reserved symbol effect, if the process for displaying the eighth reserved symbol and the process for displaying the eight-piece effect are performed simultaneously, there is a risk that the seven reserved symbol display on the third symbol display screen will suddenly switch to an eight-piece effect. If the reserved symbol display changes in this way, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth reserved symbol has occurred. In contrast, as in this embodiment, even if both commands related to the number of reserved items and commands related to effects using reserved symbols are stored in the command buffer area, the command related to the number of reserved items is processed first, and then the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is looped before processing the command related to effects using reserved symbols. This makes it possible to create a time lag between the processing of the command related to the number of reserved items and the processing of the command related to effects using reserved symbols, thereby preventing the above-mentioned problem.

The period for displaying the eighth reserved symbol should be long enough for the player to recognize the increase in the reserved symbols (20 milliseconds or more), and if necessary, processing may be provided to provide a time lag between the display of the eighth reserved symbol and the display of the eight-symbol effect (delaying the timing of displaying the eight-symbol effect).

In addition, it is a good idea to include display data for displaying eight regular reserved symbols at the beginning of the display data for the eight-symbol effect set in the display data table in S2806 of Figure 147. By doing this, it is possible to reliably display eight regular reserved symbols when processing and displaying a command for the eight-symbol effect.

Next, referring to Figure 148, we will explain effect command processing 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 148 is a flowchart showing effect command processing 2 (S2463). This effect command processing 2 differs from the effect command processing (S2413 in Figure 90) executed in the second embodiment described above in that processing corresponding to commands for the 8-item effect, special continuation effect, and additional effect has been added; other parts are the same, so explanations will be omitted.

First, when effect command processing 2 (S2463) is executed, the process is the same as the effect command processing (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above. Processing from S2901 to S2904 is executed. Then, if it is determined in S2903 that the effect is not a pseudo-extension effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is for an 8-item effect, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951). If it is not for an 8-item effect, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951: No), the process is executed from S2907 to S2912, as in the second embodiment described above, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2951 that the received command is either an 8-item effect, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951: Yes), the display data table for the 8-item effect, special continuation effect, or additional effect corresponding to the command is set in the display data table buffer.

In this embodiment, we have described a technology for setting various display effects related to the variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on time information obtained from the RTC 292, but it is also possible to control only the sound and lamps based on time information obtained from the RTC 292. By doing this, the player will be able to sense a slight sense of incongruity and will be able to concentrate on playing, which can increase their motivation to play.

In addition to the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol, various effect displays may be set based on time information obtained from the RTC 292. For example, in the effect related to a jackpot game, the start timing of the jackpot video and jackpot audio may be controlled by time information obtained from the RTC 292. Specifically, in a bonus game that is executed when the result of a determination based on a ball entering the winning slot (ball entry slot) is a determination result that provides a predetermined bonus (jackpot), the start timing of the bonus effect (jackpot video, jackpot audio (BGM), etc.) provided as the bonus game is controlled to be a predetermined timing (e.g., timing at 00 seconds per minute) based on time information obtained from the timing means (RTC 292). With this configuration, even if adjacent pachinko machines 10 hit jackpots with a slight time difference (e.g., a time difference of about 30 seconds), the jackpot effects (video and audio) executed during the jackpot game are synchronized, making it possible to provide a unified effect even during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, by synchronizing the timing of the presentation that notifies the game status after a jackpot game (the presentation that notifies whether or not a special state will be entered after the jackpot game ends) during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide a more unified presentation.

Furthermore, when synchronizing the effects during a jackpot game based on time information obtained from the RTC 292 in this way, the content of the effects (video and audio) during a jackpot game may be different between adjacent pachinko machines 10. For example, by providing female and male patterns for the audio during a jackpot game, effects of different content can be combined through synchronized effects during a jackpot game, making it possible to provide a more unified effect.

In this embodiment, technology based on time information obtained from the RTC 292 is used to execute effects that create a sense of unity between adjacent pachinko machines 10, but other technologies may also be employed. For example, each pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an alarm unit (a display unit that identifiably illuminates information such as information that a jackpot game is in progress or information that a win/loss determination result indicating a jackpot has been reserved and stored) that identifiably notifies users of game-based information, and a detection unit (light detection sensor) that detects the notification mode of the alarm unit. The information notified by the alarm unit in one pachinko machine 10 may be detected by the detection unit of another pachinko machine 10 adjacent to that pachinko machine 10, thereby enabling the information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machine 10 to be distinguished. Based on the determination result, the adjacent pachinko machines 10 may be able to execute synchronized effects. This configuration makes it possible, for example, for adjacent pachinko machines 10 to synchronize and execute effects such as a jackpot on one of the machines.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 149 to 159. In this fifth embodiment, the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 differs from that of the fourth embodiment described above, and the display control relating to the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) differs from that of the third embodiment, but the other configurations are the same as those of the above-mentioned embodiments. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

The differences between the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the sorting unit 1164 are that balls entering the sorting unit 1164 are sorted in three directions, and that a through gate 67 (1067) is provided within the sorting unit 1164.

Furthermore, the differences between the display control of the fifth embodiment and the third embodiment are that the display is controlled to display a pseudo-variable display on the sub-LCD based on the judgment result of the pending stored pass/fail judgment, and that it is possible to switch the display content displayed on the main LCD and sub-LCD.

Figure 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 in this fifth embodiment. As shown in Figure 149, a distribution unit 1164 into which balls can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80 provided on the front of the game board 13. Balls that enter this distribution unit 1164 are configured to be distributed to the first winning slot 1964a, the left second winning slot 1964b, or the through gate 1067, which will be described later.

The configuration of the sorting unit 1164 will now be described with reference to Figure 150. Figures 150(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1164. The structure of the two sorting members 1900, 1950 provided inside the sorting unit 1164 is the same as the sorting member 900 used in the fourth embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that different reference numerals have been used for the convenience of explaining this embodiment.

First, using Figure 150(a), we will explain the process that occurs when a ball enters the sorting unit 1164. A ball that enters the sorting unit 1164 passes through the ball entry sensor 1164 and is stored in the storage section 1900c of the first sorting member 1900 located at the top of the sorting unit 1164. The game ball then flows down while rotating the sorting member 1900 clockwise due to its own weight, is guided by the guide member 1900z2, and is stored in the storage section 1950c of the second sorting member 1950.

A ball stored in the storage section 1950c of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 clockwise due to its own weight, and enters the first winning slot 1964a. Next, a ball that enters the distribution unit 1164 is stored in the storage section 1900a of the first distribution member, flows down while rotating the first distribution member 1900 counterclockwise, is guided by the guide member 1900z1, and passes through the through gate 1067. After passing through the through gate 1067, the ball passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of the game board 13 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

The next ball that enters sorting unit 1164 is stored in storage section 1900c of the first sorting member, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 clockwise, is guided by guide member 1900z2, and is stored in storage section 1950a of the second sorting member 1950.

A ball stored in the storage section 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down the second distribution member 1950, rotating it counterclockwise due to its own weight, and enters the left second winning opening 1964b. The next ball that enters the distribution unit 1164 then passes through the through gate 1067, following the same path as the flow that passed through the through gate 1067 described above.

As explained above, the distribution unit 1164 used in this embodiment is configured to repeatedly distribute entering balls in the following order: first winning opening 1964a → through gate 1067 → left second winning opening 1964b → through gate 1067.

In this way, by providing multiple winning slots and through gates within a single distribution unit 1164, it is possible to compact the installation space for various devices (winning slots, through gates, etc.) installed on the game board.Furthermore, by using the free space on the game board for decorations and presentations, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that further increases the enjoyment of playing.

Furthermore, the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment is configured to distribute balls in three directions by providing two distribution members with the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, depending on the playability of the pachinko machine 10, the same distribution member can be used whether the distribution unit distributes balls in two directions or three directions, thereby enabling costs to be reduced.

In this embodiment, the sorting unit 1164 is configured to change the destination of the balls based on the weight of the balls as they flow down, but it may also be configured to change the destination of the balls using an electrical drive source.

In addition, in the distribution unit 1164 of this embodiment, the ratio of distribution between the first winning slot 1964a, the left second winning slot 1964b, and the through gate 1067 is 1:1:2, but a configuration in which distribution is uniform among all may also be used.

In addition, this embodiment is provided with a ball entry detection sensor 1164 that detects balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164. This is used for control to detect ball jams within the distribution unit 1164, and is a control that is performed by determining whether a ball that entered the distribution unit 1164 entered through gate 1067, first winning opening 1964a, or left second winning opening 1964b within a specified time. Note that each of through gate 1067, first winning opening 1964a, and left second winning opening 1964b is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has entered (passed through).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to detect any fraudulent manipulation of the distribution members 1900, 1950 provided in the distribution unit 1164 to guide balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164 to a specific location, the order in which the balls enter (pass through) the through gate 1067, the first winning slot 1964a, or the left second winning slot 1964b is stored and compared with the ball entry order mechanically distributed by the distribution unit 1164 to determine whether any fraudulent activity is taking place.

In addition, if a detection sensor is installed that simultaneously detects balls that have entered the left second winning slot 1964b and the right second winning slot 640, the system is controlled so that the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior is not detected in game states where balls can enter the right second winning slot 640 (during time-saving mode, during special mode, etc.). By doing this, the rotation of the distribution members 1900, 1950 is restricted, and it is easy to detect the behavior of repeatedly placing game balls in a specific location (for example, the left second winning slot 1964b).

Furthermore, in order to prevent the fraudulent behavior described above, it is advisable to configure the sorting members 1900, 1950 so that balls can only flow down when they rotate. Specifically, in the sorting unit 1164 shown in Figure 150(a), sorting unit 1164 can be configured so that there is a location where the distance between the top of the wall that forms the storage section of the sorting member and the internal wall of sorting unit 1164 is less than the width of one ball. By configuring it in this way, balls cannot flow down within sorting unit 1164 unless the sorting member rotates, making it possible to prevent balls from flowing down to a specific location while restricting the rotation of the sorting member.

Next, we will explain the control of the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. Figure 151 is a time chart for explaining the flow of the special pattern variation effects performed using the third pattern display device 81 (main screen) and spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen) described below. As shown in Figure 151, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to be able to execute main variations (variations based on variation pattern commands) that are displayed in conjunction with the variation of the special pattern, and preliminary pseudo variations that are displayed in accordance with a winning command indicating that a gaming ball has entered the ball entrance.

First, the special pattern variation period shown in Figure 151 is the period during which the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first pattern display device 37. The special pattern variation periods corresponding to each of the wins 1 to 5 described below are shown as Variation 1 to Variation 5. The number of reserved balls for special patterns is the number of reserved special pattern determination results, and increases when a ball enters the first or second ball entry slot while the special pattern is varying or during a jackpot game, and decreases when a new special pattern variation begins.

A winning ball indicates whether the ball entered the first or second entry slot. For ease of explanation, in Figure 151, the first ball to enter is shown as Winning 1, followed by Winning 2, Winning 3, Winning 4, and Winning 5.

The first or second ball entrance is configured to determine whether a jackpot has been won when a ball enters it, and to pay out prize balls; however, the jackpot win determination is not made if the number of balls entering exceeds the number of reserved balls stored. On the other hand, prize balls are paid out for all balls entering. Here, a ball that enters a ball entrance and can receive a prize ball payout is referred to as a "ball entry," and a ball that enters a ball entrance and can receive a jackpot win determination is referred to as a "winning" ball; the explanation continues below.

The lower part of the time chart in Figure 151 shows third pattern variation 1 to third pattern variation 5, which are dynamic displays of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen).

The third symbol variation is composed of a main variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and a preliminary pseudo variation corresponding to the timing of receiving the winning command, and is configured so that the main variation can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the preliminary pseudo variation can be executed by the spherical LCD device 670.

Preliminary pseudo-change involves determining the change content of the third symbol based on the information contained in the winning command, and then using the period before the actual change begins (the period consisting of the remaining change time of the change display that has already started to change and the change time corresponding to the reserved symbol that has been previously stored) to pseudo-change the third symbol.

Next, referring to Figure 151, the timing of winning balls and the change of the third symbol will be explained. First, when Win 1 occurs when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is 0, the special symbol change (Change 1) begins and the third symbol display device 81 starts the actual change of the third symbol (main change of third symbol change 1). Then, if Win 2 occurs while Change 1 is occurring, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol increases to 1. Based on the occurrence of Win 2, a preliminary pseudo change of third symbol change 2 begins on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen). Then, when Win 3 occurs, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol increases to 2 and a preliminary pseudo change of third symbol change 3 is generated, but the preliminary pseudo change of third symbol change 2 continues to be displayed on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen).

In this embodiment, when pre-change pseudo variations occur multiple times, the pre-change pseudo variation corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the player is displayed on the spherical LCD device 670, and if the player does not select a reserved symbol, the pre-change pseudo variation corresponding to the reserved symbol from which the actual variation will begin next is displayed on the spherical LCD device 670. Note that this diagram explains the case where the player does not select a reserved symbol. Therefore, even when win 3 occurs, the pre-change pseudo variation of third symbol variation 2 based on win 2, from which the actual variation will begin next, will be displayed.

The method of displaying the preliminary pseudo fluctuations on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen) is not limited to the display method of this embodiment; for example, all preliminary pseudo fluctuations may be displayed simultaneously, or the player may select one of the preliminary pseudo fluctuations displayed simultaneously. Furthermore, preliminary pseudo fluctuations may be displayed on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen) only if the player selects the preliminary pseudo fluctuation display, or, if the player does not select the preliminary pseudo fluctuation display, a preliminary pseudo fluctuation display corresponding to a reserved symbol for which a performance with a high probability of winning (pre-reading performance) is being executed may be displayed.

Then, when special symbol variation 1 ends and variation 2 begins, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol decreases by one, the actual variation of third symbol variation 2 begins on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen), and the preliminary pseudo variation of third symbol variation 3 begins on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen). At this timing, third symbol variation 2 switches from the preliminary pseudo variation performed on the spherical LCD device 670 (sub-screen) to the actual variation performed on the third symbol display device. In this embodiment, to eliminate any sense of incongruity in this display change, the display of the preliminary pseudo variation fades out in time with the completion of the preliminary pseudo variation (the timing when the previous actual variation stops). This allows for a seamless continuation of the preliminary pseudo variation performed on the spherical LCD device 670 and the actual variation performed on the third symbol display device. Additionally, the background during the third symbol change is made the same for both the preliminary pseudo-change and the actual change, eliminating any sense of incongruity. The same process continues from there.

Next, referring to Figures 152 and 153, we will explain the display screen on which the preliminary pseudo-change and actual change of the third pattern change are performed. Figure 152(a) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the actual change is performed on the third pattern display device 81, which is the main screen, and the preliminary pseudo-change is performed on the spherical LCD device 670, which is the sub-screen.

The third pattern display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main screen) displays the changing third pattern in the main display area Dm, and displays the reserved pattern in the sub-display area Ds, just like in the second embodiment described above, and explanations of the same content will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main screen displays a mark (black circle) above the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds to clearly indicate the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently occurring pre-change. In Figure 152(a), the spherical LCD device 670 (hereinafter referred to as the sub-screen) displays that a pre-change corresponding to reserved symbol "1" is occurring. By using this configuration, the player can easily understand which of the multiple reserved symbols is corresponding to the pre-change that is occurring. In addition, the reserved symbol "3" is displayed in a different manner from the other reserved symbols, indicating a high probability of a jackpot.

Also, on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, "Screen Switch Push" is displayed. This is a display to notify the player that it is possible to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub-screen. The configuration for switching the display between the main screen and the sub-screen will be described later.

Figure 152(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo-variation is occurring on the main screen and a real variation is occurring on the sub-screen. In Figure 152(b), when Figure 152(a) is displayed, by operating frame button 22 and performing a screen switching operation, the image displayed in the main symbol and the image displayed in the sub-symbol are switched. In more detail, the image data displayed in the main display area Dm of the main screen and the image data displayed on the sub-screen are switched, and as shown in the figure, the display in the sub-display area Ds is the same as in Figure 152(a). In this way, by switching the content displayed on the main screen and sub-screen through player operation, the player can select the effect that interests them and view that effect on the main screen.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 105, the main screen is approximately six times larger than the sub-screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen can provide an overwhelmingly more impressive effect. By using this configuration in a pachinko machine equipped with screens of different sizes, a player can select a variable display that interests them from multiple variable displays (actual variables and preliminary pseudo-variables) that are executed simultaneously, and the selected variable display can be displayed on the main screen, making it possible to provide the player with the desired effect on a more impressive screen.

Figure 153(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo-change is taking place on the main screen and a real change is taking place on the sub-screen. Figure 153(a) shows the state in which Figure 152(b) is displayed, and the player has changed the target of the preliminary pseudo-change from reserved symbol "1" to reserved symbol "3." The reserved symbol that is the target of the preliminary pseudo-change can be selected by the player by operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is placed above the reserved symbol "3" selected by the player.

The main screen also displays a preliminary pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol "3," along with the "Chance!" indicator, which indicates a high probability of winning the jackpot.

Figure 153(b) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which actual fluctuations are being performed on the main screen using the reserved symbols that are the target of the preliminary pseudo fluctuations selected in Figure 153(a). As shown in this figure, actual fluctuations are initiated using the reserved symbols selected as the target of the preliminary pseudo fluctuations, and when the time comes for the preliminary pseudo fluctuations to end, the display content of each display screen is automatically switched so that actual fluctuations are displayed on the main screen. In addition, the "Chance!" indicator, which has been displayed since the preliminary pseudo fluctuation display and indicates a high probability of a jackpot, continues to be displayed in the actual fluctuation display. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a continuous presentation even when changing from preliminary pseudo fluctuations to actual fluctuations, preventing players from becoming confused.

In this image, since there are no reserved symbols, the sub-screen does not display a preliminary pseudo-change. In this case, when a preliminary pseudo-change display is not being performed, it is a good idea to use the sub-screen to display the actual change displayed on the main screen.

Above, we have explained the preliminary change display and actual change display performed by the main screen and sub-screen using schematic diagrams of each screen, but the following effects can be considered for display on each screen.

First, even if the display time of the actual variation display is set to be short, in other words, even if the variation time of the special symbol is set to be short, in order to be able to sufficiently arouse the player as to whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol will be a jackpot or not, the preliminary pseudo variation effect will be an expectation suggestion effect that shows the expectation level of the lottery result for the corresponding special symbol (for example, a comment display effect that suggests the stopping pattern of the third symbol, or an effect that selects and decides on the character's equipment), and the actual variation effect will be a result display effect that displays the result of the lottery (an effect where the third symbol simply stops, or an effect where the character attacks an enemy).

By using this type of effect, even if the actual fluctuation time is set short to increase the efficiency of play, the player can enjoy waiting for the results of the special pattern lottery to be displayed by using the pre-simulated fluctuation effect to suggest the level of expectation.

Secondly, to allow the player to experience the desired effect for as long as possible, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the third display device 81 is set to a display mode (for example, displaying multiple characters) that suggests the content of the preliminary pseudo-variation that will be displayed when the symbol is selected, and when the player selects the desired reserved symbol, a preliminary pseudo-variation is displayed in which the character displayed on the selected reserved symbol appears.

By using this type of effect, players can enjoy their desired effect as a pre-event pseudo-variation effect while still playing the traditional lottery game for special symbols. Furthermore, because the desired effect is provided using a pre-event pseudo-variation effect rather than a real-variation effect, players can experience the desired effect for a long period of time.

In addition, by setting the characters that appeared in the preliminary pseudo-variation performance to also appear in the actual variation performance using the reserved symbol that corresponds to that preliminary pseudo-variation performance, an even greater effect can be achieved.

The above describes the pre-event pseudo-variation effects of this embodiment, but configurations other than those described above may be adopted as long as they achieve the same effect.

For example, in this embodiment, the display of the secondary display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without switching to avoid confusing the player, but the display of the secondary display area Ds may also be switched at the same time. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to the generation of image data on the display control device 114.

Note that the pseudo advance variation used in this embodiment refers not only to the variation of the third symbol, but also to aspects that are displayed in the main display area Dm in conjunction with the variation of the third symbol, including, for example, the development of a character's story and changes in the background image.

It is also advisable to configure the operation of switching between the main screen and the sub-screen so that it is only valid for a set period of time. For example, it is advisable to allow screen switching only while the third symbol, which corresponds to this variation, is rapidly varying. This will prevent screen switching during periods when game-related processing is concentrated (periods when processing related to the stopped display of the third symbol is being performed), thereby reducing the processing burden on the control device.

In addition, when a preliminary pseudo-change is being performed on the sub-screen, the reserved symbol that is the target of the preliminary pseudo-change may be selectable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pre-play pseudo-change effect is performed on the sub-screen corresponding to the reserved special symbol, but, for example, a pre-play pseudo-change effect corresponding to the reserved normal symbol may also be performed. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the initial winning combinations of special symbols and the initial winning combinations of normal symbols are regularly allocated, such as the allocation unit 1164 described in this embodiment, it is possible to maintain a predetermined number of reserved normal symbols, making it possible to enjoy a pre-play pseudo-change effect.

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 154. This embodiment differs from the third embodiment described above in that it is clearly indicated that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114, and in that the contents of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 have been changed. As the other points are the same as those of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 154. Figure 154 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the third embodiment described above in that it explicitly states that the spherical LCD device 670 is connected to the display control device 114. Also, in this embodiment, a new ball entry sensor 1164a shown in Figure 150 is provided, but this is treated as part of the various switches 208.

Figure 155 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of a pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. This embodiment differs from the third embodiment described above in that a switching flag 233o is provided in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114.

The switching flag 233o is a flag used when determining whether to switch the display between the main screen (third pattern display device 81) and the sub-screen (spherical LCD device 670). It is set to ON when it is determined in command determination process 2 performed by the display control device 114 that there is a switching command (S2556 in Figure 158), and is set to OFF when it is determined in command determination process 2 that there is a display variation pattern command assigned an identification number corresponding to the pre-pseudo variation performance (S2554 in Figure 158).

<Regarding control processing executed by the voice and lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 156 and 157, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that a preliminary pseudo-variation setting process is executed in the main processing. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Figure 156, we will explain main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 156 is a flowchart showing main processing 3 in the fifth embodiment. Like main processing 2 in the fourth embodiment described above (see Figure 133), this main processing 3 executes processing from S1301 to S1354, and then executes the advance pseudo-variation setting processing (S1355) added in this embodiment. Then, like main processing 2 described above, it executes processing from S1317 to S1321, and repeats this processing.

Next, the advance pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) will be explained with reference to Figure 157. Figure 157 is a flowchart showing the advance pseudo-variation setting process (S1355). This advance pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is a process for setting advance pseudo-variations to be displayed on the main screen and sub-screen based on winning commands and player operations.

When the advance pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is set, it is first determined whether a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If a special symbol winning command has not been received (S5101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101: Yes), an advance pseudo-variation effect is selected based on the winning command (S5102).

In S5102, the information contained in the winning command is analyzed to determine whether it is a jackpot, a super miss, or a miss, and a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the analysis results. Note that the variation pattern selection table 222 of this embodiment also stores multiple variation patterns for pre-simulated variation effects. The selected variation pattern is then temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, it is determined whether a reserved symbol has been selected (S5103). This is to determine whether the player has selected a reserved symbol from among multiple reserved symbols that they wish to use in the preliminary pseudo-variable effect, and selection is made by operating the frame button 22.

If it is determined in S5103 that a reserved symbol has not been selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest reserved symbol and a preliminary pseudo-changing effect are set (S5107). The oldest reserved symbol is the reserved symbol corresponding to the oldest reserved memory among the reserved stored information, that is, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol that will start changing after the currently changing special symbol stops.

Identification information is assigned to identify each winning piece of information, and is information that enables the linking of various commands created based on a single ball entering a ball entry slot, and is assigned to the header section of each command. This identification information enables the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 to link commands with different transmission timing, such as the commands (reserved ball count command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see Figure 61) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the commands (variation pattern command, stop type command) created in the special pattern variation start process (see Figure 60).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5103 that a reserved symbol has been selected (S5103: Yes), identification information and a preliminary pseudo-variable effect corresponding to the selected reserved symbol are set.

Next, it is determined whether a switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is to determine whether an operation to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub-screen has been performed. If it is determined that no switching operation has been performed (S5105: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a switching operation has been performed (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to Figure 158, command determination process 2 (S2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 158 is a flowchart showing command determination process 2 (S2352). Command determination process 2 (S2352) is a process executed as part of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114. However, since the V interrupt process is the same as that in the second embodiment described above, its description will be omitted.

Furthermore, the processing from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination process is executed as part of the other command processing (S2553) in command determination process 2, and therefore a description of that content will be omitted.

When command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, processes S2401 to S2403 are performed in the same manner as the command determination process executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo variation performance is assigned (S2551). If it is determined that there is no variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo variation performance is assigned (S2551: No), it is then determined whether there is a switch command (S2552). If there is no switch command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing loops.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo variation effect is assigned (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to OFF (S2554), and the preliminary pseudo variation effect is terminated (S2555). Then, the process proceeds to S2552.

If it is determined in S2552 that a switching command has been received (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON and the process proceeds to S2553.

By setting the switching flag 233o using the command determination process 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub-screen in the drawing process described below. Furthermore, because the pre-simulated fluctuation effect is terminated using the identification information attached to the fluctuation pattern command sent from the main control device 110, it is possible to execute the pre-simulated fluctuation right up until the start of the actual fluctuation, even on gaming machines where the fluctuation time of special symbols changes depending on the number of symbols on hold at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, drawing process 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figure 159. Figure 159 is a flowchart showing drawing process 2 (S2356). This drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub-screen.

In drawing process 2 (S2356), first, a first drawing list is generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list related to the variable display of the third symbol (actual variable display) that is performed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Next, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list related to the variable display of the third symbol (preliminary pseudo variable display) that is set based on the winning command for the special symbol.

Then, it is determined whether the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903). If the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller, with the output destination set to the sub-screen (S3904). Then, the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller, with the output destination set to the main screen (S3905). In other words, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub-screen, the switching flag is set to ON, and an image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is displayed on the sub-screen, and an image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

Then, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the switching flag 233o is not set to on (S3903: No), the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller with the output destination set to the main screen (S3907). Then, the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller with the output destination set to the sub-screen (S3908), and processing proceeds to S3906.

By using the pre-simulated fluctuations described above, it is possible to solve the problems of the conventional technology described below.

Conventionally, there have been effects that change the state of reserved symbols based on information contained in a winning command. Using this conventional technology, it is possible to notify the player that among the reserved symbols stored in reserve memory, there is a high probability that the result of the win/loss judgment will be a jackpot. However, until the special symbol based on the reserved memory with a high probability of being a jackpot begins to change, the player must continue to watch the changing display of the third symbol corresponding to the change of other special symbols. Furthermore, in recent years, pachinko machines have been released that allow for multiple win/loss judgments by shortening the time it takes for the special symbols to change, but with these pachinko machines, the changing display of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is also short, posing a problem of lacking excitement in the game.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this embodiment, a preliminary pseudo-fluctuation is performed based on the information contained in the winning command before the actual fluctuation corresponding to that winning command begins. Therefore, from the time a winning command corresponding to a reserved memory with a high probability of a jackpot is received until the actual fluctuation corresponding to that winning command begins, a preliminary pseudo-fluctuation created based on the information contained in the winning command can be displayed. This allows the player to view the third symbol fluctuation display based on a reserved memory with a high probability of a jackpot while the third symbol actual fluctuation based on other reserved memories is occurring, making the third symbol fluctuation display more interesting. Furthermore, even if the actual fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened by setting a short fluctuation time for the special symbol, by providing a preliminary pseudo-fluctuation, it is possible to lengthen the third symbol fluctuation time based on one win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention may also be implemented in pachinko machines and other devices of a different type than those described in the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player after a jackpot symbol is displayed, provided that the ball lands in a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, and in which the special game state is entered provided that the ball lands in that special area. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines, such as arepachi, mahjong ball, and gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

An example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one that has a display device that displays a fluctuating sequence of multiple symbols and then confirms the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a predetermined number of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example, due to the operation of a control lever. The symbol change is stopped, for example, due to the operation of a stop switch or after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the confirmed symbol at the time of the change is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is triggered, awarding the player with a predetermined gaming value, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine were used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall would be able to treat only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls, which represent gaming value.

Furthermore, the configurations of the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in combination.

The system may be configured by combining some or all of the above-described embodiments and their variations. Furthermore, while the system is configured with multiple control devices, it is not limited to this and may also be configured with a single integrated control device.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various inventive concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Concept of the invention using the protrusion operation unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine A1 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force generated by the driving means, wherein the displacement member comprises a base displacement member formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotation position, and a relative displacement member disposed on the base displacement member and formed to be displaceable between a reference position and an extension position that extends outward from the base displacement member beyond the reference position, and is characterized in that the gaming machine A1 is capable of performing a first operation of rotating the base displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position, and a second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extension position.

Among gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that creates effects by rotating a displacement member around a rotatably supported base end (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-92634 (paragraphs 0175-0189 and Figure 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the tip end of the displacement member is positioned at a predetermined position in front of the liquid crystal display device, while by rotating the displacement member in another direction opposite to the first direction, the displacement member is retracted outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device (retracted position). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, if the displacement member has a small outer shape, it is difficult for the player to fully view the displacement member at the predetermined position in front of the liquid crystal display device, preventing the full effect of the effects. Meanwhile, if the displacement member has a large outer shape, a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). Gaming machine A1 was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows players to fully view the displacement member in the specified position while minimizing the space required for the retracted position.

In other words, according to gaming machine A1, the displacement member comprises a base displacement member that is rotatable between a retracted position and a rotational position, and a relative displacement member that is disposed on the base displacement member and is displaceable between a reference position and a protruding position that protrudes outward from the base displacement member beyond the reference position. The gaming machine is capable of performing a first operation that rotates the base displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position, and a second operation that displaces the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the protruding position. Therefore, when the base displacement member in the retracted position is moved to the rotational position by the first operation, the relative displacement member in the reference position is moved to the protruding position by the second operation, causing the relative displacement member to protrude outward from the base displacement member. This allows the displacement member to be made larger overall, allowing the player to clearly see the displacement member in the rotational position, thereby fully demonstrating its dramatic effect.

On the other hand, when the base displacement member in the rotated position is moved to the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member in the extended position is moved to the reference position by the second operation, thereby preventing the relative displacement member from projecting outward from the base displacement member. This allows the displacement member to be made smaller overall, thereby reducing the space required to accommodate the displacement member in the retracted position. As a result, space can be secured for arranging other components and devices.

The second operation only needs to be performed at least until the device is placed in the retracted position (i.e., until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least part of the first operation and at least part of the second operation may be performed in an overlapping manner.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that: Gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is positioned forward of the plane of movement of the displacement member and has an opening formed therein; when the base displacement member 440 is positioned in a rotation position by a first action, at least a portion of the relative displacement member is visible to the player through the opening in the front member; and when the relative displacement member is positioned in a protruding position by a second action, the area of the relative displacement member that is visible to the player through the opening in the front member is expanded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can produce an effect in which a relative displacement member that has been retracted to a retracted position first appears in the opening of the front member through a rotational movement (first action), allowing the player to see only a portion of the relative displacement member, and then a linear movement (second action) expands the area in which the player can see the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base displacement member, and the second operation causes the relative displacement member to slide relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has the advantage that the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base displacement member, and the second action causes the relative displacement member to slide between the reference position and the extended position relative to the base displacement member. Therefore, compared to when the second action rotates the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member, the space required to displace the relative displacement member from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, thereby freeing up space for arranging other components and devices. Furthermore, because the displacement of the relative displacement member by the second action can be made different from the displacement of the base displacement member by the first action, the dramatic effect achieved by performing the first and second actions can be enhanced.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the relative displacement member in gaming machine A3 is arranged on the base displacement member in a position where their longitudinal directions are aligned, and the direction of the sliding displacement is along the longitudinal direction of each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 achieves the same effects by arranging the relative displacement member in a position aligned with the base displacement member in their longitudinal directions and by sliding the displacement member in the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member. This allows the displacement member to expand and contract as a whole by sliding the relative displacement member in the longitudinal direction relative to the base displacement member. Therefore, by extending the displacement member as a whole in the rotated position, it can be made fully visible to the player, and its dramatic effect can be fully realized. Meanwhile, by shortening the displacement member as a whole in the retracted position, it is possible to reduce the space required to accommodate the displacement member, thereby ensuring space for arranging other components and devices.

Furthermore, with gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position first appears from the side through the opening of the front member using a rotational movement (first action), allowing only a portion of the relative displacement member to be viewed by the player. Then, using a linear movement (second action), it extends into the opening of the front member, expanding the area of the relative displacement member that the player can see. This allows the visibility of the relative displacement member to be expanded by a different movement mode (linear movement) than the movement mode used when it first appears (rotational movement), giving the player a sense of surprise due to the change in movement mode, a sense of speed due to the expanded visibility due to the linear movement, and a sense of unity due to the combined and continuous movement of these combined movements. As a result, it is possible to achieve a dramatic effect that cannot be achieved when the relative displacement member simply appears and disappears from the opening of the front member using linear movement alone (moving back and forth between the retracted position and the extended position).

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that gaming machine A4 is equipped with a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is arranged in a position that overlaps with the displacement member arranged in the retracted position in a front view.

Gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A4, is equipped with a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member. This transmission means is positioned so that it overlaps the displacement member positioned in the retracted position when viewed from the front, allowing the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member positioned in the retracted position to be effectively used as space for arranging the transmission means.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that gaming machine A5 is equipped with a holding member that holds the drive means, transmission means, and displacement member, the drive means and displacement member are arranged on one side of the holding member, and the displacement member is arranged in the retracted position with the drive means located on an extension line of the longitudinal direction of the displacement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 has a drive means and a displacement member disposed on one side of the holding member, which allows for a smaller dimension in the direction connecting the one side and the other side of the holding member compared to, for example, a case in which the drive means and displacement member are disposed on one side and the other side of the holding member, respectively. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed in the retracted position with the drive means positioned on an extension of its longitudinal direction, the displacement member and drive means can be arranged in a straight line. This effectively reduces the space required for the retracted position.

Any of gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmission means. The transmission member includes a rotating member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the drive means, and a link member that is journaled at a predetermined position between one side position and the other side position at a position eccentric to the rotation center of the rotating member, the one side position being rotatably journaled on the holding member, and the other side position being connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member. When the rotating member rotates between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, the link member is displaced to rotate the base displacement member via the relative displacement member of the displacement member, thereby executing the first operation. When the rotating member rotates between the intermediate rotation position and a second rotation position, the link member is displaced to displace the relative displacement member of the displacement member relative to the base displacement member, thereby executing the second operation.

According to gaming machine A7, the link member is pivotally supported at a predetermined position between one side position and the other side position at a position eccentric to the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotatably supported on the holding member and the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member. Therefore, by rotating the rotating member with the driving force of the drive means, the rotation of the rotating member can be transmitted to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in response to the displacement of the link member, thereby performing the first operation. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base displacement member in response to the displacement of the link member, thereby performing the second operation. In other words, gaming machine A6 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines A1 to A6, and can perform two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, using a single drive means, thereby reducing component costs and, accordingly, product costs.

Another possible transmission mechanism would be a gear mounted on one side of the link member, which meshes with a gear mounted on the outer periphery of the rotating member to displace the link member; however, such a structure would require a large amount of space for arranging the rotating member and link member. In contrast, gaming machine A6 has the rotating member pivotally supported at a predetermined position between one side and the other side of the link member, allowing the rotating member and link member to be arranged so that they overlap when viewed from the front. This overlap reduces the space required for arranging the rotating member and link member.

Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via a transmission member, the rigidity of the holding member can be used to suppress shaking of the relative displacement member.

Gaming machine A8 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, and is characterized by including a decorative member disposed in a position that overlaps, in a front view, at least a portion of the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the base displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first action.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 allows the base displacement member of the displacement member to rotate with the first action, causing at least a portion of the displacement member and the decorative member to intersect when viewed from the front, enhancing the presentation effect.

In gaming machine A8, one longitudinal side of the base displacement member serves as the center of rotation during the first operation, and the relative displacement member is arranged to be slidable on the front side of the base displacement member while aligning their longitudinal directions. The second operation causes the relative displacement member to slide relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position. The decorative member is arranged in a position where, in a front view, at least a portion of the decorative member overlaps with the displacement trajectory at the tip of the rotation of the displacement member when the base displacement member is rotated by the first operation. When the base displacement member is positioned at the rotation position by the first operation, the decorative member no longer overlaps with the displacement member in a front view. The relative displacement member is shaped so that the rotation center side is closer to the front than the tip of the rotation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A8, gaming machine A9 has a configuration in which the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located closer to the front than the rotation tip side, i.e., the rotation tip side is located recessed toward the back side. This prevents contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member when the base displacement member is rotated by the first action. In this case, because one longitudinal side of the base displacement member serves as the rotation center during the first action, the displacement member's free end, the rotation tip side, is likely to swing back and forth during the first action, increasing the risk of contact with the decorative member. This makes the configuration of gaming machine A9 particularly effective.

On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the base position to the extended position by the second action, the relative displacement member arranged on the front side of the base displacement member is shaped so that the rotation center side is positioned closer to the front than the rotation tip side, allowing the relative displacement member to be positioned further forward (closer to the player) to increase the impact.

In gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located closer to the front than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member means that the shape between the rotation tip side and the rotation center side can be any shape, and for example, it can change in a step-like manner, or it can change gradually and continuously in a linear or curved manner.

A gaming machine A10 is any one of gaming machines A6 to A9, and is equipped with a pin member provided on one of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member, and a slide groove provided on the other of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member that slidably receives the pin member and enables sliding displacement of the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member, and is characterized in that the position where the other side of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the tip of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction than the pin member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A6 to A9, gaming machine A10 has the advantage that the position where the other side of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the tip of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction than the pin member, so the point where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved closer to the tip of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction. In other words, the point where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved away from the point where the base displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is easier to prevent the relative displacement member from swinging back and forth.

<Concept of the invention using the composite operation unit 500 as an example>
Gaming machine B1 is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving means, and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner, and is also provided with a driven member that is displaceably connected to the driven member, and a displacement regulating means that regulates the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, wherein the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member is regulated by the displacement regulating means, so that when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that uses driving force from a drive means to displace a displacement member between, for example, a protruding position in front of a liquid crystal display device and a retracted position retracted from the protruding position in a direction away from the display area of the liquid crystal display device to create effects (see JP 2011-200790 A (see, for example, paragraph 0095, Figures 11 to 15)). This gaming machine changes the displacement pattern of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the drive means or by making the output intermittent. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, which are configured to change the output of the drive means, have the problem of complex control. Meanwhile, the displacement member only changes its displacement speed in response to changes in the output of the drive means, while its displacement direction remains constant, resulting in insufficient change in its displacement pattern. Gaming machine B1 was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can vary the displacement mode of the displacement member while maintaining a constant output from the drive means.

In other words, according to gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member is regulated by the displacement regulating means, so that the driven member can be displaced relative to the driven member and driven in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. In other words, even if the driven member is displaced along a constant trajectory, such as a linear or arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from that of the driven member. Furthermore, because this change in the displacement pattern is caused by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from that of the driven member. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement pattern of the driven member while maintaining a constant output from the drive means.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the displacement regulating means in gaming machine B1 includes a first groove portion formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and a first guided portion that is guided along the first groove portion and is formed on the other of the driven member or the holding member.

Gaming machine B2 achieves the same effects as gaming machine B1, but in addition, the displacement regulating means includes a first groove and a first guided portion. By guiding the first guided portion along the first groove, the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be regulated. Therefore, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the relative displacement of the driven member relative to the driven member can be regulated according to the contour (shape) of the first groove. In other words, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove, the manner of relative displacement of the driven member relative to the driven member can be freely set. In this way, the displacement regulating means is comprised of a groove-shaped portion (first groove) and a portion guided by that portion (first guided portion). This simplifies the structure, reducing product costs and improving the reliability and durability of the moving part.

Gaming machine B3 is a gaming machine B1 or B2, characterized in that the driven member is connected to the driven member in a state that allows at least rotation.

According to gaming machine B3, in gaming machines B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a state in which it is at least rotatable. Therefore, when the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member in response to displacement of the driven member, the relative angle of the driven member to the driven member can be changed, allowing the player to recognize a strong change in the manner of displacement.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner.

In gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a state in which it can rotate and slide. Therefore, when the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member in response to displacement of the driven member, not only can the relative angle of the driven member to the driven member be changed by rotation, but the relative positions of the two can also be changed by sliding displacement at the same time, thereby increasing the variety of changes that can be made to the manner of displacement.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the displacement regulating means in gaming machine B4 includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and a second guided portion that is guided along the second groove portion and is formed on the other of the driven member or the holding member.

Gaming machine B5 achieves the same effects as gaming machine B4, but in addition, the displacement regulation means includes a second groove and a second guided portion. The second guided portion is guided along the second groove, thereby regulating the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member. Therefore, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the relative displacement of the driven member relative to the driven member can be shaped according to the contour (shape) of the second groove. In other words, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove, the relative displacement of the driven member relative to the driven member can be freely set. In particular, when the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member, providing both a guide structure formed by a combination of a first groove and a first guided portion and a guide structure formed by a combination of a second groove and a second guided portion not only increases the variety of variations that can be imparted to the displacement pattern, but also, even when the driven member can be displaced in multiple directions relative to the driven member, the two guide structures can guide such displacement, thereby preventing unstable displacement and improving the reliability of the movable member.

In addition, in gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement regulating means is composed of a groove-shaped portion (second groove portion) and a portion guided by that portion (second guided portion), which simplifies the structure, reduces product costs, and improves the reliability and durability of the movable member.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member and the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, the driven member has a groove-shaped connecting groove portion through which the second guided portion is inserted in a rotatable and slidable manner, and the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner by inserting the second guided portion into the connecting groove portion.

Gaming machine B6 achieves the same effects as gaming machine B5, but in addition, a second groove is formed in the holding member and a second guided portion is formed in the driven member. The second guided portion is inserted into the connecting groove of the driven member, connecting the driven member to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner. This allows the second guided portion to serve both the role of regulating the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member by being guided by the second groove, and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so that it can be displaced relative to the driven member by being inserted into the connecting groove. This reduces the number of parts, reducing product costs, and simplifies the structure, improving the reliability and durability of the movable member.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B6, at least the portion of the holding member where the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, the driven member has an abutment portion that abuts against the periphery of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the abutment portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion.

Gaming machine B7 achieves the same effects as gaming machine B6, but in addition, the driven member is provided with a contact portion that contacts the periphery of the second groove portion of the holding member, and this contact portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion. Therefore, even when the driven member rotates relative to the holding member (second groove portion), the contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (periphery of the second groove portion) remains constant, preventing changes in the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable manner.

Gaming machine B8 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B7, characterized in that the holding member is configured to be able to hold the driving means, driven member, and driven member in a state in which the driven member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the driven member.

Gaming machine B8 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines B1 to B7, but the holding member is configured to hold the driving means, driven member, and driven member in a state in which the driven member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means and the driven member can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the driven member. Therefore, the driving means, driven member, and driven member can be unitized into a single device held by the holding member. This reduces the manufacturing costs of assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing costs of assembling the gaming machine by attaching the unit to the gaming machine main body.

Gaming machine B9 is the gaming machine B8, characterized in that the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B8, gaming machine B9 has the advantage that the first groove is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, making it easier to secure space for forming the first groove. In other words, the dead space of the holding member, which must be formed with a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and unitize the drive means, driven member, and driven member, can be utilized to secure space for forming the first groove. This increases the degree of freedom in the contour (shape) and extension length of the first groove, thereby increasing the variety of changes that can be made to the displacement pattern.

In gaming machine B9, the displacement regulating means comprises a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member and guided along the second groove portion; the holding member comprises a first opposing portion and a second opposing portion that face each other across the driven member; the first groove portion is formed in one of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion, and the second groove portion is formed in the other of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion. Gaming machine B10 is characterized in this.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B9, gaming machine B10 has a first groove formed in one of the first and second opposing portions of the holding member that face each other across the driven member, and a second groove formed in the other. This allows these first and second grooves to be formed without considering the relative positions of the other. In other words, if both the first and second grooves are formed in one of the first and second opposing portions, these first and second grooves must be formed so that they do not intersect, limiting flexibility. In contrast, gaming machine B10 allows the contours (shapes) and extension lengths of both the first and second grooves to be set without considering their relative positions, increasing flexibility and thereby increasing the variety of changes that can be made to the displacement pattern.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B5 to B7, characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at the start or end that is larger than a reference value.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B5 to B7, gaming machine B11 reduces the load during the initial stage of starting to drive a stopped driven member using a drive means, allowing for a smooth start of that drive.

Gaming machine B12 is any one of gaming machines B5 to B7, and is equipped with a shielding member that shields the driven member from view, and at least one of the first groove and second groove has a radius that is smaller than a reference value in the area corresponding to the period from when a portion of the driven member begins to be exposed outside the area of the shielding member until the entire driven member is exposed outside the area of the shielding member.

Gaming machine B12 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines B5 to B7, but also allows the movement of the driven member to be faster in the area where it is partially hidden by the shielding member, making it possible to create effects such as the driven member suddenly appearing from behind the shielding member or quickly disappearing behind the shielding member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotational motion unit 600 as an example>
Gaming machine C1 is equipped with a holding member, a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably arranged on the holding member, and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in a circular ring shape and is fitted concentrically around the first rotating body.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, create effects by rotating multiple rotating bodies (see JP 2011-30847 A (see, for example, paragraph 0162, Figures 42 to 46)). This gaming machine synchronizes multiple rotating bodies, which are spaced apart on the left and right, in the same direction, creating a sense of unity in the effects. However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, because the multiple rotating bodies are spaced apart on the left and right, it is difficult for the player to associate their rotations with each other and recognize them, and the effects of the effects created by the rotation of the multiple rotating bodies cannot be fully realized. Gaming machine C1 has been developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for the player to associate the rotation of the multiple rotating bodies with each other, thereby fully realizing the effects of the effects created by the rotation of the multiple rotating bodies.

In other words, with gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is fitted concentrically around the first rotating body, allowing the first and second rotating bodies to rotate concentrically. This makes it easier for players to associate the rotation of the first rotating body with the rotation of the second rotating body, and as a result, the effects of the presentation achieved by rotating multiple rotating bodies can be fully utilized.

Gaming machine C2 is a gaming machine C1, characterized in that the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has a cylindrical first rotating body, which allows for the placement of a performance element on the inner periphery of the first rotating body. This allows for the first rotating body, which surrounds the performance element, and the second rotating body, which further surrounds the first rotating body, to each rotate around the performance element. As a result, the performance of rotating multiple rotating bodies can be more effectively achieved.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body comprises a main body portion inserted into the holding member, a one-side flange portion that protrudes outward in a flange-like manner from one axial side of the main body portion, and a second-side flange portion that protrudes outward from the other axial side opposite the one-side flange portion and faces the one-side flange portion across the holding member; and the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body portion of the first rotating body and is disposed between the one-side flange portion of the first rotating body and the holding member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 has a first rotating body that is inserted into the holding member and one-side and other-side flanges that are formed on one and other axial sides of the main body and face each other across the holding member. The second rotating body is fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body and is disposed between the one-side flange of the first rotating body and the holding member, thereby simplifying the holding structure of the first and second rotating bodies by the holding member.

In other words, with the above configuration, the main body of the first rotating body is inserted into the holding member, allowing the first rotating body to be rotatably held by the holding member. Furthermore, by abutting the other side flange portion of the first rotating body against the holding member, displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and by abutting one side flange portion of the first rotating body against the second rotating body, which then abuts against the holding member, displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be restricted.

Furthermore, because the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body, the second rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body of the first rotating body. Furthermore, by abutting the second rotating body against one flange portion of the first rotating body and abutting the other flange portion of the first rotating body against the holding member, displacement of the second rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and by abutting the second rotating body against the holding member, displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be restricted.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that gaming machine C3 is provided with a first gear and a second gear that are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and that the first rotating body and the second rotating body each have gears engraved on their outer surfaces that mesh with the first gear and the second gear.

Gaming machine C4 achieves the same effects as gaming machine C3, but is also equipped with a first gear and a second gear that are disposed on a holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body each have gears engraved on their outer peripheries that mesh with the first gear and the second gear, simplifying the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via these first gear and second gear. This structure is particularly effective when the main body of the first rotating body is formed cylindrical and a performance component or the like is disposed on the inner periphery of the main body.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side of the holding member opposite the one side, the first gear meshes with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotor, and the second gear meshes with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotor.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C4, gaming machine C5 has a second gear disposed on one side of the holding member and a first gear disposed on the other side opposite the one side of the holding member, with the first gear meshing with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotor, and the second gear meshing with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotor. Therefore, compared to, for example, a case in which both the first gear and the second gear are meshed with the first rotor and the second rotor, respectively, on one side of the holding member, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first rotor and the second rotor via the first gear and the second gear can be simplified.

Furthermore, by arranging the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear meshes on the other side of the holding member opposite the one side on which the one flange portion of the first rotating body, the main body, and the second rotating body are arranged, the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body can be shielded by the holding member from a player looking straight at one side of the holding member. In other words, the structure for shielding the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body so that they cannot be seen can be simplified by using the holding member.

Gaming machine C6 is either gaming machine C4 or C5, and is characterized by being equipped with a first transmission means that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first gear, and a second transmission means that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the second gear.

Gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines C4 and C5, is equipped with a first transmission means and a second transmission means that transmit the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, allowing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to be rotated by a single drive means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the drive means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means via separate transmission paths. Therefore, by setting, for example, the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, it is possible to vary the rotational patterns of the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) even when two rotating bodies are rotated by a single drive means. As a result, the effect of rotating multiple rotating bodies can be more effectively achieved.

Gaming machine C7 is any of gaming machines C4 to C6, characterized in that the holding member is cylindrically formed and has a cylindrical portion protruding to one side, and the main body of the first rotating body is rotatably arranged on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, and the second rotating body is rotatably arranged on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

Gaming machine C7 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines C4 to C6, but in addition, the holding member is cylindrically shaped and includes a cylindrical portion that protrudes to one side. The main body of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. This allows the second rotating body to be fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion of the holding member. In other words, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. This allows the positions of the first and second rotating bodies to be determined based on the holding member, and the positional relationship between the gears engraved on the outer periphery of the first and second rotating bodies and the first and second gears disposed on the holding member can be determined based on the holding member. This stabilizes the meshing between the gears engraved on the outer periphery of the first and second rotating bodies and the first and second gears. As a result, uneven gear wear and drive resistance can be suppressed.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the first rotating body in gaming machine C7 has a plurality of protrusions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extend in the axial direction of the main body, and are scattered circumferentially at predetermined intervals.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C7, gaming machine C8 has a main body of the first rotating body that protrudes from the outer surface of the main body, extends in the axial direction of the main body, and has multiple protrusions that are scattered circumferentially at predetermined intervals. This limits the contact area between the main body of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member to the protrusions, allowing the main body of the first rotating body to rotate smoothly on the inner circumferential side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

It is preferable that the protrusion be curved in an arc shape that convexes outward in a cross section cut along a plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the main body. This is because it reduces the contact area with the inner surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, allowing the main body of the first rotor to rotate more smoothly on the inner side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the main body of the first rotating body in gaming machine C8 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body has multiple inner protrusions that protrude from the inner surface of the main body, extend in the axial direction of the main body, and are positioned in phase with the protrusions.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C8, gaming machine C9 has a cylindrical main body of the first rotating body, and the first rotating body has multiple inner protrusions that protrude from the inner surface of the main body, extend in the axial direction of the main body, and are located in the same phase as the protrusions (i.e., on the back side of the area where the protrusions are formed). Therefore, when the main body of the first rotating body is molded using a resin mold, the shape of the main body of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical) on both the outer and inner surfaces, ensuring moldability.

Gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the first rotating body in gaming machine C9 has a main body that is divided in the axial direction, and the divided parts are fastened together with screws, and the screws are fastened at positions corresponding to the protrusions.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C9, gaming machine C10 has the first rotating body whose main body is divided in the axial direction, and the divided parts are fastened together with screws that are fastened at positions corresponding to the protrusions. In other words, the protrusions also serve as the screw fastening portions for fastening the screws, ensuring the strength of the screw fastening portions.

Gaming machine C11 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C10, and is characterized by including a light-emitting means that is arranged on one side of the holding member in a position that overlaps the rotational trajectory of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body when viewed from the front, and is configured to be able to emit light.

According to gaming machine C11, any of gaming machines C1 to C10 is provided with a light-emitting means disposed on one side of the holding member in a position that overlaps the rotation trajectory of at least one of the first or second rotating bodies when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the first and second rotating bodies are rotated concentrically, the player can see the light emitted by the light-emitting means on the rotation trajectory of at least one of the first or second rotating bodies. In other words, it is possible to create an effect in which the first and second rotating bodies each rotate at a position that overlaps the light emitted by the light-emitting means, thereby more effectively creating an effect in which multiple rotating bodies each rotate.

Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that, in at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in the gaming machine C11, first portions in which the light-emitting means is visible and second portions in which the light-emitting means is invisible are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction in an area where the rotational trajectory overlaps the light-emitting means in a front view.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C11, gaming machine C12 has first sections in which the light-emitting means is visible and second sections in which the light-emitting means is invisible, which are arranged alternately around the circumference of at least one of the first or second rotating bodies in an area where the rotation trajectory overlaps the light-emitting means when viewed from the front.As a result, when the first and second rotating bodies rotate, the first and second sections alternately pass in front of the light-emitting means, allowing the player to intermittently see the light emitted by the light-emitting means.In other words, it is possible to rotate the first and second rotating bodies, respectively, and associate the intermittent light emission of the light-emitting means with that rotation, thereby more effectively creating an effect in which multiple rotating bodies are rotated.

<Feature D group> 8-piece reserved performance (exciting time)
a display means for displaying an identification pattern corresponding to one of the pieces of information stored in the storage means before the judgment condition is met; a pattern change means for changing the display mode of the identification pattern based on a predetermined trigger; a variable determination means for determining the identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern change means; and a variable notification means for notifying the identification pattern that has been determined to be variable by the variable determination means, wherein the variable determination means determines the identification pattern that is different from normal as the identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern change means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a gaming ball enters a starting slot, and variable effects or jackpot effects corresponding to the lottery results are displayed on an LCD screen. Gaming machines have been proposed that, when a winning ball enters a starting slot, store the right to enter the lottery up to a certain number and announce that number using symbols (for example, JP 2013-13528 A). However, with this type of pachinko machine, if the reserved lottery results are determined and announced in advance, the player's desire to enter the starting slot decreases, and they end up stopping play and waiting for the lottery results, resulting in boredom. Gaming machine D1 was designed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine D1, information is acquired by the acquisition means upon the establishment of an acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Upon the establishment of a judgment condition, a win/lose judgment is performed by the win/lose judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification pattern corresponding to the one piece of information stored in the storage means before the judgment condition was established is displayed by the display means. The display mode of the identification pattern is changed by the pattern change means based on a predetermined trigger. The identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern change means is determined by the variable determination means. The identification pattern determined to be changeable by the variable determination means is notified by the variable notification means. The variable determination means determines an identification pattern that is different from the normal state as an identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern change means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This encourages the player to play so that more than the predetermined number of pieces of information are stored. This increases players' motivation to play and reduces the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that gaming machine D1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation determination means that determines whether the operation means has been operated, and the predetermined trigger is when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated.

Gaming machine D2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D1. That is, the operation determination means determines that an operation means operable by the player has been operated. When the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, this is considered to be a predetermined trigger. This increases the enjoyment of operating the operation means. This has the effect of preventing the problem of players becoming bored early on.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable determination means variably determines the identification symbols for multiple symbols based on the number of pieces of information being equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 has the effect of encouraging players to memorize more than the predetermined number of pieces of information, since the variable determination means variably determines the identification symbols for multiple symbols based on whether the number of pieces of information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D3, when the variable determination means has determined that multiple identification symbols are variably selected, one of the identification symbols is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a predetermined order based on the determination that an operation has been performed by the operation determination means.

Gaming machine D4 has the same effect as gaming machine D3, but in addition to this, when the variable determination means has determined that multiple identification symbols can be changed, one identification symbol is changed and displayed by the symbol changing means in a predetermined order based on the determination that an operation has been performed by the operation determination means, thereby providing the player with the effect of being notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Gaming machine D5 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, and is characterized in that it has a preliminary win/loss determination means that performs a win/loss determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is met, and the pattern changing means changes and displays the information corresponding to the identification pattern to be changed in a notification manner based on the win/loss determination result by the preliminary win/loss determination means.

Gaming machine D5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, before the determination conditions are met, a win/loss determination is made by the preliminary win/loss determination means based on information stored in the storage means. Information corresponding to the identification pattern to be changed is displayed by the pattern changing means in a notification manner based on the win/loss determination result by the preliminary win/loss determination means. This allows the player to be notified of the win/loss determination result before it is actually notified. This has the effect of making the player interested in the display manner changed by the pattern changing means as they play.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D5, when the variable determination means variably determines multiple identification symbols, the information corresponding to any of the variably determined identification symbols is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification manner based on the result of a determination made by the advance win/loss determination means for any of the information.

Gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game when multiple identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means. Any of the information corresponding to the variably determined identification symbols is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification manner based on the result of the preliminary win/loss determination means. This allows the player to know the result of the win/loss determination before it is displayed as an identification symbol.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D6, when the multiple identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, one notification mode is displayed by variably displaying the multiple identification symbols.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D6, gaming machine D7 has the effect of increasing the entertainment value of the game by diversifying the notification modes, since when multiple identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, a single notification mode is displayed by variably displaying the multiple identification symbols.

<Feature D'group> 8 reserved performance 2 (exciting time)
A gaming machine D'1 is characterized by comprising: an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means when a judgment condition is fulfilled; a display means for displaying at least an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before the judgment is made by the judgment means; and a pattern changing means for changing the display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification patterns displayed on the display means to a predetermined display mode when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before the judgment is made by the judgment means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a predetermined trigger.

In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a game ball enters a starting slot, and variable effects or jackpot effects corresponding to the lottery results are displayed on an LCD screen. Gaming machines have been proposed that, when a ball enters a starting slot, store up to a certain number of lottery rights and announce that number using symbols (for example, JP 2013-13528 A). However, with this type of pachinko machine, if the reserved lottery results are determined and announced in advance, players may subsequently lose motivation to enter the starting slot, and may stop playing and wait for the lottery results, resulting in boredom. Gaming machine D'1 was designed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine D'1, when an acquisition condition is met, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. When a judgment condition is met, the judgment means makes a judgment based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The display means displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means. Based on a predetermined trigger, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the symbol changing means changes the display mode of at least a predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined display mode.

This encourages players to play so that more than the specified number of pieces of information are stored. This increases players' motivation to play and reduces the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine D'2 is characterized in that it includes gaming machine D'1, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated, and the predetermined trigger is when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated.

Gaming machine D'2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D'1. That is, the operation determination means determines that an operation means operable by the player has been operated. Then, when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, a predetermined trigger is triggered. This increases the enjoyment of operating the operation means. This has the effect of preventing the problem of players becoming bored early on.

Gaming machine D'3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a variable notification means for identifiably notifying an identification symbol whose display mode changes when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, before the operation means is operated.

Gaming machine D'3 achieves the same effects as gaming machine D'2, but also has the advantage that the variable notification means identifies the identification symbol whose display mode changes when it determines that the operating means has been operated, before the operating means is operated. This allows the player to operate the operating means knowing which identification symbol's display mode will change, increasing the enjoyment of operating the operating means. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored early on.

Gaming machine D'4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D'3, the variable notification means changes the display mode of the identification symbol to a variable notification mode, thereby identifiably notifying the identification symbol whose display mode changes when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, before the operation means is operated.

Gaming machine D'4 has the same effect as gaming machine D'3, but in addition, the variable notification means notifies the player by changing the identification pattern itself to a variable notification mode, which allows the player to easily understand which identification pattern's display mode will change.

Gaming machine D'5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D'4, when the variable notification means has changed multiple identification symbols to the variable notification mode, one identification symbol is changed and displayed by the symbol changing means in a predetermined order based on the determination by the operation determination means that an operation has been performed.

Gaming machine D'5 has the same effect as gaming machine D'4, but in addition, when multiple identification symbols are changed to a variable notification mode by the variable notification means, one identification symbol is changed and displayed in a predetermined order based on the operation determination means determining that an operation has been performed, thereby providing the player with an effect of being able to easily understand the notification.

Gaming machine D'6 is any one of gaming machines D'1 to D'5, and is characterized in that it has a pre-determination means that makes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination means makes a determination, and the pattern changing means changes the display mode of the identification pattern to a predetermined display mode in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means.

Gaming machine D'6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D'1 to D'5. That is, before a determination based on the determination conditions is made, a determination is made by the pre-determination means based on information stored in the storage means. Then, the display mode of the identification pattern is changed to a predetermined display mode and displayed in a notification mode based on the determination result by the pre-determination means. This allows the player to be notified of the determination result of the pre-determination means before the determination means is executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to play with interest in the display mode changed by the pattern changing means.

Gaming machine D'7 is characterized in that in gaming machine D'6, the predetermined order is the order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbols is stored in the storage means, and the symbol changing means changes the display mode of the identification symbols corresponding to the latter half of the order to the notification mode.

Gaming machine D'7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D'6. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification symbols is changed by the symbol changing means is the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification symbols corresponding to the latter half of that order is changed to a notification mode. This increases the enjoyment of operating the operating means. This has the effect of preventing the problem of players becoming bored early on.

Gaming machine D'8 is any one of gaming machines D'1 to D'7, and is characterized by including an additional symbol changing means that, while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing means is being displayed on the display means, also changes the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information newly stored in the storage means to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

Gaming machine D'8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D'1 to D'7. That is, while an identification symbol changed to a predetermined display mode by the symbol changing means is displayed on the display means, the display mode of an identification symbol corresponding to information newly stored in the storage means is changed to a predetermined display mode by the additional symbol changing means based on a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to encourage players to continue playing even after a predetermined number of pieces of information have been stored. This has the effect of increasing players' motivation to play and reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine D'9 is characterized in that it comprises: second pattern changing means for changing the display mode of at least the second predetermined number of the identification patterns displayed on the display means to a predetermined second mode based on a predetermined trigger when the determination means has executed a determination on all of the information corresponding to the identification patterns changed to the predetermined display mode by the pattern changing means, and the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number.

Gaming machine D'9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D'1 to D'8. That is, when the determination means has executed a determination on all of the information corresponding to the identification symbols that have been changed to a predetermined display mode by the symbol changing means, and the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number, the second symbol changing means changes the display mode of at least the second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means to the predetermined second mode based on a predetermined trigger. This allows the player to play so that more than the predetermined number of pieces of information are stored, and then encourages the player to play again so that more than the second predetermined number of pieces of information are stored. This increases the player's motivation to play and reduces the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine D'10 is any one of gaming machines D'1 to D'9, characterized in that the predetermined display mode is a single display mode that combines the display modes of multiple identification symbols.

Gaming machine D'10 combines the display modes of multiple identification symbols into a single display mode, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D'1 to D'9, which has the effect of adding an element of surprise to the display mode of the identification symbols, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Feature Group E> Blank symbols are displayed in a different manner from push button previews A gaming machine E1 having: lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; display means for displaying the lottery results by the lottery means in a plurality of pattern rows each consisting of a plurality of different main symbols and sub-patterns different from the main symbols between the main symbols, thereby being able to display the lottery results by the lottery means in a combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed between each pattern row; and bonus granting means for granting an advantageous bonus to a player based on the display of a combination of the main symbols indicating a specific lottery result on the display means; sub-pattern changing means for changing the display mode of the sub-patterns of the pattern row stopped and displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; composition determination means for determining whether or not to display the sub-patterns changed and displayed by the sub-pattern changing means in a composite display mode based on the lottery results by the lottery means; and composite display mode display means for displaying the composite display mode on the display means based on the determination by the composition determination means to display in the composite display mode.

Here, among conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known ones that hold a lottery when a gaming ball enters a starting slot, and then display variable effects or jackpot effects based on the lottery results on an LCD screen. Such effects include various patterns of effects, such as effects designed to create a sense of anticipation in the player or effects designed to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Among these types of pachinko machines, there are proposed gaming machines that are equipped with player-operable operating means (such as switches) and that change the game effects by the player operating the operating means (e.g., JP 2010-075741 A). For example, some such pachinko machines hold a lottery to determine whether the game effects will be changed when the player operates the operating means, in order to execute a variety of effects when the player operates the operating means. However, with this type of pachinko machine, the game presentation changes at certain times depending on the player's operation, which can give the player a monotonous impression of the game and cause the player to quickly become bored with the game. Gaming machine E1 was created to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine E1, a lottery is executed by a lottery means based on the establishment of lottery conditions. The results of the lottery are displayed by a display means as a combination of the stopped main symbols in each symbol sequence by displaying multiple symbol sequences consisting of multiple different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbols between the symbols. A bonus advantageous to the player is awarded by a bonus awarding means based on the display of a combination of main symbols indicating a specific lottery result on the display means. The sub-symbol display mode of the stopped sub-symbol sequence is varied by a sub-symbol varying means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A combination determination means determines whether to display the sub-symbols varied and displayed by the sub-symbol varying means in a composite display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the determination by the combination determination means to display in a composite display mode, the composite display mode is displayed on the display means by a composite display mode displaying means. This provides a fresh experience for the player by displaying the composite display mode. This effectively reduces the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized by having, in gaming machine E1, an operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated, and an operation variable display means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol to a specific display mode and displaying it when the operation determination means determines that the operation has been performed and the sub-symbol display mode has been changed by the sub-symbol changing means.

Gaming machine E2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E1. That is, the operation determination means determines that an operation means operable by the player has been operated. When the operation determination means determines that an operation has been performed, and the sub-symbol display mode has been changed and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means, that display mode is changed to a specific display mode and displayed by the operation variable display means. This increases the player's enjoyment of operating the operation means. This has the effect of allowing the player to participate in the game.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E2, the operation variable display means changes the display mode of the sub-symbol to one of the multiple specific display modes based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 has the effect of changing the display mode of the sub-symbol to one of a plurality of specific display modes based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and displaying the changeable display means. This makes it possible to diversify the display modes of the sub-symbols, thereby providing players with a fresh and exciting presentation.

Gaming machine E4 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, and includes: a symbol sequence stopping means that dynamically displays the symbol sequence for a predetermined period of time and then statically displays the symbol sequence in a predetermined order; and a dynamic display period determination means that, when two or more symbol sequences are statically displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, determines the dynamic display period of the symbol sequence; and, when the predetermined condition is met, the dynamic display period determination means determines a specific dynamic display period that is different from normal display periods.

Gaming machine E4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, after a symbol sequence is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is statically displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol sequences are statically displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol sequence is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. When a predetermined condition is met, the dynamic display period determination means determines a specific dynamic display period that is different from normal times.

This allows players to determine that the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner during specific dynamic display periods. This allows players to remain interested in playing during dynamic display periods. This has the effect of reducing the problem of players becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine E5 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E4, characterized in that the combination determination means is configured to easily determine the combination display mode when the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 to E4, gaming machine E5 is configured so that when the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a specific result, the composite display mode is easily determined by the composite determination means. This allows players to play in the hope that the composite display mode will be displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, when the composite display mode is displayed in any of gaming machines E1 to E5, it has a composite change means that, when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, changes the composite display mode to a specific display mode based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

Gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E5, when a composite display mode is displayed, the composite display mode is changed by the composite change means to a specific display mode based on the results of the lottery by the lottery means, based on the determination by the operation determination means that the operation means has been operated. This allows the player to intervene in the game, and has the effect of reducing the problem of players becoming bored with the game early on.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, when the combination determination means determines that the combination display mode should be used, gaming machine E6 has a prohibition means for prohibiting the display mode changed and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means from being changed and displayed, even if the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E6, gaming machine E7 has the effect that, when the composite determination means determines that a composite display mode is to be displayed, the prohibition means prohibits the display mode that has been changed and displayed by the sub-pattern changing means from being changed and displayed even if the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. Therefore, by operating the operation means before the composite display mode is displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the composite display mode will be displayed.

<Feature E'group> Change blank patterns to push button notices and display 2
a display means for displaying a pattern string having a plurality of different main patterns and a sub-pattern different from the main pattern as identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the pattern string on the display means; a dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for which the pattern string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the gaming machine E'1 further comprises: a sub-pattern changing means for changing the display mode of the sub-pattern during the dynamic display period when a predetermined condition is established; and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for the remaining period of the dynamic display period when the sub-pattern is changed to a specific display mode by the sub-pattern changing means and displayed.

Here, among conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known ones that hold a lottery when a gaming ball enters a starting slot, and then display variable effects or jackpot effects based on the lottery results on an LCD screen. Such effects include various patterns of effects, such as effects designed to create a sense of anticipation in the player or effects designed to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Among these types of pachinko machines, there are proposed gaming machines that are equipped with player-operable operating means (such as switches) and that change the game effects by the player operating the operating means (e.g., JP 2010-075741 A). For example, some such pachinko machines hold a lottery to determine whether the game effects will be changed when the player operates the operating means, in order to execute a variety of effects when the player operates the operating means. However, with this type of pachinko machine, the game presentation changes at certain times depending on the player's operation, which can give the player a monotonous impression of the game and cause the player to quickly become bored with the game. Gaming machine E'1 was created to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine E'1, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. A pattern string including a plurality of different main patterns and a sub-pattern different from the main pattern is displayed on the display means as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. The pattern string is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The period during which the pattern string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a first benefit awarding means awards a first benefit advantageous to the player. When a predetermined condition is established, the sub-pattern changing means changes the display mode of the sub-pattern during the dynamic display period. When the sub-pattern is displayed in a specific display mode, the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect for the remaining period of the dynamic display period. This makes it possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-pattern. This has the effect of reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine E'2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E'1, the specific effect is an effect that displays a composite display mode in which multiple sub-symbols that have become the specific display mode are combined after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-symbol changing means.

Gaming machine E'2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E'1, displays a composite display mode that combines multiple sub-patterns in a specific display mode as a specific effect, thereby providing players with a fresh effect and reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine E'3 is characterized by having an operating means operable by a player and a predetermined condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined condition is met based on the operation of the operating means, in addition to gaming machine E'1 or E'2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E'1 or E'2, gaming machine E'3 uses a predetermined condition determination means to determine whether a predetermined condition is met based on the operation of an operating means that can be operated by the player, thereby increasing the enjoyment the player has of operating the operating means. This has the effect of allowing the player to participate more in the game.

Gaming machine E'4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E'3, the sub-pattern changing means changes the sub-pattern displayed in the specific display mode to the composite display mode based on the operation of the operating means when the sub-pattern is displayed in the specific display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E'3, gaming machine E'4 changes the display of sub-symbols from a specific display mode to a composite display mode based on the operation of the operating means. This means that the player must actively operate the operating means to execute the specific effect, which encourages the player to operate the operating means. This has the effect of allowing the player to participate more in the game.

Gaming machine E'5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines E'1 to E'4, the display means displays multiple symbol sequences as identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means, and has a symbol sequence stop means that dynamically displays the multiple symbol sequences for a predetermined period of time and then statically displays them in a predetermined order based on the determination result of the determination means, and when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the number of sub-symbols that are statically displayed is changed based on the determination result of the determination means.

Gaming machine E'5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines E'1 to E'4. That is, the display means displays multiple symbol sequences as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. After dynamically displaying multiple symbol sequences for a predetermined period of time, the symbol sequence stopping means causes the symbols to be statically displayed in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determination means. When a specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the number of sub-symbols statically displayed varies based on the determination result by the determination means. This allows the specific effect using the sub-symbols to be based on the determination result by the determination means, and makes it possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-symbols. This has the effect of reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, or when there is a high possibility that the determination result of the determination means will be a specific determination result, it is advisable to increase the number of sub-symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means. In this way, a large number of sub-symbols increases the likelihood of a jackpot, making it possible to get the player interested in specific effects. This has the effect of reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine E'6 is any one of gaming machines E'1 to E'5, characterized in that the sub-symbol changing means is configured to easily change and display the sub-symbol in the specific display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result.

Gaming machine E'6 has the same effect as any of gaming machines E'1 to E'5, but the sub-symbol changing means is configured to change the sub-symbol to a specific display mode and make it more likely to be displayed when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. This allows players to play in the hope of seeing a specific display mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine E'7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines E'2 to E'6, the specific display mode is a display mode of the sub-symbols that is changed to characters, the composite effect mode is a character string that combines multiple sub-symbols that have become the specific display mode, and the specific effect displays the composite effect mode by combining at least a portion of the characters displayed as the specific display mode.

Gaming machine E'7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E'2 to E'6. That is, by combining multiple sub-patterns that are displayed and transformed into characters in a specific display mode, a character string is displayed as a composite effect mode. A composite effect mode that combines at least a portion of the characters displayed in a specific display mode is displayed as a specific effect. This allows the player to predict the character string that will be displayed as the composite display mode by looking at the multiple characters displayed in a specific display mode. This has the effect of providing players with a fresh effect and preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

It is also possible to provide a partial notification before the composite effect mode is displayed that a character displayed in a specific display mode will be used in the string of characters displayed in the composite effect mode. This has the effect of providing hints for predicting the string of characters to be displayed in the composite display mode, which can be entertaining for the player.

Gaming machine E'8 is any one of gaming machines E'3 to E'7, characterized by having: effect storage means for storing multiple effects to be executed when the dynamic display is performed; and effect selection means for selecting a first effect including the specific effect from the effects stored in the effect storage means when the predetermined condition establishment determination means determines that the predetermined condition is established; and selecting a second effect not including the specific effect when the predetermined condition establishment determination means does not determine that the predetermined condition is established.

Gaming machine E'8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines E'3 to E'7. That is, the effect storage means stores multiple effects to be executed when dynamic display is performed. The effect selection means selects the first or second effect based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means. As a result, a different effect is selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means while dynamic display is being performed. Therefore, since only the effect while dynamic display is being performed can be changed based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means, there is the effect of reducing the amount of data related to dynamic display.

<Feature Group F> A gaming machine F1 characterized by having: a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode that executes an extended presentation when an SPGT ends; a timing means that is capable of measuring time even in a power outage state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is below a predetermined voltage value; an acquisition means that acquires time information from the timing means; an elapsed time determination means that determines an elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means; a switch display means that, when the elapsed time determination means determines that a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, switches the presentation mode displayed on the display means to a specific presentation mode and displays it until a predetermined period has elapsed; and an extension period setting means that, when the predetermined period has elapsed and it is determined that a predetermined condition has been met, sets an extension period for extending the period for displaying the specific presentation mode.

Here, among conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that are equipped with an RTC (real-time clock) and are configured to execute the same effects or change the display mode at the same timing across multiple gaming machines based on the time data measured by the RTC (for example, JP 2013-31695 A). Such pachinko machines are configured to change the display mode when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, this type of pachinko machine has the problem that once the period during which the display mode is changed ends, players lose interest in playing and become bored with the game. Gaming machine F1 was designed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

According to gaming machine F1, the presentation mode is displayed by the display means. The timing means continues to measure time even in a power outage state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is below a predetermined voltage value. The acquisition means acquires time information from the timing means. The elapsed time determination means determines the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means. If the elapsed time determination means determines that the predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, the presentation mode displayed on the display means until the predetermined period has elapsed is switched to a specific presentation mode, which is displayed by the switching display means. If the predetermined period has elapsed and it is determined that a predetermined condition has been met, the extension period setting means sets an extension period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed. This allows the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed to be extended or not to be extended depending on whether the predetermined condition is met, providing players with unexpected presentations. This effectively prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine F2 is characterized in that it has: an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; a lottery means for conducting a lottery for the information based on the fulfillment of a lottery condition; a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result obtained by the lottery means; and a pre-lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is fulfilled; and the predetermined condition is configured to be more likely to be fulfilled when the information stored is determined to be a specific lottery result by the pre-lottery means.

Gaming machine F2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine F1. That is, when an acquisition condition is met, information is acquired by the acquisition means. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. When a lottery condition is met, a lottery is held by the lottery means for the information. Identification information indicating the lottery result held by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. A lottery is held by the pre-lottery means based on information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is met. The pre-lottery means is configured to make it easier for the specified condition to be met when information determined to be a specific lottery result is stored. This extends the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed, allowing players to hope for a specific lottery result. This has the effect of allowing players to play in the hope that the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed will be extended.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining the period for which the identification information is dynamically displayed in gaming machine F2, and if the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed in a temporarily frozen state.

Gaming machine F3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F2. That is, the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by dynamic display period determination means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed in a temporarily stopped state. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the dynamic display in time with the end of the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed. This has the effect of allowing the player to easily determine the end timing.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time until the elapsed time has elapsed.

Gaming machine F4 has the same effect as gaming machine F3, but in addition, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display format for a predetermined period of time until the elapsed time has elapsed, which has the effect of making it possible to determine that the elapsed time has elapsed from the specific dynamic display format.

<Feature F'group> Execute an extension effect at the end of SPGT 2
A gaming machine F'1 characterized by having a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, a predetermined period setting means capable of setting a predetermined period, a predetermined period determination means for determining whether the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means has arrived, a switching display means for switching the presentation mode displayed on the display means to a specific presentation mode when the predetermined period determination means determines that the predetermined period has arrived, and an extension period setting means for setting an extension period for extending the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed when the predetermined period has elapsed and it is determined that a predetermined condition has been met.

Here, conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known that are configured to execute the same effects or change display modes at the same time across multiple gaming machines (for example, JP 2013-31695 A). Such pachinko machines are equipped with, for example, an RTC (real-time clock), and are configured to change the display mode when the time information obtained from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, this type of pachinko machine has the problem that once the period during which the display mode is changed ends, the player's motivation to play decreases and the player becomes bored with the game. Gaming machine F'1 was created to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

According to gaming machine F'1, a presentation mode is displayed on the display means. A predetermined period determination means determines whether the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means has elapsed. If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed, the display switching means switches the presentation mode displayed on the display means to a specific presentation mode and displays it. If it is determined that a predetermined condition has been met when the predetermined period has elapsed, the extension period setting means extends the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed. This allows the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed to change depending on whether the predetermined condition is met, providing players with a surprising presentation. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine F'2 is characterized in that it has a timing means capable of timing, an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the timing means, and an elapsed time determination means for determining the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, wherein the predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the timing means, and the predetermined period determination means determines whether the predetermined period has elapsed based on the time information acquired from the timing means.

Gaming machine F'2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F'1. That is, the acquisition means acquires time information from the clocking means, and the elapsed time determination means determines the elapsed time based on that time information. The predetermined period setting means sets a predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the clocking means, and the predetermined period determination means determines whether the predetermined period has arrived based on the time information acquired from the clocking means. This allows a specific presentation mode to be displayed based on the time information, making it possible to display a unified presentation mode across multiple pachinko machines. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine F'3 is characterized in that it has: an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; a judgment means for making a judgment on the information based on the establishment of a judgment condition; and a pre-judgment means for making a judgment based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means before the judgment condition is established; and the predetermined condition is configured to be more likely to be established when the information that has been judged to be a specific judgment result by the pre-judgment means is stored.

Gaming machine F'3 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F'2. That is, information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of an acquisition condition is stored in the storage means, and a determination is made on the information by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. A determination is made based on information acquired by the information acquisition means before the determination condition is established by the pre-determination means. The predetermined condition is configured to be more likely to be established when information determined to be a specific determination result by the pre-determination means is stored. This extends the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed, allowing players to hope for a specific determination result. This has the effect of allowing players to play in the hope that the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed will be extended.

Gaming machine F'4 is characterized in that it has an information input means capable of inputting specific information in either gaming machine F'2 or F'3, and the predetermined period setting means sets the period during which the specific presentation mode is performed to at least a first predetermined period that is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period that is different from the first predetermined period, based on the specific information input by the information input means and time information obtained from the timing means.

Gaming machine F'4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines F'2 or F'3. Specifically, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting means sets the period during which a specific presentation mode is performed based on the specific information input by the information input means and time information obtained from the timing means. This makes it possible to set the period during which a specific presentation mode is performed based on two pieces of information: the inputtable information and the time information. Therefore, by combining the two pieces of information, it is possible to set multiple patterns of periods during which a specific presentation mode is performed, which has the effect of providing unexpected presentations. Another effect is that the period during which a specific presentation mode is performed can be changed by changing the time information without changing the inputtable information.

Gaming machine F'5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F'4, the predetermined period setting means sets the second predetermined period to a period longer than the first predetermined period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F'4, gaming machine F'5 has the advantage that the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set to a period longer than the first predetermined period. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game by making the player guess whether a specific presentation pattern continues for longer than the first predetermined period, due to the fact that a predetermined condition has been met, or the period set as the second predetermined period.

Gaming machine F'6 is any one of gaming machines F'3 to F'5, characterized by having dynamic display period determination means for determining the period for which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and temporary stop display means for displaying the identification information in a temporary stop state if the elapsed time has elapsed before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed.

Gaming machine F'6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F'3 to F'5. That is, the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by dynamic display period determination means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed in a temporarily stopped state. This allows the dynamic display to be temporarily stopped in time with the end of the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed. This has the effect of allowing the player to easily determine the end timing.

Gaming machine F'7 is characterized in that it further comprises a specific effect display means that, when the temporary stop is displayed by the temporary stop display means and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, causes the display means to display a specific effect display mode after the predetermined period has elapsed.

Gaming machine F'7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F'6. That is, when a temporary stop is displayed by the temporary stop display means and an extension period is set by the extension period setting means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific effect display means displays a specific effect display mode on the display means. As a result, a player for whom an extension period has been set will have a specific effect display mode displayed from the temporary stop display state, and will be able to feel a sense of superiority because a specific effect display mode different from the surrounding players will be displayed from the same temporarily stopped display as the surrounding players. This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine F'8 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion effect display means for displaying a suggestion effect on the display means during the specified period, which indicates that the extension period has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F'7, gaming machine F'8 displays a suggestion effect on the display means during a specified period of time, indicating that an extension period has been set by the suggestion effect display means. This increases the player's motivation to play and has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on.

Gaming machine F'9 is any of gaming machines F'2 to F'8, characterized in that the timing means is configured to be able to measure time even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine.

Gaming machine F'9 has the same effect as any of gaming machines F'2 to F'8, but the timing means can measure time even when power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, so it can always measure time regardless of the power-on state of the gaming machine, and can accurately execute specific presentation modes based on time information.

Gaming machine F'10 is any one of gaming machines F'2 to F'9, characterized in that the timekeeping means has a correction means capable of correcting the current time.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F'2 to F'9, gaming machine F'10 has the advantage that the timekeeping means can correct the current time using the correction means, allowing specific presentation modes to be accurately executed based on time information.

Gaming machine F'11 is any of gaming machines F'4 to F'10, characterized in that the information input means has a set input period during which information can be input.

Gaming machine F'11 has the same effect as any of gaming machines F'4 to F'10, but also has the advantage that the period during which information can be input is set by the information input means. For example, by setting the business hours as the input period, the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed during business hours will not be changed, and a specific presentation mode can be executed at the desired timing.

Gaming machine F'12 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F'11, the acquisition means acquires day of the week information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means sets the period for displaying the specific presentation mode to differ depending on the day of the week information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F'11, gaming machine F'12 has the effect of acquiring day of the week information using an acquisition means, and setting the period for displaying a specific presentation mode using a predetermined period setting means so that the period varies depending on the acquired day of the week information. This has the effect of allowing the period for displaying a specific presentation mode to be changed by changing the day of the week information without changing the information that can be input.

Gaming machine F'13 is any of gaming machines F'4 to F'12, characterized in that the predetermined period setting means can set multiple periods in chronological order during which the specific presentation mode is displayed.

Gaming machine F'13 has the same effect as any of gaming machines F'4 to F'12, but also has the advantage of simplifying the process of setting the period during which a specific presentation mode is displayed, since the predetermined period setting means can set multiple periods in chronological order during which a specific presentation mode is displayed.

Gaming machine F'14 is characterized in that in gaming machine F'13, the acquisition means acquires time information as the time information, the predetermined period setting means is capable of setting the period for displaying the specific presentation mode from among a plurality of different periods, and even if the period for displaying the specific presentation mode is varied by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for displaying the specific presentation mode is unified based on the time information.

Gaming machine F'14 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F'13. That is, the acquisition means acquires time information. The predetermined period setting means allows the period for displaying a specific presentation mode to be set from a plurality of different periods, and even if different periods are set, the timing for displaying the specific presentation mode is unified based on the time information. As a result, even if the periods for displaying a specific presentation mode are different, the timing for displaying the specific presentation mode can be unified, so the player cannot determine the length of the period for which the specific presentation mode is displayed based on the timing for displaying the specific presentation mode. This allows the player to play while remaining interested in whether the period for displaying the specific presentation mode will exceed the predetermined period, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on.

Gaming machine F'15 is characterized by having, among gaming machines F'1 to F'14, a display timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the display of the presentation mode displayed on the display means at predetermined intervals within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means, a presentation mode execution means for executing the presentation mode when predetermined conditions are met, and a presentation mode standby means for causing the presentation mode execution means to wait for the timing set by the display timing setting means to execute the presentation mode.

Gaming machine F'15 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines F'1 to F'14. That is, within a predetermined period set by a predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of a presentation mode displayed on the display means is set at predetermined intervals by a display timing setting means. Execution of a selection mode performed by a presentation mode execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is delayed until the timing set by a presentation mode waiting means. As a result, presentation modes executed within the predetermined period are also executed at predetermined timings. This allows for the creation of a unified presentation across multiple gaming machines, and has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine F'16 is characterized by comprising, among gaming machines F'2 to F'14, a display execution time setting means that sets the time for executing the display of the presentation mode displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means, a presentation mode execution means that executes the presentation mode based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a presentation mode standby means that causes the presentation mode execution means to wait for the time set by the display execution time setting means before executing the presentation mode.

Gaming machine F'16 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F'2 to F'14. That is, the display execution time setting means sets the time for executing the display of the presentation mode displayed on the display means at a predetermined time interval based on time information acquired by the acquisition means. The presentation mode standby means causes the execution of a selection mode performed by the presentation mode execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition to wait until the set time. As a result, presentation modes executed within a predetermined period of time are also executed for a predetermined time. This allows for the creation of a unified presentation across multiple gaming machines, and has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine F'17 is any one of gaming machines F'1 to F'16, and is characterized in that it has an operation means capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation performed by the operation means.

Gaming machine F'17 has the same effect as any of gaming machines F'1 to F'16, but also has the effect of easily setting the predetermined period to a desired period because the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set based on a predetermined operation by the operating means.

Gaming machine F'18 is any one of gaming machines F'1 to F'17, characterized by having: a performance information output means for outputting performance information including at least specific performance mode information based on the specific performance mode displayed on the display means; a performance information input means for inputting information corresponding to the performance information output by the performance information output means; and a specific performance mode setting means for setting the specific performance mode based on the information input by the performance information input means.

Gaming machine F'18 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F'1 to F'18. That is, the effect information output means outputs effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on a specific effect mode displayed on the display means. The effect information input means inputs information corresponding to the effect information. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. This makes it possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on other pachinko machines, making it possible to freely synchronize effect modes. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play and reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the gaming machine.

It is also advisable to include information about the time at which a specific effect is displayed in the effect information output by this gaming machine F'18. This has the effect of synchronizing the time at which a specific effect is displayed, regardless of when the specific effect setting means sets the specific effect.

Gaming machine F'19 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F'18, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that allows it to be acquired by an external device.

Gaming machine F'19 has the same effect as gaming machine F'18, but also has the effect of facilitating the setting of specific presentation modes by the specific presentation mode setting means, since the presentation information output means displays presentation information in a format (e.g., a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (e.g., a mobile terminal).

<Feature Group G> A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a first display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured with a first display size, the first pixels being of a pattern size displayed on a fisheye LCD; a second display means arranged in close proximity to the display area of the first display means and having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels configured with a second display size smaller than the first display size; and a display control means capable of moving and displaying the same pattern data from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means.

In contrast to conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines have been proposed that offer innovative presentations by arranging multiple display devices and presenting different display modes to players (for example, JP 2005-270417 A). However, this type of pachinko machine suffers from a drawback in that the load on display control increases, resulting in an increased control burden. Gaming machine G1 was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load.

According to gaming machine G1, the first display means is configured with a display area formed by an array of multiple first pixels configured with a first display size. The second display means is configured with a display area arranged adjacent to the display area of the first display means and formed by an array of multiple second pixels configured with a second display size smaller than the first display size. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means, or from the second display means to the first display means. In this way, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols at different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbols, the load of the control process for changing the magnification rate of the display data, etc. can be reduced. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

Gaming machine G2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine G1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined magnification ratio.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has the advantage that the first display size and second display size are each configured with a predetermined magnification ratio, allowing the displayed patterns to be displayed at different sizes at the predetermined magnification ratio.

Gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine G1 or G2, the pattern data displayed commonly on the first display means and the second display means is image information that is displayed in a scrolling manner.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 has the advantage that the symbol data displayed on both the first and second display means is image information that is scrolled, allowing symbols to be scrolled across both the first and second display means, providing players with a fresh and exciting experience.

A gaming machine G4 is any one of gaming machines G1 to G3, and includes a storage means in which the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored, and a display data setting means for acquiring the symbol data from the storage means and setting the magnification ratio at which the acquired symbol data is displayed on the display control means, and when the display control means moves and displays symbol data at the same magnification ratio set by the display data setting means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means.

Gaming machine G4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored in the storage means. The symbol data is acquired from the storage means, and the magnification factor at which the acquired symbol data is displayed on the display control means is set by the display data setting means. When the display control means moves and displays symbol data from the first display means to the second display means, or from the second display means to the first display means, the display control means moves and displays symbol data with the same magnification factor set by the display data setting means. This allows the symbol display size to be different between the first display means and the second display means without having to change and set the magnification factor. This has the effect of reducing the load caused by the process of changing the symbol display size and displaying it.

Gaming machine G5 is any of gaming machines G1 to G4, characterized in that the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G1 to G4, gaming machine G5 has the advantage that the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means, making it possible to present display effects that give the player a different impression.

A gaming machine G6 is any one of gaming machines G1 to G5, and is characterized in that it has lottery means that executes a lottery when lottery conditions are met, and the display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means using the symbols.

Gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of lottery conditions. The display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means in the form of a pattern. This has the effect of allowing the lottery result to be determined by the pattern, and attracting the player's interest in the dynamic display of the pattern.

Gaming machine G7 is characterized in that in gaming machine G6, the symbols representing the identification information are enlarged and scrolled on the second display means using data set at a predetermined magnification, then moved to the first display means using the information set at that magnification, and then scrolled and displayed on the first display means using the data set at the predetermined magnification.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G6, gaming machine G7 has the advantage that the symbols representing the identification information are enlarged and displayed by scrolling data set at a predetermined magnification ratio on the second display means, and then moved to the first display means using the information set at that magnification ratio, and then the symbols representing the identification information are scrolled by the display control means using the data set at the predetermined magnification ratio on the first display means. Therefore, when the magnification ratio is changed when the symbols are moved from the second display means to the first display means for display, the processing required to change the magnification ratio can be reduced.

<Feature G'group> Pattern size 2 displayed on fisheye LCD
A gaming machine G'1 is characterized by having a first display means having a display area configured by an array of a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size, a second display means arranged in close proximity to the display area of the first display means and having a display area configured by an array of a plurality of second pixels configured in a second display size smaller than the first display size, and a display control means capable of moving and displaying the same pattern data from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means.

In contrast to conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines have been proposed that offer innovative presentations by arranging multiple display devices and presenting different display modes to players (for example, JP 2005-270417 A). However, this type of pachinko machine has the problem of increasing the control burden, which increases the load on display control. Gaming machine G'1 was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

According to gaming machine G'1, the first display means is configured with a display area formed by an array of multiple first pixels configured with a first display size. The second display means is configured with a display area arranged adjacent to the display area of the first display means and formed by an array of multiple second pixels configured with a second display size smaller than the first display size. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means, or from the second display means to the first display means. In this way, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols at different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbols, the load of the control process for changing the magnification rate of the display data, etc. can be reduced. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

Gaming machine G'2 is characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined magnification ratio in gaming machine G'1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G'1, gaming machine G'2 has the advantage that the first display size and second display size are each configured with a predetermined magnification ratio, allowing the displayed symbols to be displayed at different sizes at the predetermined magnification ratio.

Gaming machine G'3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine G'1 or G'2, the symbol data displayed commonly on the first display means and the second display means is image information that is displayed in a scrolling manner.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G'1 or G'2, gaming machine G'3 has the advantage that the symbol data displayed on both the first and second display means is image information that is scrolled, allowing symbols to be scrolled across both the first and second display means, providing players with a fresh and exciting experience.

Gaming machine G'4 is any one of gaming machines G'1 to G'3, and includes a storage means in which the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored, and a display data setting means for acquiring the symbol data from the storage means and setting the magnification ratio at which the acquired symbol data is displayed on the display control means. When the display control means moves and displays symbol data at the same magnification ratio set by the display data setting means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means, the display control means moves and displays symbol data at the same magnification ratio set by the display data setting means.

Gaming machine G'4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines G'1 to G'3. That is, the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored in the storage means. The symbol data is acquired from the storage means, and the magnification ratio at which the acquired symbol data is displayed on the display control means is set by the display data setting means. When the display control means moves and displays symbol data from the first display means to the second display means, or from the second display means to the first display means, the display control means moves and displays symbol data with the same magnification ratio set by the display data setting means. This allows the symbol display sizes to be different between the first display means and the second display means without having to change and set the magnification ratio. This has the effect of reducing the load caused by the process of changing the symbol display size and displaying it.

Gaming machine G'5 is any of gaming machines G'1 to G'4, characterized in that the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G'1 to G'4, gaming machine G'5 has the advantage that the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means, making it possible to present display effects that give the player a different impression.

Gaming machine G'6 is any one of gaming machines G'1 to G'5, and has lottery means that executes a lottery when lottery conditions are met, and the display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means using the symbols.

Gaming machine G'6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines G'1 to G'5. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of lottery conditions. The display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means in the form of a pattern. This has the effect of allowing the lottery result to be determined by the pattern, and attracting the player's interest in the dynamic display of the pattern.

Gaming machine G'7 is characterized in that in gaming machine G'6, the symbols representing the identification information are enlarged and scrolled on the second display means using data set at a predetermined magnification, then moved to the first display means using the information set at that magnification, and then scrolled and displayed on the first display means using the data set at the predetermined magnification.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G'6, gaming machine G'7 has the advantage that, when the symbols representing the identification information are enlarged and displayed by scrolling data set at a predetermined magnification ratio on the second display means, they are then moved to the first display means using the information set at that magnification ratio, and then the symbols representing the identification information are scrolled by the display control means using the data set at the predetermined magnification ratio on the first display means. Therefore, when the symbols are moved from the second display means to the first display means and displayed at a different magnification ratio, the processing required to change the magnification ratio can be reduced.

<Feature Group H> Pre-emptive pseudo-variation on sub-screen A gaming machine H1 having a first display means having a specific first display area, a second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition, a display control means for displaying an effect based on the information on the first display means or the second display means, and a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition has been fulfilled, wherein the display control means, when it is determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition has been fulfilled, moves and displays the effect based on the information from one of the first display area or the second display area to the other display area.

Here, some conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a single display device, such as a liquid crystal display, that displays a variety of effect images (for example, JP 2013-13528 A). However, while the above-mentioned gaming machines are capable of displaying a variety of effect images, they have the problem that, because the effect image is displayed in only one location, they are unable to provide a surprising game experience using the effect image, which can lead to player boredom. Gaming machine H1 was developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate player boredom by providing a surprising game experience using effect images.

According to the gaming machine H1, the display control means displays effects based on the information acquired by the acquisition means on the first display means having a first display area or the second display means having a second display area. When the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition has been met, the effects displayed in either the first or second display area can be moved and displayed in the other display area, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game and reducing player boredom.

A gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it comprises: a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is met, a dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to display a dynamic display for a predetermined period of time as the effect based on the determination result of the determination means; a preliminary determination means for making a preliminary determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination means makes a determination; and a preliminary dynamic display control means for causing the second display means to display a preliminary dynamic display as the effect based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means.

Here, conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, hold a lottery when a gaming ball enters a prize slot, display a variable display based on the lottery result, reserve the right to enter the lottery, and perform an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) in which the display mode of the variable display is changed based on the lottery result stored in the reserved memory (for example, JP 2012-16499 A). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, a single display means is used to display the variable display based on the lottery result and the above-mentioned pre-reading effect. When a pre-reading effect corresponding to a specific reserved memory is performed, the effect mainly focusing on that specific reserved memory is forcibly performed, resulting in a problem in which the player loses interest in the variable display for other reserved memories. Gaming machine H1 was developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from losing interest while still providing effects based on the reserved memory.

Gaming machine H2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H1. That is, when a determination condition is met, the determination means makes a determination based on information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to display a dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. The preliminary determination means makes a preliminary determination based on information stored in the storage means before the determination means makes a determination, and causes the second display means to display a dynamic display in advance as an effect based on the result of the preliminary determination. In this way, by displaying a dynamic display on the first display means and a preliminary dynamic display on the second display means, the player can focus on the results of each dynamic display while anticipating the lottery results stored and reserved by the preliminary dynamic display. This has the effect of preventing the player's interest in the dynamic displays from waning.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that in gaming machine H2, the storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the information up to a predetermined number, has information selection means for selecting any information from the multiple pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the advance dynamic display control means performs advance dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

Gaming machine H3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H2. That is, the storage means stores multiple pieces of information up to a predetermined limit, and the information selection means selects any piece of information from the stored pieces of information. The advance dynamic display control means performs advance dynamic display in accordance with the information selected by the information selection means. This results in an advance dynamic display based on the information desired by the player. This has the effect of reducing player boredom.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that in gaming machine H3, the second display means is configured to be able to display multiple preliminary dynamic displays corresponding to multiple pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the information selection means selects any one of the multiple preliminary dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

Gaming machine H4 has the same effect as gaming machine H3, but also has the advantage of making it easier for the player to select the desired pre-play dynamic display by displaying multiple pre-play dynamic displays corresponding to multiple pieces of information stored in the storage means on the second display means and selecting any one of the multiple pre-play dynamic displays using the information selection means.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it includes a reserved symbol display control means for displaying reserved symbols corresponding to at least the information stored in the storage means before a determination is made by the determination means, the information selection means for selecting an arbitrary reserved symbol from the plurality of reserved symbols displayed by the reserved symbol display control means, and the advance dynamic display control means for performing advance dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the information selection means.

Gaming machine H5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines H3 and H4. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays a reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information stored in the storage means, prior to the determination by the determination means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary reserved symbol from the displayed plurality of reserved symbols, and the preliminary dynamic display control means causes a preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol. This allows an arbitrary preliminary dynamic display to be selected while viewing the displayed reserved symbols. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to select the desired preliminary dynamic display.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized by having an identification means for identifiably displaying the reserved symbol selected by the reserved symbol selection means in gaming machine H5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H5, gaming machine H6 has the effect of easily identifying the reserved symbol selected by the reserved symbol selection means using the identification means, making it possible to easily determine which reserved symbol corresponds to the displayed advance dynamic display.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized by having a reserved symbol display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol in gaming machine H5 or H6 to a predetermined display mode that suggests the display content of the advance dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol.

Gaming machine H7 has the same effects as gaming machines H5 and H6, but also has the advantage of making it easier for the player to select the desired pre-play dynamic display, since the reserved symbol display mode changing means changes the display mode of the reserved symbol to a predetermined display mode that suggests the display content of the pre-play dynamic display corresponding to that reserved symbol.

Gaming machine H8 is any one of gaming machines H1 to H7, and is characterized in that it has an information identification means for identifying the information used in the determination by the determination means and the information used in the determination by the preliminary determination means, and the preliminary dynamic display control means stops the preliminary dynamic display that is displayed based on a piece of information identified by the information identification means when a determination condition for the determination by the determination means based on the piece of information is met.

Gaming machine H8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H1 to H7. That is, the information used in the determination by the determination means and the information used in the determination by the preliminary determination means are identified by the information identification means. The preliminary dynamic display displayed based on one piece of information identified by the information identification means is stopped by the preliminary dynamic display control means when the determination condition for the determination by the determination means based on the one piece of information is met. This makes it possible to stop the preliminary dynamic display based on the one piece of information at the timing when the dynamic display based on the one piece of information is started. Therefore, it is possible to display the preliminary dynamic display selected by the player so that it switches to the dynamic display without any sense of incongruity. This has the effect of preventing the player's interest in the dynamic display or the preliminary dynamic display from waning.

Gaming machine H9 is any one of gaming machines H1 to H8, characterized by having a switching means for switching between the display content displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines H1 to H8, gaming machine H9 uses a switching means to switch between the display content displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means, allowing the player to display the desired display content on the desired display means, thereby reducing the problem of players becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine H10 is characterized in that, in the case where the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the one piece of information selected by the information selection means is displayed on the first display means by the switching means, when the dynamic display corresponding to the one piece of information is started, the switching means switches so that the dynamic display is displayed on the first display means.

Gaming machine H10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H9. That is, when a preliminary dynamic display corresponding to a piece of information is displayed on the first display means by the switching means, the switching means switches so that a dynamic display corresponding to that piece of information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, when a preliminary dynamic display corresponding to information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed on the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to that information continues to be displayed on the first display means, so the preliminary dynamic display can be displayed so that it switches to a dynamic display without creating a sense of incongruity. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the dynamic display or preliminary dynamic display.

Gaming machine H11 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H8 to H10, the preliminary dynamic display includes at least a determination result display based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the determination result display displayed in the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to a piece of information identified by the information identification means continues to be displayed in the dynamic display corresponding to the piece of information.

Gaming machine H11 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines H8 to H10. That is, as a preliminary dynamic display, at least a determination result mode display based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means is displayed, and the determination result mode display displayed in the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to a piece of information identified by the information identification means is also displayed continuously in the dynamic display corresponding to the piece of information. As a result, the determination result mode display is displayed across the preliminary dynamic display and the dynamic display, making it possible to produce an effect in which the preliminary dynamic display and the dynamic display continue seamlessly. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the dynamic display or the preliminary dynamic display.

<Feature Group I> Synchronous Presentation Gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, an information input means capable of inputting predetermined information, a presentation period setting means for setting a period during which a specific presentation mode can be displayed on the display means based on the predetermined information input by the information input means, and a specific presentation mode execution means for executing the specific presentation mode based on the fact that predetermined conditions are met within the period set by the presentation period setting means.

Here, some conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, simultaneously execute synchronized effects at predetermined time intervals (for example, JP 2007-252534 A). However, because the above-mentioned gaming machines control the execution of synchronized effects based on time, the timing of the synchronized effects can become monotonous, posing a problem that players can tire of. Gaming machine I1 was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate player boredom.

According to gaming machine I1, a presentation mode is displayed on the display means. Based on predetermined information input by the information input means, the presentation period setting means sets a period during which a specific presentation mode can be displayed on the display means. If predetermined conditions are met within that period, the specific presentation mode execution means executes a specific presentation. This makes it possible to set a period during which a specific presentation mode can be displayed based on the input predetermined information. Therefore, the period during which a specific presentation mode can be displayed can be changed, making it possible to alleviate player boredom. Furthermore, by inputting the same predetermined information into gaming machines installed side by side, players can experience dynamic displays at the desired timing, which has the effect of alleviating player boredom.

Gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it comprises gaming machine I1, a timing means capable of timing, and a time information acquisition means for acquiring time information from the timing means, and the effect period setting means sets a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means based on the time information acquired by the time information acquisition means and information input to the information input means.

Gaming machine I2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I1. That is, time information measured by the timing means is acquired by the time information acquisition means, and a period during which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set based on that time information and information input to the information input means. This makes it possible to set a period during which a specific effect can be displayed based on two pieces of information: the time information and the information input by the information input means. Therefore, by combining information, various periods can be set, making it possible to reduce player boredom.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is one of gaming machines I1 or I2, and has a specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the specific effect mode within the period set by the effect period setting means, and a specific effect mode execution standby means for suspending execution of the specific effect mode during the period from when the predetermined condition is met until the timing for executing the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means.

Gaming machine I3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the timing for executing a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode execution timing setting means. During the period from when a predetermined condition is met until the timing for executing the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means, the specific effect mode execution standby means puts the specific effect mode on standby. This has the effect of unifying the execution timing of the specific effect mode.

Gaming machine I4 is any of gaming machines I1 to I3, characterized by having a presentation mode storage means for storing multiple presentation modes, and a specific presentation mode setting means for setting the specific presentation mode from among the multiple presentation modes stored in the presentation mode storage means.

Gaming machine I4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines I1 to I3. A plurality of effect modes are stored in the effect mode storage means, and a specific effect mode is set from among the effect modes by the specific effect mode setting means. This eliminates the need to prepare data for a specific effect mode, as a specific effect mode that can be displayed within the period set by the effect period setting means is set from among the plurality of effect modes. This has the effect of reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that in gaming machine I4, the specific presentation mode setting means sets the specific presentation mode based on time information acquired from the timing means.

Gaming machine I5 has the same effect as gaming machine I4, but also has the advantage of being able to easily change the specific presentation mode because the specific presentation mode setting means sets the specific presentation mode based on time information obtained from the timing means.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that it includes a player-operable operating means and an operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and the specific presentation mode setting means sets the specific presentation mode based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determination means.

Gaming machine I6 has the same effect as gaming machine I4, but in addition, a specific presentation mode is set based on a predetermined operation performed by a player using an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific presentation mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determination means, thereby providing the effect of allowing the player to set the specific presentation mode they desire.

Gaming machine I7 is any one of gaming machines I4 to I6, characterized by having a specific effect mode execution restriction means that restricts a performance mode set as a specific performance mode by the specific effect mode setting means so that it is not executed outside the period set by the performance period setting means.

Gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines I4 to I6, has a specific effect mode execution restriction means that restricts the execution of an effect mode set as a specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means so that it is not executed outside the period set by the effect period setting means. This has the effect of providing a special feeling to the effect while eliminating the need to prepare data for the specific effect mode.

Gaming machine I8 is any one of gaming machines I1 to I7, characterized by having: a performance information output means for outputting performance information including at least specific performance mode information based on the specific performance mode displayed on the display means; a performance information input means for inputting information corresponding to the performance information output by the performance information output means; and a specific performance mode setting means for setting the specific performance mode based on the information input by the performance information input means.

Gaming machine I8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines I1 to I7. That is, the effect information output means outputs effect information that includes at least specific effect mode information based on a specific effect mode displayed on the display means. The effect information input means inputs information corresponding to the effect information. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. This makes it possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on other pachinko machines, making it possible to freely synchronize effect modes. This has the effect of increasing players' motivation to play and reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the gaming machine.

It is also advisable to include information about the time at which a specific effect is displayed in the effect information output by the gaming machine I8. This has the effect of synchronizing the time at which a specific effect is displayed, regardless of when the specific effect setting means sets the specific effect.

Gaming machine I9 is characterized in that in gaming machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that allows it to be acquired by an external device.

Gaming machine I9 has the same effect as gaming machine I8, but also has the advantage of facilitating the setting of specific presentation modes by the specific presentation mode setting means, since the presentation information output means displays presentation information in a format (e.g., a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (e.g., a mobile terminal).

Gaming machine K1 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and includes: a start operation means (e.g., a control lever) that initiates the dynamic display of the identification information; a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) that stops the dynamic display of the identification information or the lapse of a predetermined time; and a special game state generation means that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine K2 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined play area in response to operation of the operating handle, and identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port located at a predetermined position within the play area. Additionally, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize-winning device (specific prize opening) located at a predetermined position within the game area opens in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to enter as prizes, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of prizes won.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, wherein the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, on the condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, and wherein balls are used as gaming media, a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
<Others>
BACKGROUND ART Gaming machines have been proposed that are provided with a single display device such as a liquid crystal display device and that display a variety of effect images on the display device (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2013-13528 A).
In this type of pachinko machine, it is possible to display various effect images, but since the effect image is displayed in only one location, it is not possible to provide a surprising game using the effect image, and there is a problem that players get bored.
To provide a game machine capable of alleviating players' boredom by providing unexpected games using performance images.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a first display means having a specific first display area, a second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition, a display control means for displaying a presentation based on the information on the first display means or the second display means, and a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition has been fulfilled, and when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition has been fulfilled, the display control means moves the presentation based on the information from either the first display area or the second display area to the other display area and displays it.
The gaming machine of Technical Idea 2 is a gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, which has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means when a judgment condition is met, a dynamic display control means for making the first display means perform a dynamic display for a predetermined period of time as the presentation based on the judgment result by the judgment means, a pre-judgment means for making a pre-judgment based on the information stored in the storage means before the judgment is made by the judgment means, and a pre-dynamic display control means for making the second display means perform a pre-dynamic display as the presentation based on the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in which the storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of information up to a predetermined number, has an information selection means for selecting any information from the multiple pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the pre-dynamic display control means performs pre-dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in which the second display means is configured to be able to display multiple pre-dynamic displays corresponding to multiple pieces of information stored in the memory means, and the information selection means selects any pre-dynamic display from the multiple pre-dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3 or 4, which has a reserved pattern display control means for displaying a reserved pattern corresponding to at least the information stored in the memory means before a judgment is made by the judgment means, the information selection means for selecting any reserved pattern from the plurality of reserved patterns displayed by the reserved pattern display control means, and the advance dynamic display control means for performing advance dynamic display corresponding to the reserved pattern selected by the information selection means.
<Effects>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the display control means displays effects based on the information acquired by the acquisition means on the first display means having a first display area or the second display means having a second display area. When the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition is met, the effects displayed in either the first display area or the second display area can be moved to the other display area for display, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game and reducing player boredom.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1. That is, when the determination condition is met, the determination means makes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform a dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. The preliminary determination means makes a preliminary determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means, and causes the second display means to perform a dynamic display in advance as an effect based on the result of the preliminary determination.
Thus, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the preliminary dynamic display on the second display means, the player can pay close attention to the results of each dynamic display while looking forward to the lottery contents reserved and stored by the preliminary dynamic display, which has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the dynamic display.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means selects any piece of information from the plurality of pieces of stored information. The advance dynamic display control means performs advance dynamic display according to the information selected by the information selection means.
This allows a preliminary dynamic display based on the information desired by the player to be displayed, which has the effect of reducing player boredom.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, multiple pre-dynamic displays corresponding to multiple pieces of information stored in the memory means are displayed on the second display means, and any pre-dynamic display can be selected from the multiple displayed pre-dynamic displays using the information selection means, making it easier for the player to select the desired pre-dynamic display.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 3 or 4. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays a reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information stored in the storage means prior to the execution of a determination by the determination means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary reserved symbol from the displayed plurality of reserved symbols, and the advance dynamic display control means performs an advance dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol.
This allows the player to select any pre-play dynamic display while viewing the displayed reserved symbols, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to select the desired pre-play dynamic display.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
203a Special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
S305 discrimination means
S412 Preliminary determination means
S1214 acquisition means
S1314 Elapsed time determination means
S1708 extension period setting means
S1751 Predetermined period setting means

Claims (1)

a display means capable of displaying a performance mode;
an operating means operable by a player;
an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means;
an identification information display means for displaying, on the display means, identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means;
a bonus awarding means capable of awarding a bonus advantageous to a player;
a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The determining means determines that a specific determination result has been obtained, and when the determining means determines that a specific determination result has been obtained, the identification information display means displays specific identification information ,
When the specific identification information is displayed, the awarding of the benefit is executed ,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed and a predetermined opportunity has been established, a specific performance mode can be displayed on the display means,
a notification means for executing a notification effect to notify the player that the benefit will be provided when the benefit is provided;
The notification effect is executed at a timing after the specific effect mode is displayed,
The display is configured to display numerical information during the period in which the specific performance mode is displayed ,
The display device is configured to display first numerical information as the numerical information,
The first numerical information is configured to reach the second numerical information as the game progresses,
The system is configured to allow a player to understand that the specific presentation mode will end when the numerical information reaches the second numerical information ,
The notification effect is executed at a timing before the specific identification information is displayed, and third numerical information obtained by adding a predetermined value to the value of the second numerical information is displayed in a situation where the award is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the display period of the specific presentation mode is configured to be shorter when a specific operation is performed by the operating means than when the specific operation is not performed.